Home

Vista 50P - Information Technologies

1. cie a5 e Ls 1 4190WH ZONE EXPANDER ooooo APPLIES TO TABLE A amp B UPLY SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 A 12345678 SIDE VIEW 4 WITH TABLE A B POS 1 MUST BE DN UP THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH WORD UP B 4 DN DIP SWITCH POSITION DEVICE ID 4 6 7 8 10 UP UR 11 UP bowl on 12 UP JUP UP 13 UP JUP 14 UP UP 15 UP JUP xl 16 UP UP 17 UP 18 UP UP 19 UP 20 UP UP 21 UP 22 UP UP 23 UP E 24 UP UP 25 UP re 26 UP UP 27 UP bcd 28 UP UP 29 UP ou 30 31 UP Ea 32 33 34 UP 35 36 37 E 38 39 40 UP 41 42 UP 43 44 45 m 46 UP 47 48 UP 49 ES 50 UP 51 52 UP 53 54 55 56 UP 57 58 UP 59 60 61 62 63 E 64 UP 65 66 UP 67 68 UP 69 E 70 UP 71 2 72 UP 73 74 UP 75 76 UP 77 78 UP 79 ES 80 UP 81 82 UP 83 84 UP 85 86 UP 87 88 UP 89 BIT VALUE o 1 DIP SWITCH T
2. Second digit of each code applies only to 4 2 or expanded formats fields 52 amp 53 149 Section 22 DOWNLOADING PRIMER Remote Downloading is not a UL Listed feature This section provides the following information General information about downloading Getting on line with a control panel Advisories Access security Connecting the 4100SM module for direct wire downloading General Information Downloading allows the operator to remotely access program and control the security system over normal telephone lines Anything that can be done directly from the keypad can be done remotely using ADEMCO s VLINK downloading software To communicate with the control panel the following is required 1 An PC compatible 286 386 or 486 computer with at least 1MB RAM a hard disk with 12MB available disk space running MS DOS 3 1 or higher operating system 2 A HAYES 1200 SMARTMODEM external level 1 2 or higher internal level 1 1 or higher or a Hayes Optima 24 Fax 96 Other brands are not compatible even if claimed to be 100 compatible Internal modems must have 4 position DIP switch Modems with 6 position DIP 22 switch will not work 3 Alternately you may use a 4100SM interface module to direct wire the control panel to your computer at the site see Figure 4 V LINK DOWNLOADING software from ADEMCO
3. 4194 REED CONTACT SURFACE MOUNT O SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 SIDE VIEW DN DEVICE P SWITCH POS ID 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 UU i c C c c E SHI o o o U I SISISIS I U HS SI 0 0 0 5 U SISISISISISISISISISISISISISISIS 5 U HISISISISH ojojo IISI S c U c U I S SISIS Bl U Uu vv I ISISISISi 19115115151 5115115 D 0 0 0 0 0 vv0v v v v v 9 a a 0 a a a a ae sis SIS SSIS SSSSSESES SS SSS SS8SS8SE0 ASISSSISISISISISISIS 515151511 v v v v v v d d d 0 UO m o 175 DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR 5700 RF SYSTEM WIRELESS DEVICES HOUSE ID SWITCH SETTING FOR ALL DEVICES EXCEPT 5716 DIP SWITCH POSITION DEVICE
4. Second digit of each code applies only to 4 2 or expanded formats fields 52 amp 53 147 COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO HIGH SPEED FORMAT 94782 45 PRIMARY FORMAT 2 Ademco High Speed 51 DUAL REPORTING O mo 746 LOW SPEED FORMAT Primary 0 52 STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY 47 SECONDARY FORMAT 2 Ademco High Speed 0 0 0 0 0 0 standard Alarm Low Bat He OW SERED EO SMITE ANDARD E ANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY 49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 standard No checksum Primary Secondary Alarm Bypass Opn Cls Low Bat 5
5. 01 04 01 04 01 04 01 04 01 05 02 03 00 00 00 00 Note 00 is entered for those days on which the store is closed When programmed employees can arm and disarm the system within the open and close time windows respectively without causing a report to be sent to the central station reporting by exception At the end of these windows the system can be programmed to automatically arm disarm if an employee fails to arm disarm manually auto arm auto disarm Time driven events can be activated at different times using a window as follows At the beginning of a time window At the end of a time window During a time window active period only on at beginning of window off at end At both the beginning and end of the time window Ex to sound a buzzer at the beginning and end of a coffee break Open Close Schedule Definitions General The Open Close scheduling is controlled by one of three individual schedules Each schedule consists of one time window for openings and one time window for closings There are three types of schedules available Daily Holiday and Temporary Each partition can have one daily schedule consisting of one opening window and one closing window per day A holiday schedule will override the regular daily schedule on selected holidays throughout the year The temporary schedule provides a method for the end user to override the daily and hol
6. sete sete pen 94 93 MENU MODE PROGRAMMING 0 tn snae 108 93 Main Menu Options een 108 Zone Programming 110 Learning Serial Numbers pterea ra a 111 Programming Alpha Descriptors vtt d UP tau 113 Alpha Descriptor Vocabulary And Character ASCII Chart 117 Device ooo n ode ui ie PPE 118 Relay Voice Descriptors iia ieee an ee aS 119 Custom Word Index tete on e 121 SCHEDULING 122 Iitroductiom To Scheduling eo pinu ti on ote tees 122 Time Window Definitions P ra Pee 124 Open Close Schedule Definitions eese 125 Programming with 80 Scheduling Menu Mode 126 Basic Scheduling Menu Structure 127 Time Window Definitions Worksheet eee 128 Programming Time Windows 129 Open Clos Worksheet Pease 129 Programming Open Close 5 130 Holiday Definitions amp Schedule Worksheet esses 131 Programming Holiday 5
7. 0 Second digit of each code applies only to 4 2 or expanded formats fields 52 amp 53 COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO EXPRESS FORMAT 94 81 45 PRIMARY FORMAT 3 Ademco Express 51 DUAL REPORTING 0 46 LOW SPEED FORMAT Primary 0 52 STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY 47 SECONDARY FORMAT 3 Ademco Express 0 0 0 0 0 0 standard Alarm B Trbl n Cls Low B Tc POW SPEED FORMAT eG 53 STANDARD Ex SANDED BEFORE FOR SECONDARY 49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ol standard No checksum Primary Secondary Alarm Bypass L
8. 7 DisamWindw StartTime Hamm E 138 Arm Window Stop Ti Arm Window stat time Hum TT Stoptime HMM Programming Temporary Schedules Enter Seecurity Code 81 to enter this mode Note that only users with authority level of manager or higher can program temporary schedules Temporary schedules only affect the partition from which it is entered 8 StopTime HH MM 8 A Temporary schedules can also be reused at later dates simply by scrolling by pressing to the DAYS prompt described below and activating the appropriate days This should be considered when defining daily time windows Mon DISARM WIND This prompt asks for the start and end time of disarm opening window Upon entry of this mode the cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start time for Monday s disarm window Enter the desired hour Press to move to the minutes field The minutes are entered in the same manner The AM PM indication is toggled by hitting any key in the 0 9 range while the cursor is under the letter A P position Repeat for the stop time entry Press the key to move to the arming window for Monday Press if no changes are desired Mon ARM WINDOW This prompt asks for the start and end time of arm closing window The cursor will be position
9. advance to next screen Press to backup to previous screen RLY VOICE DESCR Press 1 to program voice descriptors for relays 0 1 ENTER RELAY NO Enter the 2 digit relay X 10 module number 01 16 for 00 QUIT 01 the relay desired or enter 00 to quit relay voice descriptor programming mode Press 119 From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list enter 01 ENTER DESC d1 the 3 digit index number for the first word of the relay descriptor phrase Press 7 to accept entry 01 ENTER DESC 2 From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list enter the 3 digit index number for the second word of the relay descriptor phrase If second word is not desired press 000 Press to accept entry 01 ENTERDESC d3 From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list enter the 3 digit index number for the third word of the relay descriptor phrase If third word is not desired press 000 Press to accept entry The ENTER RELAY NO prompt will appear Enter the next relay number to be programmed When all output devices have been programmed enter 00 to quit Enter 99 to exit program mode Enter the Installer Code OFF to cancel the system s settling delay Relay Voice Descriptors and Custom Word Substitutes Vocabulary Word Index Word Index Word Index Word Index Word Index Bl osi 116 Daughters 208 Garage
10. Enter 1 for the panel to defeat call waiting on the first attempt DO NOT enable unless call waiting is being used Otherwise enter 0 103 104 1 43 1 44 1 45 1 46 1 47 1 48 1 49 1 52 1 53 PERMANENT KEYPAD DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING partition specific Enter 1 if itis desired that backlighting for the keypad display remain on at all times Enter 0 if the display should remain unlit unless a key is pressed The backlighting then turns off again after a period of keypad inactivity Note that when a key is pressed display backlighting turns on for all keypads in that partition WIRELESS KEYPAD TAMPER DETECT Enter 1 to enable tamper detection on wireless keypad Enter 0 if tamper detection is not desired If this feature is enabled any attempt to tamper by means of many trial entries at a wireless keypad will be blocked by the control panel If more than 40 key depressions are received without a valid sequence arm disarm etc the Control panel will disable the wireless keypad The inhibit is removed once a valid key sequence is received from a wired keypad EXIT DELAY SOUNDING partition specific Enter 1 if beeps from the keypads during exit delay is desired Enter 0 for no keypad sound during exit delay AUXILIARY OUTPUT MODE Enter 0 if ground start output is required not for UL applications Enter 1 if the auxiliary output wi
11. Enter eight digits 00 09 A F 10 15 Only applicable if downloading will be utilized Make entries as 2 digit numbers as follows 00 0 02 2 04 4 06 6 08 8 10 12 14 01 1 03 3 05 5 07 7 09 9 11 13 D 15 F DOWNLOAD COMMAND ENABLES Dialer System Not Remote Remote Remote Upload Download Shutdwn Shutdwn Used Bypass Disarm Arm Program Program Each of the various remote functions can either be enabled or disabled through VLink or Compass downloading software Disabling a function means that you will not be able to perform that function with respect to this system Enter 1 to enable a function and 0 to disable a function See field 1 53 to disable the download callback option For UL installations all entries must be 0 PREVENT ZONE XX BYPASS partition specific Entering a zone number 01 86 prevents that zone from being bypassed by the user Enter 00 if this feature is not desired all zones can be bypassed This selection does not affect fire zones which the system prevents from being bypassed ENABLE OPEN CLOSE REPORT FOR INSTALLER CODE partition specific Enter 1 if open close reporting for the installer is desired Otherwise enter 0 OPEN CLOSE REPORTING FOR KEYSWITCH Enter 1 to enable open close reporting for the keyswitch Enter 0 if reporting is not desire
12. Low Bat 50 SESCOA RADIONICS SELECT 0 Radionics ALARM REPORT CODE amp ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 1 32 amp SUPERVISORY amp RESTORE CODES 54 CODE 55ID 56 CODE 57 ID 58 59 CODE 60 ID 61 CODE 62ID 63 1101 0 0 9 019 0 0 O 1 Alarm Rst 17 0 2 0 0 25 1 0 0 0 O 1 Alarm Rst 2 0 2 0 0 10 1 0 0 0 0 0 Trouble 18 0 3 0 0 26 1 1 0 0 0 0 Trouble 3 01 3 0 0 11111 0 0 0 0 Trble Rst 19 0 4 ojo 27 1 2 010 010 Trble Rst 4 04 0 0 12 1 2 0 0 0 0 20 0 5 0 0 28 1 3 0 0 0 0 5 015 00 13 113 00 0 0 BypssRst 21 016 00 29 1 4 00 0 0 Bypss Rst 6 0 6 0 0 14 1 4 0 0 22 O 7 0 0 30 1 5 0 0 7 O 7 0 0 15 1 5 0 0 23 0 8 0 0 31 0 1 0 0 8 0 8 0 0 16 01 0 0 24 0 9 0 0 32 0J2 0 0 ALARM REPORT CODE amp ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 33 64 amp SUPERVISORY amp RESTORE CODES 64 CODE 65ID 66 CODE 67 ID 68 69 CODE 70 ID 71 CODE 721D 73 33 0 010 41 1 1 0 0 O 1 Alarm Rst 49 0 4 0 0 57 1 2 0 0 O 1 Alarm Rst 34 0 0 0 42 1 2 0 0 OJO Trouble 50 O 5 0 0 58 1 3 0 0 0 0 Trouble 35 0 0 0 43 1 3 0 0 0 0 Trble Rst 51 O 6 0 0 59 1 4 0 0 0 0 Trble Rst 3601 1010 4414 00 0 0 Bypass 52 07 00 60 15 0 0 00 Bypass 37 0 00 45 1 5 00 010 53 018 010 61 011 00 010 Bypss Rst 38 0 0 0 46 01 0 0 54 0 9 0 0 62 0 2 0 0 39 0 oo 4702 00 55 110 00 63 03 00 40 0 0 0 48 0 3 0 0 56 1 1 0 0 64 0 4 0 0 A
13. ON ON ON 4 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 5 ON ON ON ON ON ON 4204 4 SWITCH FOR SETTING DEVICE ADDRESS AND ENABLING DISABLING TAMPER RELAY 4 TYPICAL SHOWN OFF RELAY COVER TAMPER REED SWITCH 4 PIN KEYPAD PLUG RELAY EITHER OR BOTH USED RELAY Y GGGGGGGGG oeooo DATA IN FROM CONTROL GROUND DATA OUT TO CONTROL 12V 4204 Relay Module Figure 16 Wiring the 4300 Transformer Powerline Carrier devices such as X 10 ACT Leviton are either plugged into standard AC outlets or wired into the AC electrical system by a licensed electrician depending on the type of device used They respond to on and off commands sent from the panel through the 4300 transformer to the receiving devices Connect the 4300 transformer as follows 1 Run a 6 conductor cable between the 4300 interface and the panel Splice this cable to a 4142TR cable as shown in the diagram below Note that the white and yellow wires of the 4142TR must be spliced together 2 Set the proper House and Unit Codes for each device following the instructions provided with each device Note each device s setup as these codes will be used to program the devices later 4300 TRANSFORMER INT
14. E oes fes ees Ee nae Time Driven Event Programming Action Codes 01 relay on 02 Relay Off 03 Relay Pulse 04 Relay Pulse XX minutes 05 Relay Pulse YY seconds 06 Relay Group On 07 Relay Group Off 08 Relay Group Pulse 09 Relay Group Pulse XX minutes 10 Relay Group Pulse YY seconds 20 Arm Stay 21 Arm Away 22 Disarm 23 Force Arm Stay 24 Force Arm Away 40 Enable Open Window by part 41 Enable Close Window by part 134 The following schedules can be used to activate outputs bypass zones arm disarm the system etc based on a time schedule Up to 20 events can be programmed for the system Time windows must first be defined in order to be used to trigger events If using Time Driven Events to control relays and or Powerline Carrier devices the following menu items must first be programmed using 93 Menu Mode Relay Programming Enter Relay Restriction Relay Type 420 House code and ECP address an reference identification number Relay Group if applicable 4 or X 10 Unit code if X 10 devices d specific Relay No if 4204 relays After entering Scheduling Menu Mode press 0 until the Timed Events prompt appears Timed Events 1Yes O No 0 TIMED EVENT 01 20 00 Quit 01 01 ACTION none 00 Enter 1 to program timed events using relay outputs or X 10 devices
15. Installer Code Entry Warning Entry Exit Delay EOL resistor Event Log Printer On Line Event Log Types 88 105 Event Log Printer Connect 82 Event Logging Procedures 2 83 Event Log Report Codes 103 Exception Reports 123 Exit Delay Rese t90 Exit Error by User 2 9 Exit Error by Zone Exit Error Logic se 90 Express Reporting 145 False Alarm Reduction 90 neca 172 FCC Registration 178 Federal Communications Commission Statement 172 First Test Report Time 100 Force Arm 123 126 Formats irn erret nette 141 General Information ey Global 162 Global Disarm 162 163 Ground Start Module m Handshake 141 High Speed 145 Holiday Definitions amp Schedule Worksheet 131 Holiday Schedules 126 131 IEI 735L series detectors 30 IgnoreExpansion Zone Tamper 96 Installer Code 94 Installer s Mes
16. 217 E o 165 Sixth 219 Foyer 137 North 146 Smoke 024 Front ict 087 Not 012 Son s 223 64 Section 10 4285 VISTA INTERACTIVE PHONE This section provides the following information General information about the 4285 VIP module Mounting and wiring the 4285 VIP module Programming the control for 4285 VIP module access Checkout procedure for the 4285 VIP module U L The 4285 VIP Module is not approved for UL installations General Information The 4285 VIP Module is an add on accessory that permits the user to access the security system via a touchtone phone either from on premises or by calling the premises from a remote location L Only one VIP Module can be used in a security system and partition assignment is done via 93 Menu Mode Device Programming The 4285 VIP Module enables the user to do the following via a Touch tone telephone A Receive synthesized voice messages over the phone regarding the status of the security system B Arm and disarm the security system and perform most other commands using the telephone keypad This usage provides voice annunciation over the phone to confirm any command that is entered C Control 4204 relays and or Powerline Carrier devices using the 70 relay access mode Facts You Need to Know The VIP Module can announce many of the same words that
17. RECEIVER TYPE Relay Action relay activated events relay commands relay descriptors Relay Group RELAY PROG RELAY TIMEOUT XX MINUTES RELAY TIMEOUT YY SECONDG Relay Voice Descriptors Relays and Powerline Carrier devices 56 Remote Keypad Sounding 76 Remote 76 REPORT CODES FOR EVENT LOG 83 REPORT CODES FOR ZONES 01 64 81 91 95 99 100 REPORT CODES FOR ZONES 65 80 RESPONSE TYPES RESTORE REPORT TIMING Restrict disarm RF RCVR CHECK IN INTERVAL RF RCVR SUPERVISION CHECK IN I RF TRANSMITTER CHECK IN TRANSMITTER CHECK INI RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORT RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORT RING DETECTION COUNT 67 RINGER EQUIVALENCE ringer equivalence number 31X Schedule number SCHEDULING RELATED DIALER ORTS SECONDARY FORMAT SECONDARY PHONE NU SECONDARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT SCHEDULING OPTIONS SETTING THE REAL TIME CLOCK KEYPAD FUNCTIONS TESTING THE SYSTEM SEND CANCEL IF ALARM OFF partition specific Serial Number Learning Deleting Sescoa Radionics SESCOA RADIONICS SELECT SOUNDER OPTION SPECIFICATIONS Standard Phone Line Connections STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT STANDBY CURRENT DRAW substitute word SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS
18. OY Uy ON COMMUNICATION PROGRAMMING GUIDE Fieldf _ Exprss 46 48 oose transmission No effect No effect No effect pe speedandtregeny end as either 4 No effect No effect No effect nf orexpanded HIER C NN MIL ERE 49 Addchecksumdigt Noefec _ Addchecksumdigt 81 82 Define codes and 1st digit enables report 1st digit enables report Define codes and selects 4 1 or 4 2 if it is non zero if it is non zero selects 4 1 or 4 2 54 56 59 Defines alarm event Enables reports Assigns reporting chnl Defines alarm event 61 64 66 code for all reports from this code 69 71 74 zone Enables alarm 76 reporting of 60 Detines code and No effect No effect Detines code and 62 65 67 selects 4 1 or 4 2 selects 4 1 4 2 70 72 75 77 8 63 nables report and nables report nables report and 73 78 selects code Note Note Alarm channel selects 1st digit of the No restores if must be programmed 2 digit event code event not sent 01 15 NOTE No restores if event not sent No eftect No effect No effect Selects fixed digit time instead of fixed interdigit N ote Low Spi not send 3 2 messages Zone ID digit is suppressed Loading communication defaults results in the following Low Speed Selects low speed standard format with no checksum for both phone 94 80 numbers Assigns the following report codes
19. 221 Light 019 Rear 088 Upper 187 Bedroom 015 Equipment 133 Living 030 Right 028 Upstairs 183 Blower 123 EX nei 004 Loading 142 Room 018 Utility 185 Boiler 124 Lower 094 Bright 162 Factory 134 007 West 215 Building 125 Father s 211 Machine 143 Second 056 Window 017 Burglary 039 Fence 135 Master 144 Service 150 Wing 216 Fifth 218 Medical 014 Seven 076 Call 009 Fire 040 Mothers 212 Seventh 220 Zero 069 Central 089 First 136 Motion 145 Shed 151 Zone 002 Chime 054 Five 074 Shop 152 Closed 126 Floor 029 Nine 078 Side 153 Computer 127 Four 073 Ninth 222 Six 075 Console 066 Fourth
20. For specific information regarding number of wireless zones supported by each X 2 RF receiver see the section on Wireless Expansion later in this manual Supervisory Zones Provides additional zones for supervision of the following RF Receivers Zones 88 91 Polling Loop Zone 97 4285 VIP Module Zone 87 2 8 Partitions User Codes Provides the ability to control 8 separate areas independently each functioning as if it had its own separate control Partitioning features include A Common Lobby partition which arms automatically when the last partition 1 8 that shares the common lobby is armed and disarms when the first partition 1 8 that shares the common lobby is disarmed A Master Partition 9 to which keypads may be assigned to view the status of all 8 partitions at the same time Keypads assignable to one of 8 partitions or to Master Partition 9 to view system status Ability to assign Relays Powerline Carrier devices to one or all 8 partitions Certain system options selectable for each partition such as Entry Exit Delay and Subscriber Account Number Acccommodates 75 user codes all of which can operate any or all partitions Each user if assigned to more than one partition retains the same user number across all partitions and will only utilize one user slot in the system Certain characteristics must be assigned to each user code which are as follows Authority level for e
21. UP UP Siri rr rS S SISS S ss tr rt E S UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP 555551515151 515 515 UP UP 32 o 4 2 S 8 o o e S For 5700 series transmitters not shown in this table refer to the instructions accompanying each transmitter 176 SUMMARY SYSTEM COMMANDS Event Logging Commands Alpha keypad only Wireless System Commands User Code Commands Alpha keypad only Arming Functions Alpha keypad only Alpha keypad only Alpha keypad only Programming Commands Scheduling Commands Alpha keypad only Output Device Control Alpha keypad only Event Log Display Code 60 Event Log Print Code 61 Installer Only Clear Event Log Code 62 Installer Only House Id Sniffer Mode Code 2 Installer Only Transmitter Id Test Code 3 Installer Only Go No Go Test Code 5 Test Key Add A User Code User Code 8 New User Number New User s Code Change A Code User Code 8 User Number New User s Code Delete A User s Code Your User Code 8 User Number To Be Deleted Your Code Again View User Capability User s Code Set Real Time Clock
22. 131 Time Driven Event Worksheet ee arent 132 Programming Time Driven Events 134 Limitation of Access by Time Worksheet see 136 Programming Access Control Schedules esses 136 81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode eene 137 Programming Temporary Schedules eee 138 83 User Scheduling Menu Mode ee exeat ec verte ese epos 139 SYSTEM COMMUNICATION 1 141 A Successhul ec E esses 141 Reporting Forrhats ipic VS S OR UE SR Ea 141 Loading Communication Defaults eene 144 DOWNLOADING PRIMER 1 1 150 General Informatiofi rede ei 150 Getting On Line with a Control 1 22 150 On Line Control Functions tee etu aree ert ete titles te deti 151 ACCESS SCCUIILY M 152 Connecting a 41005 Module for Direct Wire Downloading 153 SETTING THE REAL TIME 22 4 0 154 General Informat omas eie iy otv am eee d e desi et ed 154 setting the Time and Date noscere ute LESER 154 Section 24 Section 25 Section 26 SECURITY ACCESS CODES iscscccsssssssssssccsssnssccss
23. 5715 UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER 5701 PANIC TRANSMITTER HOUSE ID 1 SHOWN POS 6 UP XMTR ID 62 DN XMTR ID 63 KEYPAD HOUSE ID SHOWN XMTR ID FIXED AT 1 2 3 4 5 3 4 5 00 10101 418 DN 5711 5711WM DOOR WINDOW TRANSMITTER TERMINAL J BLOCK Y HOUSE ID 1 SHOWN 2345 6 7 8 9 101112 POS 1 UP NORMAL RESPONSE DN FAST RESPONSE POS 2 UP NO COVER TAMPER XMTR ID 33 SHOWN POS 12 A N O Avoid ID 32 37 with DN COVER TAMPER use N C setting DIP SWITCH POSITION 6 7 8 9 10 UP UP UP UP UP 5706 5707 SMOKE DETECTORTRANSMITTER HOUSE ID 1 SHOWN H2 3 4 8 2345678 XMTR ID 48 SHOWN DIP SWITCH POSITION 7 8 UP UP u ue UP UP UP up IMPORTANT SET SWITCHES WITH BATTERY REMOVED TERMINALS ME UU XMTR ID 33 SHOWN HOUSE ID SHOWN zai POS 6 UP N O DN N C SIDE VIEW UP SIDE VIEW UP t DIP SWITCH POSITION 9 10 DIP SWITCH POSITION 4 3 2 UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP
24. SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 A 128345 SIDE VIEW UP UP DN POS 1 LOOPS 1 amp 2 RESPONSE TIME W TABLE FAST SLOW A UP DN B DN UP THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH WORD DN DN DEVICE ID A DIP SWITCH POSITION 10 16 17 24 25 32 THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH WORD UP MEN B DEVICE DIP SWITCH POSITION 3 4 5 4192D 4192SDT 4192CP SMOKE DETECTORS SIDE VIEW UP APPLIES TO TABLE A UPLY Q SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 12345678 4 POS 1 MUST DOWN THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH WORD DN 4 DN DIP SWITCH POSITION 3 718 DEVICE ID 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP up UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP uP UP UP
25. o Second digit of each code applies only to 4 2 or expanded formats fields 52 amp 53 COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO s CONTACT ID FORMAT 94 83 45 PRIMARY FORMAT 1 Ademco Contact ID 51 DUAL REPORTING 0 m 746 LOW SPEED FORMAT Primary 0 52 STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY 47 SECONDARY FORMAT 1 Ademco Contact ID 0 0 0 0 0 0 standard AN SPEED TORT ecd qi 53 SEANDARD EXPANDED SECONDARY 49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION 0 0 Nochecksum ol Tol fol Primary Secondary Alarm Bypass
26. 053 Eight 077 Library 141 025 Bed 092 Eighth 221 Light 019 Rear 088 Upper 187 Bedroom 015 Equipment 133 Living 030 Right 028 Upstairs 183 Blower 123 Exit 004 Loading 142 Room 018 Utility 185 Boiler 124 Lower 094 Bright 162 Factory 134 Suites init 007 West 215 Building 125 Father s 211 Machine 143 Second 056 Window 017 Burglary 039 Fence 135 Master 144 Service 150 Wing 216 Fifth it 218 Medical 014 Seven 076 Call 009 Fire 040 Mothers 212 Seventh 220 Zero 069 Central 089 First 136 Motion 145 Shed 151 Zone 002 Chime 054 Five 074 Shop 152 Closed 126 Floor 029 Nine 078 Side 153 Computer 127
27. 40 88 4192SD 40 88 4192SDT 40 88 4194 38 88 BAO Y sees 38 88 4204 Relay Module 88 4208 39 88 49 7b ece ESTE 39 88 4218 ine eant ee edt 38 39 88 4281 RF Receiver 88 4281H 4 42811 41 4281M 5 41 4285 VIP Module 65 66 4285 VIP Module Options 67 4300 transformer 15 57 487 12 2 488 12 nee 5137AD 2 89 113 12 dicet ens 22 5700 Series Transmitter Supervision 46 5700 series wireless 42 5800 Series Transmitter Input Types 49 5800 series transmitters 49 5800TM 5881 RF Receiver 5882L 5882H 5890 6137 6128 4137AD 6139 ums TOD SENS E ec ant 719 719 sirens E 80 180 ABB1031 281 Loss Keypad Sounding 95 AG Eoss Siren i ete 80 AC Outlet Ground _ 15 86 AC Power Loss External Alarm 88 Keypad Sounding 88 AC Randomize 88 Access Control 3 126 163 Access Control Relay 105 Access Control Schedules 126 136 Ademco 4 2 Express 144 178 Ade
28. Features For Each Arming Mode Mode re Entry Perimeter Interior Delay Delay Armed Armed MAXIMUM Yes e Yes If enabled for the user the keypad will display the following 0 1 8 _ If NO the keypad prompts for arming each partition individually If YES the system attempts to arm all partitions allowed by this user If there are any faults open doors windows etc the keypad will display them See notes below These faults must be corrected or the zone bypassed before arming will occur When faults are corrected repeat the arming procedure 1 When using the Global Arm feature if there are faults in any of the selected partitions the system will enter a summary mode in which the faulted zones of all of the selected partitions will be displayed These faults must be corrected or bypassed code BYPASS will attempt to bypass the faults in all of the selected partitions This summary mode will end in approx 120 seconds if no keys are pressed If when disarming the system using a Global Disarm any of the selected partitions has a condition which would cause the keypad to beep such as alarm memory or a trouble condition the system will cause the keypad to beep and will enter a summary mode in which the alarm memory or trouble conditions of all of the selected partitions will be displayed This mode will continue until either approx 120 seconds elapses or a second disarm
29. If programmed provides users with a command which activates a relay for two seconds to open access doors e g lobby door Each partition can be assigned one access control relay Optional Keyswitch Supports the Ademco 4146 keyswitch on any one of the systems s 8 partitions If used zone 7 is no longer available as a protection zone Voltage Triggers Event Log Provides a trigger connector whose pins change state for different conditions Used with LORRA Long Range Radio equipment or other devices such as a remote keypad sounder keyswitch Armed and Ready LEDs or a printer to print the system s Event Log Keeps a log of different event types enabled in programming The Event Log has the following characteristics Stores a total of 224 events Can be viewed at the keypad or through the use of V Link software Can be printed on a serial printer using 4100SM module Scheduling Provides the following scheduling capabilities e Open Close schedules for control of arming disarming and reporting Holiday schedules allows different time windows for Open Close schedules Timed Events for activation of relays auto bypassing and unbypassing auto arming and disarming etc Access schedules for limiting system access to users by time End User Output Programming mode provides 20 timers for relay control Audio Alarm Verification Option Provides a programmable Audio Alarm Verification AAV option which c
30. PREVENT ADEMCO No 1361 Sao Installation Instructions au 2kEOLR 2k EOLR 2kEOLR 2k EOLR IN CANADA for max of keypads note 1 note 1 note 1 1 3 RISK OF ELECTRICAL USE dE CN and for max wire run length SHOCK DISCONNECT x 10 DEVICES N foo fpr TELCO JACK BEFORE WIPE BE USED SERVICING THIS PANEL NOTE AUXILARY POWER OUTPUT CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM SIGNAL TO A FIRE ALARM HEAD QUARTERS OR A CENTRAL STATION SHALL BE PERMITED ONLY WITH THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION THE BURGLAR ALARM SIGNAL SHALL 9 6VDC 13 8VDC 750 mA maximum Note Include current drawn by keypads and polling loop devices when making WHEN POWERING UP THE PANEL PLUG THE TRANSFORMER IN BEFORE CONNECTING THE BATTERY ALL CIRCUITS ARE auxiliary power calculations Usage 2kEOLR 2k EOLR NOT BE CONNECTED TO A POLICE POWER LIMITED ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT 10VDC 13 8VDC 0 71 note 1 note 1 oa EMERGENCY NUMBER Notes For UL Household Fire Installations Zone resistance Excluding EOLR FORGOMPLETE 1 Use 12VDC 14AH battery RAMA ZONE 1 100 Pr SAMUI EPIS USE UL LISTED ENERGY CABLE FOR ALL CONNECTIONS INFORMATION z auxiliary CUTS note 1 2 ALL OTHER ZONES 300 OHMS MAXIMUM maximum See installa THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN SEE INSTRUCTIONS 3 Combined alam nd auxilary power output Zone response time tion Instructions for ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL FIRE PROTECT
31. To EXIT The User Edit Mode Press either or or don t press any key for 10 seconds Section 25 KEYPAD FUNCTIONS This section provides the following information General information about keypad usage Basic keypad functions Global arming Access control Delaying closing time Executing the Go To command Viewing A user s capabilities Zone descriptors Downloaded messages Built in user s guide Speedkey macro commands Executing 70 Manual Relay Activation mode General Information The keypad allows the user to arm and disarm the system and perform other system functions such as bypassing zones viewing messages from the central station and displaying zone descriptors Zone and system conditions alarm trouble bypass are shown in the display window When an alarm occurs keypad sounding and external sounding will occur and the zone s in alarm will be displayed on the keypad Pressing any key will silence the keypad sounder for 10 seconds Disarming the system will silence both keypad and external sounders When the system is disarmed any zones that were in an alarm condition during the armed period will be displayed memory of alarm To clear this display simply repeat the disarm sequence enter the security code and press the OFF key The keypads also feature chime annunciation and 3 panic keys for silent audible fire or personal emergency alarms which can notify the central station of an alarm c
32. XX ASSIGNED ZONE Press to scroll through all zones in that list Enter 00 QUIT 00 00 quit Press 99 to exit program mode continue to the next procedure this section to program Relay Voice Descriptors Upon exiting program mode enter the Installer Code OFF to cancel the system s settling delay Relay Voice Descriptors If using the 4285 VIP Module voice descriptors can be programmed for each of the 16 relays Powerline Carrier devices used in the system These descriptors will be announced by the voice module when accessing the relays via the 70 relay access mode via telephone Each voice descriptor can consist of up to 3 words selected from the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list found later in this section The index numbers from this vocabulary list are to be used for relay voice 22 descriptors only For normal system voice annunciation eg alarms troubles status use the highlighted words in the alpha vocabulary list found in the alpha programming section To enter relay voice descriptors do the following 1 From data field programming mode press 93 to display the ZONE PROG prompt 2 Press 0 NO to each menu option until the RLY VOICE DESCR prompt is displayed Follow the instructions below While in this mode press to advance to next screen Press to backup to previous screen RLY VOICE DESCR Press 1 to pro
33. 10 feet 400 beige Indoor Piezo Sounder System Sensor indoor piezo sounder PA4OOR red red or beige rated at 90 dB 10 feet AB12 Grade A Bell For UL Commercial Burglary installations 81 Section 14 EVENT LOG OPTIONS This section provides the following information General information about the Event Log Event Log printer connections Programming Event Log options Displaying Printing the Event Log General Information This system has the ability to record up to 224 events of various types in a history log 224 event capacity Each event is recorded in one of five categories with the time and date of its occurrence if real time clock is set These categories are Alarm Supervisory check Bypass Open close System conditions The log may be viewed Display Mode on an alpha keypad or can be printed Print Mode on a serial printer connected to the system via a 4100SM serial interface module Event Log Printer Connections Connector J8 located above connector J7 on the right side of the main PC board is intended to be connected to a local serial printer via the 41005 serial interface module in applications where you want to print the event log on a local printer U L A UL Listed EDP printer must be used for UL installations Mount the 4100SM using its clip bracket to attach it to the side wall of the control cabinet Make connections between J8
34. DELETE S N 0 1 Yes To learn or delete a device s serial number enter 1 yes Enter 0 to move to the Alpha Programming menu Enter the zone number of the device to be learned or deleted Press to move to the next prompt Enter 00 to quit Serial Number programming If that zone number was programmed as a non applicable input type i e Hardwird in the Zone Programming mode a prompt indicating such will appear Press to return to the Enter Zone No prompt If a serial number has already been learned for that device a summary prompt will appear displaying the type of device and its serial number Press to continue to the Delete S N prompt Enter 1 to delete the displayed serial numbered device Enter 0 if this device should not be deleted 111 If a serial number for that device has not been Input 0 or 3 6 learned yet and if the device assigned to that zone number has been programmed as a serial number input device in the Zone Programming menus this prompt will appear Enter the device input type as follows 0 3 supervised RF transmitter RF type 4 unsupervised RF transmitter UR 5 RF button type BR type 6 serial polling loop device SL type Press to con tinue Learn S N 0 1 Yes If adding a new serial number device to the system this prompt will appear after entering the input type Enter 1 to learn the device s s
35. The factory loaded defaults 97 enable keypad addresses 00 03 only A keypad set to one of these addresses must be used to program the system 22 Entering Data Field Programming Mode 1 Enter program mode using either method A or B A Press both the and keys at the same time within 30 seconds after power is applied to the Control B Enter the Installer Code 8 0 0 keys The factory installer code can be changed once in the program mode field 00 If this is done programming can only be accomplished via the downloading software Local keypad programming can be disabled through VLink downloading software 16 2 After entry into the program mode the following will be displayed Program Mode Fill View 00 3 Following this display enter and the first field number to be programmed Enter the first field number to be programmed ex 00 installer s code and make the desired entry When the field is complete the keypad will normally beep three times and will advance to the next field If you do not desire to change the next field press and the next field number to be programmed First Page of fields 00 90 press 99 or 98 to exit program mode Moving from One Page of Programming to Another The data fields are grouped into three levels referred to as pages The first page is accessed as soon as programming mode is entered second and t
36. 001 3078 1 Learning Serial Numbers If learning the serial number now entering 1 at the last prompt this prompt appears Fault and restore the transmitter or polling loop device twice The keypad will beep twice when it hears the first transmission and three times when it hears the second f the serial number is printed on the wireless device it may be entered manually rather than learned The loop number you want to use for this zone must also be entered A summary screen will appear if the serial number was successfully learned Press to continue Press to continue The summary screen will then appear see summary screen description above Press to return to the Enter Zone Number prompt for programming the next zone into the system When all zones are programmed enter 00 and press The system will prompt Quit Enter 1 to exit back to normal programming mode Enter 0 to stay in menu mode Usually serial numbers are learned during zone programming But if not use 93 menu mode to learn serial numbers for example if all other programming was done via downloading 1 Enter data field programming mode installer code 800 2 From data field programming mode press 93 to display the ZONE PROG prompt 3 Press 0 NO repeatedly until the SERIAL PROG prompt appears SERIAL PROG 1 Enter Zone No 00 QUIT 10 PROG AS RF 2 A000 5372 2
37. 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 ALARM ALCOVE ALLEY AMBUSH AREA APARTMENT ART ATTIC AUDIO AUXILIARY BABY BACK BAR BARN BASEMENT BATHROOM BED BEDROOM BELL BLOWER BOILER BOTTOM BOX BREAK BUILDING BURNER CABINET CALL CAMERA CAR CASE CASH CCTV CEILING CELLAR CENTRAL CIRCUIT CLIP CLOSED COIN COLD COATROOM COLLECTION COMBUSTION COMPUTER CONTACT DAUGHTERS DELAYED DEN DESK space amp 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 ALPHA DESCRIPTOR VOCABULARY For Entering Alpha Descriptors To select a word press followed by the word s 3 digit number DETECTOR DINING DISCRIMINATOR DISPLAY DOCK DOOR DORMER DOWN DOWNSTAIRS DRAWER DRIVEWAY DRUG DUCT EAST ELECTRIC EMERGENCY ENTRY EQUIPMENT EXECUTIVE EXIT EXTERIOR FACTORY FAILURE FAMILY FATHERS FENCE FILE FIRE FLOOR FLOW FOIL FOYER FREEZER FRONT FUR FURNACE GALLERY GARAGE GAS GATE GLASS GUEST GUN HALL HEAT HIGH HOLDUP HOUSE INFRARED INSIDE 102 103 104 105 106 107 08 109 110 11 12 113 114 15 16 17
38. 4 Operator B Arm Disarm 5 Operator C Arm Disarm only if armed with same code Operator C sometimes known as Baby sitter code cannot disarm the system unless the system was armed with that code This code is usually assigned to persons who may have the need to arm and disarm the system at specific times only ex a baby sitter needs to control the system only when baby sitting Level 6 Duress Sends a silent alarm to a central monitoring station if the user is being forced to disarm or arm the system under threat only useful if the system is connected to a central station When the system s Auxiliary Voltage Triggers are connected to another communication s media Derived Channel Long Range Radio note that duress is signaled on the same trigger that signals silent panic whereas duress has its own unique report when digitally communicated Assigned on a partition by partition basis and can be any code or codes desired Will disarm or arm the system but will also send a silent alarm to the central station if service is connected There will be no indication at the keypad that an alarm was sent Duress Reporting Note The Duress report triggering logic activates on the 5th key depression such as OFF not the 4th key depression last digit of code Duress reports will not be triggered if the 5th key is a such as when performing a GOTO or viewing the capabilities of a user General Rules on
39. 65 80 RF RCVRs amp PANICS amp THEIR SUPV amp RESTORE CODES 1 35 CODE 1 36 ID 1 37 CODE 1 38 ID 1 39 74 CODE 751D 76 CODE 77 ID 78 65 0 010 73 013 010 0 9 Alarm Rst 81 0 3 0 0 89 017 0 0 O 9 Alarm Rst 66 0 0 741 03 0 0 0 0 Trouble 82 0 3 010 90 017 010 010 Trouble 67 010 75 0 3 010 010 Trble Rst 83 0 3 0 0 91107 010 010 Trble Rst 68 010 76 010 010 84 0 3 0 0 Dures 0 2 0 0 0 0 69 0 3 0 0 77 0 3 0 0 0 0 Byps Rst 85 0 3 010 97 017 010 010 Bypss Rst 70 010 78 010 86 0 3 010 95 012 010 711 013 0 0 79 0 0 87 017 0 0 96l 017 00 3 72 010 80 0 3 010 88 017 010 99 017 010 s SYSTEM NON ALARM CODES NOTES 97 Poll Loop Short 88 amp 90 RCVR not receiving transmitter signals 89 amp 91 RCVR not responding bad conn to panel ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES 79 ZONE TYPES 1 8 All enabled eee eee ee 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 80 ZONE TYPES 9 amp 10 1 11 All enabled 9 146 81 First Digit Close Open Low Battery Low Bat Res AC Loss AC Restore Test Power Cancel Prog Tamper 82 Second Digit 0 0 0 0 0
40. 7 Audio Out 4 Phone Out Ring GRAY lead from direct connect cord 4285 WIRING NOTES Wire the 4285 VIP Module exactly as shown using a direct connect cord and RJ31X jack If Touch tones are not present following phone access to the security system via an on premises phone try reversing the pair of wires connected to terminals 3 amp 4 on the 4285 and the pair of wires connected to terminals 26 amp 27 on the control Connection to the incoming Telco line via a RJ31X jack and direct connect cord as shown in this diagram is essential even if the system is not connected to a central station The 4285 will not function if this is not done The house phone lines must be connected to the VIP Module terminals only If they are connected directly to the control panel or to the incoming line an error tone will be heard when trying to access the VIP Module from an on premises phone If the telephone system on the premises includes a Caller ID unit connect the unit directly to the Handset terminals 26 and 27 on the control Incoming Handset Telco Line GROUND TERMINALS ONCONTROL 9 EARTH GROUND 4 INCOMING TELCO LINE CALLER ID AJOS g UNIT O amp S 2 o r DIRECT E IMPORTANT NOTE A CONNECT FOR EXISTING 5 18 m Rusix INSTALLATIONS B Jack RING EXISTING WIRES 5
41. AB12 BELL BOX WIRING ble night alarm type 05 or 24 hour audible alarm type 07 response A 24 hr alarm response must be used in mul tiple partition systems Wire the VISTA 50 UL door tamper switch in series with the AB12 tamper zone 2k EOLR 8 1 INOZ OL 2 1 INOZ OL 1 93 1139 S TANVd OL TWNIWHAL 293 1138 513 4 OL Program bell output for 16 or more minute timeout and for confirmation of arming ding All wiring from AB12 to panel must be run in conduit AB12 OUTER BOX INNER LINER quo Figure 26 AB12 Bell Box Wiring Non UL Installations For non UL installations the total current drawn from this output can be up to 2 8 amps A battery must be installed since current in excess of 750mA is supplied by the battery Up to two 702 sirens can be used wired in series Up to two 719 sirens can be used wired in parallel Programming External Sounders 1 With at least one two line alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 wired and set to a proper address temporarily power up the system by plugging the AC transformer into a 120VAC outlet 2 Enter data field programming mode Installer Code 800 Program the following data fields 13 ALARM SOUNDER DURATION partition specific can vary from one partition to another 18 UL AC LOSS SIREN 1 yes 0 no 21 PREVENT FIRE TIMEOUT 1 no timeout 0 fire timeout 23 MULTIPLE ALARMS partition spec
42. Adding a Master Manager or Operator 158 Changeing a Master Manager or Operator 158 Deleting a Master Manager or Operator uie 158 General Information 155 Using The Built In User s 164 Viewing Data Fields 17 VIP Module 165 VIP MODULE PHONE CODE VIP MODULE PHONE CODE Voltage Triggers 3 72 WIRELESS KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT 52 104 WIRELESS KEYPAD TAMPER DETECT 103 wireless keys 49 Wireless Zone Assignments for 5700 Series Transmitters 47 wiring length gauge chart 10 ZONE 9 FAST NORMAL RESPONSE 30 ZONE 9 RESPONSE TIME 94 Zone Cust Deleting a zone ZONE DESCRIPTOR Zone Descriptors Zone List Deleting erre 63 Zone List Programming 63 ZONE PROG x renean 36 ZONE PROG 90 52 Zone Programming 109 ZONE RESPONSE TYPE 2 67 ZONE RESPONSE TYPES 94 Zone Type 31 36 53 109 ZONE TYPE RESTORES 100 Zone Types neret 61 181 WARNING THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM While this System is an advanced wireless secur
43. Custom Message Display 116 Custom Words 1183 114 Daily Open Close Worksheet 129 Daylight Savings Time 105 DB25 83 Default Screen 116 Delay Closing Time 163 Device Programming 23 44 58 68 118 Dial Tone Detection 99 Dial Tone Pause a Digital Communicator 178 DIP Switch Tables we 174 DIP 2022 49 Disable Download Callback 104 Disarm Delay 123 Disarm Window 137 Disarming 93 161 Download Command Enables Download ID No 98 Download Phone No 98 Downloaded Messages VIeWIng 164 83 DER ens 83 Dual 100 D ress icici wee 155 Earth Ground Considerations 86 ECP Address w 62 EDP Printet 82 Enable 5800 RF Button Force Bypass 104 Enable 5800 RF Button Global Arm 104 Enable Dialer Reports Enable Force Arm for Auto Arm Enable GOTO for This Partition Enable J7 Triggers by Partition Enable Open Close Report for
44. ENTERED AT CONSOLE MOMENTARILY INTERRUPTS 4204 RELAY MODULE DETECTOR POWER Figure 11 4 Wire Smoke Detector Power Reset Using 4204 Relay Module 2 Connect detectors including heat detectors if used across terminals of the zone selected All detectors must be wired in parallel Remove the 2000 ohm EOL resistor if connected across the selected zone terminals You must connect the EOL resistor across the loop wires at the last detector Compatible 4 Wire Smoke Detectors Use any UL listed 4 wire smoke detector which is rated for 10 14VDC operation and which has alarm reset time not exceeding 6 seconds Some compatible 4 wire smoke detectors are listed below Photoelectric direct wire System Sensor 2412 Photoelectric w heat sensor direct wire System Sensor 2412TH lonization direct wire System Sensor 1412 Configuring Zone 7 for Alternate Keyswitch Function Zone 7 may be programmed to serve as a keyswitch input If using a keyswitch it can be assigned to only one partition To enable the keyswitch do the following 1 Enter the partition number to which the keyswitch is assigned in program field 15 2 Zone 7 is automatically assigned a response type 10 Interior w Delay 3 Wire the keyswitch to zone 7 Connect the EOL resistor across the zone If using keyswitch LEDs wire as shown in the VOLTAGE TRIGGERS section Wiring 2 Wire Latching Glass Break Detectors To Zone 8 Use zone 8 for connection of compatible 2 wi
45. INSTANT or MAXIMUM modes by using the key instead of the security code When armed reports closing as User 0 if open close reporting for User 2 typically a master level user was enabled for a given partition Enter 0 if Quick Arm is not desired The security code must always be used to disarm the system Note that if quick arm is used the installer code and authority level 5 code cannot disarm the system TOUCH TONE OR ROTARY DIAL Enter 1 if TouchTone service is being used Enter 0 if rotary phone service is used If selecting touch tone make sure the subscriber has requested and is paying for touch tone service Note that whether or not touch tone dialing for call placement is permitted communication by the use of DTMF signaling Ademco High Speed will still take place See field 1 33 for Touch Tone w Rotary backup 31 32 33 34 PABX ACCESS CODE This field is used to enter up to four 2 digit numbers 00 09 B F 11 15 If not required enter nothing and proceed to next address otherwise enter prefix needed to obtain an outside Telco line PRIMARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT partition specific Enter 00 09 B F 11 15 Enter a 3 or 4 digit depending on report format primary subscriber account number 00 09 B F 11 15 Each number requires a 2 digit entry so as to allow entry of hexadecimal digits B F If a 3 digit account number is to be used only enter data in the first 3
46. Installer Master Only Code 63 Arming Away Enter Code Away 2 Arming Stay Enter Code Stay 3 Arming Instant Enter Code Instant 7 Arming Maximum Enter Code Maximum 4 Quick Arm Use Key Instead Of User Code Followed By Any Of The Above Arming Mode Keys Global Arming If Enabled For The User The Keypad Will Display A Prompt Answer The Prompted Questions Disarming Enter Code Off 1 Bypassing Zones Enter Code Bypass 6 Zone Number To Automatically Bypass All Faulted Zones Use Quick Bypass Quick Bypass Method Enter Code Bypass Chime Mode Enter Code Chime 9 To Turn Chime Mode Off Enter Code Chime Again Partition Goto User Code Partition Number 0 8 GOTO Home Partition User Code 0 Panics 1 Zone 95 A Key Zone 99 Key 43 Zone 96 Key View Downloaded Messages Press 0 For 5 Seconds Display All Zone Descriptors Press For 5 Seconds Display User Self Help Hold Any Key For 5 Seconds Site Initiated Download User Code 1 Direct Wire Download Enable User Code 5 Enter Program Mode Installer Code 800 Exit Program Mode 99 Or 98 Installer Programmed Schedule Events Installer Code 80 Temporary Schedule Editing User Code 81 Installer Master Manager Only Extend Closing Window User Code 82 Installer Master Manager Only End User Output Device Programming User Code 83 Activate Output Device As Programmed
47. Previous Menu VISTA 50P VISTA 50PUL PARTITIONED SECURITY SYSTEM with SCHEDULING INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS an PROGRAMMING GUIDE ADEMCO N5944 6V1 10 97 ADDENDUM VISTA 40 VISTA 50P VISTA 50PUL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS This Installation Instruction Addendum covers changes made to the above Ademco VISTA panels to support new UL985 and UL1023 requirements POWER LIMITING All outputs are now power limited as per UL985 UL1023 The auxiliary power and polling loop output current ratings remain unchanged The on board PTC circuit breaker that protects the bell output was changed to comply with the power limiting requirement and as a consequence the bell current rating must be reduced from 2 8A max to 1 7A max at 12V to avoid false tripping of the new PTC There are additional restrictions on bell current rating depending on the type of installation as follows 1 For Household Fire or Combination Household Fire Burg Installations The total current drawn from the auxiliary power polling loop and bell outputs combined must not exceed 750mA in order to comply with the battery independence requirements UL985 2 For UL1023 Household Burg or VISTA 50PUL UL609 Mercantile Burg Only Installations Total current drawn from the bell output may be up to 1 7A A battery must be installed to supply combined auxiliary power polling loop and bell current in excess of 750mA TELEPHONE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION The telep
48. The 6 key is used to move the cursor to the right and the 4 key to move the cursor to the left Key 7 may be used to insert spaces or erase existing characters Create the message For example to replace READY TO ARM with the message SERVICE 424 0177 proceed as follows Press the 6 key to move the cursor to the right and continue until the cursor is positioned over the first location on the second line Press the 3 key to advance through the alphabet to the first desired character in this case S Use the 1 key to go backward when necessary When the desired character is reached press 6 The cursor will then move to the next position ready for entry of the next character in this example E When the cursor reaches a position over an existing character pressing the 3 or 1 key will advance or back up from that character in the alphabet Proceed in this manner until all characters in the message have been entered Save the message Store the new display message in memory by pressing the 8 key The system will ask for a new partition number Enter 0 to quit or 1 8 for a new partition number NOTE This vocabulary is not to be used for relay voice descriptors DESCRIPTORS section when programming relay voice descriptors 000 Word Space 001 AIR 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031
49. The first digit is displayed on the first line followed by a second line where the first digit is repeated 3 or 4 times and followed by the second digit This is the expanded digit 4 2 Format Comprised of a 4 digit subscriber number and 2 digit report code Ademco Contact ID Comprised of a 4 digit subscriber number 1 digit event qualifier Reporting Format new or restore 3 digit event code 2 digit Partition No and 3 digit zone number user number or system status number Ademco High Speed Comprised of 13 digits as follows A 4 digit account number eight channels of zone information 1 8 or duress plus 9 15 one status channel which identifies the type of events being reported in the eight zone locations Report 341 441 341 441 4 2 Standard Expanded Low Spd or Express Alarm SSS S A SSS S A SSSS AZ Z Trouble 555 5 555 5 5555 Tt TTT T t Bypass SSS S B SSS S B SSSS Bb BBB B b AC Loss SSS S E SSS S E 5555 EEE E Low Batt SSS S L SSS S L SSSS LLp LLL L Lp Open SSS S O SSS S O SSSS OU OOO O U Close SSS S C SSS S C SSSS CU CCC C U Test SSS S G SSS S G SSSS Gg GGG G g Restore SSS S R SSS S R SSSSRZ Alarm RRR R 2 AC Restore SSS S RA SSS S RA SSSSRA RARARA RAJAc LoBat Res SSS S RL SSS S SSSS R Lp RLRLRL REB Trouble Res SSS S RT SSS S RT 5555 RTt RrRrRT SSS S Rp SSS S Rp 5555 Rpb RgRpRg Rp b Where S
50. This software is available on both 3 1 2 and 5 1 4 diskettes and includes a complete User s Manual Getting On Line with a Control Panel At the protected premises the Control panel must be connected to the existing telephone line refer to the PHONE LINE CONNECTIONS section No programming of the panel is required before downloading to an initial installation To download do the following 1 Enter the installer code 4 5 The panel temporarily enables a ring count of 5 and sets the Download Callback option to 1 callback not required 2 Call the panel using the downloader software set to FIRST COMMUNICATION mode 3 The downloader will establish a session with no callback The panel information can then be downloaded In order to remotely access control or program the alarm panel a link must be established between the computer and the control panel as follows 150 The computer calls up the Control panel The phone number for each customer is entered into the customer s account file on the computer The Control panel answers at the pre programmed ring count and executes a handshake with the computer The computer sends a request for call back to the Control unless call back is not required The panel acknowledges the request and hangs up During the next few seconds the Control will process the request making sure certain encrypted information received from the computer matches its own memor
51. amp 8 respectively with respect to ground pin 7 The 4100SM module sets these pins high If the printer being used will not operate with these pins high then clip the blue CTS white DSR or red CD jumpers on the 41005 module to set the corresponding signal floating Important pins on the RS232C cable are pin 3 data out 7 ground and pin 20 DTR ready 4 The DTR signal as measured at 4100SM TB1 should be high 9 5 14VDC when the printer is powered properly connected on line and ready to print This signal will be low 0 1 5VDC when the printer is not powered not properly connected off line or out of paper The Control will not send data to the printer unless the DTR signal is high Programming Event Log Options With at least one alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 wired and set to a proper address power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC transformer into a 120VAC outlet previously wired to the control 2 Enter data field programming mode Installer Code 8 0 0 Program the following data fields 1 70 EVENT LOG TYPES 1 enable 0 disable for each type 1 71 12 24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT 0 12hr 1 24hr 1 72 EVENT LOG PRINTER ON LINE O disable 1 enable 1 73 PRINTER BAUD RATE 12300 0 1200 1 40 and 1 41 REPORT CODES FOR EVENT LOG 3 Exit program mode by pressing 99 xh If you need more information about actual programming procedures see Section 4 THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING E
52. for example that by pressing the D key the system can be programmed to log onto another partition bypass zones 2 and 3 and arm that partition in the AWAY mode explained in detail later in this manual Characteristics of keypad macros are Assignable to the D key by partition e Can each be 16 characters keystrokes in length Optional Output Devices 4204 Relays and Powerline Carrier i e X 10 Devices Accommodates the use of 16 output devices which can be a combination of ADEMCO s 4204 Relay Modules or Powerline Carrier Devices i e X 10 ACT Leviton Each 4204 module provides four Form C relays for general purpose use Powerline Carrier Devices are controlled by signals sent through the electrical wiring at the premises via a 4300 transformer Therefore if using Powerline Carrier Devices a 4300 transformer must be used in place of the regular system transformer Output devices have the following characteristics Can be programmed to activate in response to system events Can be programmed to activate using time intervals Can be activated manually using the 470 relay command mode Can each have an alpha descriptor assigned to it Optional Vista Interactive Phone Module Supports the Ademco 4285 VIP Module This permits access to the security system to do the following Obtain system status information Arm and disarm security system Control relays and or Powerline Carrier devices Access Control
53. or 24 hour audible alarm type 07 response The 24 hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned systems Use a bell with a tamper protected housing such as the Ademco AB12 The bell housing s tamper switch and inner linings tamper must be wired to the same zone that supervises the panel s tamper switch see EXTERNAL SOUNDER section for more information All wiring between the bell and panel must be run in conduit Remaining wires do not need to be run in conduit All wiring which is not run in conduit must exit from the knock out openings on the bottom or back of the cabinet All unused knockouts must be plugged using the disc plugs and carriage bolts supplied as indicated in the diagram below Fasten the cabinet door to the cabinet backbox using the 20 one inch long philips heads screws supplied after all wiring programming and checkout procedures have been completed CABINET ATTACK RESISTANCE CONSIDERATIONS Shows typical local Grade A listing installation RUN BELL WIRES PLUG THIS IN CONDUIT KNOCK OUT CLIP ON DOOR TAMPER SWITCH CABINET MOUNTING HOLE 4 PLACES PLUG THIS KNOCK OU PLUG THIS KNOCK OUT TO PLUG AN UNUSED KNOCKOUT OPENING REMOVE KNOCKOUT AND INSTALL A PAIR OF DISC PLUGS AND A CARRIAGE BOLT AS SHOWN DISC PLUGS DIMPLES IN DISC PLUG SHOULD REGISTER INSIDE KNOCK OUT KNOCK O a KNOCK OUT OPENING PLUG THIS RUN ALL REMAINING KNOCK OUT WIRES THRU HERE CARRIAGE BOLT LOOK WASHE
54. within each partition each user be programmed to have different levels of authority For example User 3 the V P of Engineering could be assigned to work within the Engineering Department Partition 1 of ABC Manufacturing Since he needs the full capabilities in his area he is assigned as a MASTER with Level 1 authority This means he may Arm Disarm Bypass Add or Modify users in partition 1 It is also a requirement that he be able to gain access to the manufacturing area partition 2 on an emergency basis You can set this up easily with the partitioned system by now requesting that he also be assigned to partition 2 with a level of authority set lower such as Level 4 OPERATOR Level B which allows him to Arm and Disarm but nothing else The control will automatically assign him the same user number within partition 2 and does not require reprogramming of his already existing 4 digit security code 157 EXAMPLE MULTIPLE PARTITION ACCESS Pati Part2 Pat 3 Part4 Par Part7 Pan users Maser In the above example User 3 has MASTER authority in partition 1 OPERATOR B authority in partition 2 His user number is the same for both partitions Note that if a user number is already being used in a partition the system will automatically assign an unused User number Also notice that no access is allowed for this user into partitions 3 8 Attempts to access
55. 03 for zones 2 47 01 for zones 1 amp 48 55 fire zones 02 for zones 62 63 panic trans amp 95 96 99 keypad panics 09 for all alarm restores Enables all zone type restores For 4 2 reporting enter 2nd digits in the ID fields of each report code For expanded reporting enable fields 52 and 53 ADEMCO Express Selects Ademco express reporting format with checksum for both phone 94 81 numbers Report codes for zones 1 86 RF receiver and keypad panics are sent as their respective zone ID numbers 01 86 88 91 95 99 Duress is sent as DD Alarm restore is E 2nd digit Enables all zone type restores ADEMCO High Speed Selects Ademco High Speed format with no checksum for both phone 94 82 numbers Reporting is assigned to the following channels Channel 1 for zones 1 amp 48 55 Fire zones Channel 2 for zones 2 8 Channel 3 for zones 9 16 Channel 4 for zones 17 31 Channel 5 for zones 32 47 RF interior zones Channel 6 for zones 56 61 amp 87 Channel 9 for zones 62 amp 63 panic transmitter Channel 7 for second RF receiver 88 amp 89 amp polling loop short 97 Channel 8 for first RF receiver 90 amp 91 Channels 10 11 amp 12 for keypad panics 95 96 amp 99 respectively Enables all zone type restores Enables Duress to be sent ADEMCO s Contact ID 94 83 Selects Contact ID format for both phone numbers Reporting is enabled for all zones Enables all zone typ
56. 1 below Table 1 below lists some compatible indicating devices When the supervision feature is used the minimum alarm load on the bell output must exceed 5mA at 12V for proper supervision operation If using a device with a high resistance trigger input such as a voice siren driver e g 745 x 3 do not supervise the bell output In this case cut the blue jumper in the upper left hand corner of the control panel PCB and assign zone 98 a response type 00 The siren driver module must be mounted in the panel s cabinet and for household fire installations must independently supervise its siren speaker wiring On panels that support partitioning bell supervision zone 98 is declared to exist in Partition 1 for keypad display event logging and dialer reporting purposes Contact ID Code 321 will be used to report bell supervision faults K3500 7 98 ADDENDUM Bell Supervision continued Diagram 1 Wiring Non Polarized Burglary Indicating Devices POLARIZING DIODES MUST MOUNT AT INDICATING DEVICE PANEL BELL TO OTHER DEVICES PANEL BELL NON POLARIZED BURGLARY POLARIZED FIRE INDICATING DEVICES INDICATING DEVICE Table 1 Some Compatible Indicating Devices Model Number Device Type Requires Polarizing Diode Ademco 719 Burglary Outdoor Siren w Built in Yes Driver not UL Listed Ademco 747 Burglary Indoor Siren w Built in Yes Driver Ademco AB 12 Burglary Grade A Bell in Box Yes System
57. 23 Keypads can be individually programmed to suppress arm disarm beeps entry exit beeps and chime mode beeps This helps prevent unwanted sounds from disturbing users in other areas of the premises Enter a number 00 03 for the keypad sounding suppression options desired for the keypad 00 no suppression 01 suppress arm disarm amp entry exit beeps 02 suppress chime mode beeps only 03 suppress arm disarm entry exit and chime mode beeps Press to continue The screen will prompt for the next keypad address to be programmed 4 Repeat the procedure above for each keypad used in the system 5 When all keypads have been programmed press 00 at this prompt to exit Menu mode programming The following fields are general keypad options you may want to program now These fields do not include Response Types or Report Codes for panic keys which must be programmed separately 29 QUICK ARM 1 43 PERM KEYPAD DISPLAY BACKLIGHT 6 Enter 99 to exit data field programming mode 7 Unplug the AC transformer and move on to the next section FJ Keypad address 00 is reserved for an alpha keypad with no sounder suppression options Section 6 BASIC HARDWIRED ZONES 1 9 This section provides the following information Common characteristics of hardwired zones Wiring burglary and panic devices to zones 1 8 Wiring 2 wire smoke detectors to zone 1 Wiring 4 wire smoke dete
58. After faulting the entry exit zone to reach the keypad to disarm the system Since this zone type is designed to provide an instant alarm if the entry exit zone is not violated first it will protect an area in the event an intruder hides on the premises prior to the system being armed or gains access to the premises through an unprotected area 05 Trouble by Day Alarm by Night This zone type will give an instant alarm if faulted when armed in the Away Stay Instant or Maximum night modes During the disarmed state day the system will provide a latched trouble sounding from the keypad and a central station report if desired This zone type is usually assigned to a zone which contains a foil protected door or window such as in a Store or toa zone covering a sensitive area such as a stock room drug supply room etc This zone type can also be used on a sensor or contact in an area where immediate notification of an entry is desired Type 06 24 hour Silent Alarm This zone type sends a report to the Central Station but provides no keypad display or sounding This zone type is usually assigned to a zone containing an Emergency button Type 07 24 hour Audible Alarm This zone type sends a report to the Central Station and provides an alarm sound at the keypad and an audible external alarm This zone type is usually assigned to a zone that has an Emergency button Type 08 24 hour Auxiliary Alarm This zone
59. Alarm Output ooo Battery Calculation Worksheet Capacity Forma 7777 Calculated Value Standby Capacity total standby load X 24 or 60 hours X 1 1 contingency factor use total standby load from previous worksheet Alarm Capacity alarm load 0 067 hours 4 minutes use total alarm load from previous bro am Total Capacity Add standby and alarm capacities E BATTERY SELECTION TABLE Yuasa NP4 12 Yuasa NP7 12 Yuasa NP 12 12 BATTERY STANDBY TABLE AUX STANDBY CURRENT DRAW foe we iex NOTE These figures are approximate and may vary depending upon the age quality and capacity of the battery at the time of the AC loss Connecting The Battery In the event of an AC power loss the Control panel will still operate for a period of time time period varies depending on size of battery used because the control has a back up rechargeable gel type sealed lead acid battery YUASA NP4 12 12V 4AH and NP7 12 12V 7AH batteries are recommended DO NOT use Gates batteries sealed lead acid type These batteries require a different charging voltage than is supplied by the panel The standby battery is automatically tested every 24 hours beginning 24 hours after exiting programming mode In addition entry into the test mode will cause a battery test to be initiated 1 Use the Battery Standby Table to select the appropriate battery for the i
60. Amseco PAL 328N for installations where you want the sounds produced by the keypad s built in piezo sounder to be duplicated in another location for one partition The panel will send all sounds remotely i e alarm trouble chime entry exit etc except for the short clicks associated with keypad key depression One application of this feature might be to produce chime sounds in a location which is distant from the panel s keypads You can also accomplish this by using relay outputs see SECTION 7 RELAY OUTPUTS AND POWERLINE CARRIER DEVICES Remote Keypad Sounder Connections e Connect the Amseco piezo between the panel s auxiliary power and the J7 connector trigger output as shown below IF USED 4142TR CABLE J7 CONNECTOR 1 OUT 1 IS NO LONGER USABLE FOR OPEN CLOSE OR GROUND START SEE Gao FIELD 1 46 U 2 OUT 2 3 4 CAN STILL BE ND GRAY USED PROVIDE ALARM GR OUND GREEN Ou BROWN G SOUNO BLUE Ou I4 BLACK Figure 22 Remote Keypad Sounding Connections STATUS INDICATIONS OR TO OPERATE A KEYSWITCH SEE FIELD 15 AMSECO PAL 328N PIEZO SOUNDER TO AUX POWER TERMINAL 6 10mA CURRENT DRAW 75 76 Programming Remote Keypad Sounding Options 1 With at least one two line alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 wired and set to a proper address power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC transformer into a 120VAC outlet previously wired to the control 2 Enter data field pro
61. Authority Levels and changes The following rules apply to users when making modifications within the system based on the user code authority levels Master Codes and all lower level codes can be used interchangeably when performing system functions within a partition a system armed with a user s temporary code can be disarmed with the Master Code or another user s temporary code except the Operator Level C Code described above A user may not delete or change the user code of the SAME or HIGHER authority than which he is assigned Auser levels 0 1 amp 2 only may only ADD users to a LOWER authority level A user may assign other users access to only those partitions to which he himself has access A user can only be DELETED or CHANGED from within the partition he is assigned User numbers must be entered as 2 digit entries Single digit user numbers must therefore always be preceded by a 0 example 03 04 05 etc Make sure the end user understands this requirement Temporary codes are entered as 4 digit numbers Ademco Contact ID format is capable of reporting Users 01 75 uniquely If any other report format is used only user numbers 1 15 can uniquely report to the central station Users 16 75 will report as User 15 Multiple Partition Access Examples Each user is programmed for a primary home partition A user can also be given access to operate one or more partitions In addition
62. During is the only valid choice for these commands Action Code Action Specifier 40 Enable Opening Window by partition Partition s 41 Enable Closing Window by partition Partition s 42 Enable Access Window for Access group Access Group 3 Enter the desired Activation time which refers to when the action is to take place relative to the time window Select from 1 Beginning of time window 2 End of time window During time window active period only On at beginning of window off at end This can be used in conjunction with the arm disarm or bypass commands to control a part of the system during the window For example if bypass is selected to activate during the window the zones in the zone list will be bypassed at the beginning of the window and unbypassed at the end of the window Beginning and end of time window ex Coffee break buzzer In this example if relay pulse was selected the relay would pulse for 2 seconds at the beginning of the window signaling the beginning of the coffee break At the end of the window it would pulse again signaling the end of coffee break Action Activation Specifier Time Sched Time Day s Action N Desired 3 4 Ne e Time Driven Events Worksheet um Window M TIWI T F N Bi 38 2 4 5 d 1 a7 ELEME 19 oo ID O1
63. Four 073 Ninth 222 075 Console 066 Fourth ONO 165 Sixth 219 Foyer 137 North 146 Smoke 024 Front 087 Not 012 Son s 223 120 Custom Word Substitutes for VIP Module Annunciation A substitute word can be programmed for each of the 20 custom words used in your alpha zone descriptions This substitute word will be announced by the VIP module in place of the custom word that is displayed on the alpha keypad For example an alarm display of John s Bedroom could be announced as Son s Bedroom since there is no annunciation for the custom word John Note that if a substitute word is not assigned the VIP module will not annunciate the zone descriptor at all but will only annunciate the zone number To enter custom words substitutes do the following 1 From data field programming mode press 93 to display the ZONE PROG prompt 2 Press 0 NO to each menu option until the CUSTOM INDEX prompt is displayed CUSTOM INDEX Enter 1 at this prompt 0 no 1 CUSTOM WORD NO Enter the custom word number 01 20 for which a 00 QUIT voice substitute is desired Enter 00 to quit this programming mode Press 7 to accept entry 01 ENTER INDEX Enter the 3 digit substitute word index num
64. S PREMISES CONNECTED TO THE 3918 ANSWERING HANDSET TERMINALS 8 PLUG MACHINE AND ON CONTROL MUST 85 36 PHONES MOVED FROM THERE zo TO TERMINALS 3 AND 4 c ANSWERING ON THE 4285 MACHINE 5 4285 gt GND TERMINAL ON CONTROL 5 M VIP MODULE NOT INSTALLER 4 o ADJUSTABLE KEYED lo lo HEADER 4 t i TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS UNUSED I YELLOW TO DATA OUT term 9 TO CONTROL PANEL 5 _ RING PHONE INPUT CONNECTOR RED TO AUX term 6 TERMINALS USED i 3 TIP WITH FLYING BLACK AUX GROUND term 7 FOR KEYPAD 4 RING PHONE OUTPUT LEADS GREEN term 8 CONNECTIONS 1 5 GROUND 5 AUDIO OUT 1 FOR FUTURE USE Figure 18 4285 VIP Module Connections Programming 4285 VIP Module Options 1 With at least one alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 wired and set to a proper address temporarily power up the system by plugging the transformer into a 120VAC outlet previously wired to the control 2 Enter data field programming mode Installer Code 800 and program the following fields 20 VIP MODULE PHONE CODE 44 RING DETECTION COUNT cannot be set to 0 74 75 ALARM REPORT CODE for VIP module faults zone 87 1 09 ZONE RESPONSE for module zone 87 type 05 67 68 3 From data field programming mode pres
65. Supervised Fire 93 SUPERVISION PULSES FOR LORRA 107 Supplementary Power Supply SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION Swinger Suppression SWINGER SUPPRESSI partition specific System Operation tamper protection TECHNICAL SUPPORT Temporary schedule Worksheet Temporary Schedules TEST REPORT INTERVAL 96 THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING 16 the Open Close Trigger time window number Time Windows 1 Time Windows Definitions Worksheet Time Driven Event Programming Time Driven Event Worksheet 132 139 TOUCH TONE OR ROTARY DIAL 97 TOUCH TONE W ROTARY BACKUP Trouble by Day Alarm by Nigh Trouble Conditions Turning The System Over To The User 167 UL 15 21 UL AC LOSS SIREN 95 UL Household Fire Burglary applications 45 UL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 170 UL installations 65 UL Listed applications 0111023 Household amp UL609 Commercial Burglary Installations 80 UL365 POLICE STATION CONNECTED BURGLAR ALARM _ 17 UL609 GRADE A LOCAL MERCANTILE PREMISES LOCAL MERCANTILE SAFE amp VAULT 170 UL611 UL1610 CENTRAL STATION BURGLARY ALARM 171 Unsupervised RF 49 USE PARTITION DESCRIPTORS User Codes j
66. User Code 71 Activate Output Device As Programmed User Code 72 Activate Access Relay For Current Partition User Code 0 Activate Output Device Manually User Code 70 177 SPECIFICATIONS VISTA 50P VISTA 50PUL CONTROLS Physical Electrical VOLTAGE INPUT ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT BACK UP BATTERY STANDBY CIRCUIT PROTECTORS DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR FORMATS SUPPORTED ADEMCO HIGH SPEED ADEMCO 442 EXPRESS ADEMCO LOW SPEED ADEMCO CONTACT ID SESCOA RADIONICS LOW SPEED LINE SEIZE Double Pole RINGER EQUIV ALENCE 0 7B 12 1 2 W X 14 1 2 H X 3 D VISTA 50P 14 1 2 W X 18 H X 4 3 D VISTA 50PUL From Ademco No 1361 Plug In Transformer use 1361CN in Canada or 4300 transformer for X 10 installations rated 16 5 VAC 40 VA 10VDC 13 8VDC 2 8 amps max UL1023 1 609 installations 750mA less aux current draw UL985 installations 9 6VDC 13 8VDC 750mA max For UL installations the accessories connected to the output must be UL Listed and rated to operate in the above voltage range 12VDC 4AH or 7AH gel cell YUASA NP4 12 12V 4AH or NP7 12 12V 7AH recommended 4 hours min with 750 mA aux load using 7 AH battery PTC circuit breakers are used on battery input to protect against reverse battery connections and on alarm sounder output to protect against wiring faults Shorts A solid state circuit breaker is used on auxiliary power output to protect against wiring f
67. alarm installation Please be advised that if this option is selected it may defeat modem download and 4285 VIP module remote access capability The DIP switch settings shown on the triggering diagrams disable remote AAV module trigger option The control also requires that the AAV module trigger type is falling edge which is set in DIP switch settings shown xK 1 685 Receiver software must be rev 4 6 or higher Earlier versions will not hold the phone line connection 2 Contact ID code for listen in to follow is 606 Contact ID is the only reporting format that will send a listen in to follow Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections Connect the Audio Alarm Verification module s falling edge trigger input terminal 5 on Eagle model 1241 to J7 connector trigger output or to a 4204 relay module as shown in the various diagrams in Figure 19 22 If also using 4285 VIP Module be sure to follow the corresponding diagram when making connections Programming Audio Alarm Verification Module Options 1 With at least one two line alpha keypad wired and set to a proper address temporarily power up the system by plugging the AC transformer into a 120VAC outlet previously wired to the control 2 Enter data field programming mode Installer Code 8 O O Program the following data fields 146 X AUXILIARY OUTPUT ENABLE Set for unless using 4204 relay module 1 60 ZONE 5 AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATIO
68. alphabet and actual words in descending alphabetical order 2 Adds or removes an s s to a vocabulary word 6 Switches between alphabet and actual word list used to accept entries 8 Saves the zone description in the system s memory plus zone number displays the description for that zone Enter the zone number to which you want to assign a descriptor Ex Key 01 to begin entering the description for zone 1 key 02 for zone 2 03 for zone etc The following will be displayed ZN 01 Note that the first letter of the alphabet appears after the zone number and that the zone number is automatically included with the description Enter the descriptor for that zone Use one of two methods as follows assume for example that the desired description for zone 1 is BACK DOOR 113 114 Press followed by the 3 digit number of the first word from the fixed dictionary shown later in this section e g 0 1 3 for BACK Press 6 in order to accept the word and proceed or press 8 to store the complete descriptor and exit or b Select the first letter of the desired description note that A is already displayed Use the 3 key to advance through the alphabet and the 1 key to go backward Press the 3 key repeatedly until B appears press 1 to go backwards if you happen to pass it then press key 6 to display the first available word beginning with B Press the 3 k
69. and 03 are enabled in the system s default program Any keypads set for address 04 and above will appear blank until they are enabled in the system s program keypads as well as other devices connected to the keypad terminals Keypads set to the non addressable mode address 31 may interfere with other 22 4 After addresses are set the green READY LED or POWER LED on some types of keypads should light and the word READY Fixed word keypads or DISARMED READY TO ARM Alpha keypads should be displayed on keypads set to addresses 00 01 02 and 03 If the Ready display does not appear on any of the keypads in the system in either of the partitions or a Not Ready message is displayed check the keypad wiring connections and make sure each of the 8 basic hard wired zones has a 2000 ohm resistor connected across its terminals 5 When the proper Ready message is displayed on the keypad s addressed at 00 01 02 and 03 the system is functioning properly at this point Do not remove the EOL resistors until you are ready to make connections to the hard wired zones to allow for testing later in the manual 22 If an OPEN CIRCUIT is present on the keypad data from the control is not reaching the keypad Please check your wiring Programming Remote Keypads Each keypad s corresponding address must be enabled in the system s Device Programming Mode in order to become oper
70. antennas The 5800TM must not be installed within the control cabinet Mount the unit using its accompanying mounting bracket 5800TM Wiring Connections Connect the 5800TM to the control panel s keypad connection terminals using the supplied connector with flying leads as follows WIRE TERMINAL ON CONTROL RED 12VDC Terminal 6 BLACK Ground Terminal 7 GREEN Data to Control Terminal 8 YELLOW Data from Control Terminal 9 BLUE Not Used Cut the red jumper for address setting 28 cut the white jumper for address 29 cut both jumpers for address 30 22 This address must be enabled as alpha keypad in the control s Device Programming mode and then assigned to a partition as described later in this section For additional information refer to the 5800TM s instructions Programming The Wireless Receiver 1 With at least one two line alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 wired and set to a proper address power up the system temprarily by plugging the AC transformer into a 120VAC outlet previously wired to the control 2 Enter data field programming mode Installer Code 800 a If using a 4281 set data field 1 32 to 1 If using a 5881 set data field 1 32 to 2 b Set data field 1 30 RF RCVR CHECK IN INTERVAL 02 15 times 2 hrs 3 From data field programming mode press 93 to display the ZONE PROG prompt Press 0 NO repeatedly until the DEVICE PROG prompt appears Follow t
71. assigned to a user code when adding a user Wireless One piece smoke detectors with Photoelectric built in transmitter Smoke Detectors Miniature Has single pushbutton Personal Emergency Usually programmed for a Transmitter response type of 24 Hr Audible or 24 Hr Silent other zone responses are possible e If using for arming disarming the button must be assigned to a user code when adding a user Product Learn As Input Type D escription Door Window RF Transmitter Has two unique input loop codes one for a wired closed circuit contact loop the other for a built in reed switch used in conjunction with a magnet Low Temperature Sensor Transmits a fault condition when temperature drops below 45 degrees Learned into the system by the internal reed switch using a magnet Multi Point Universal Transmitter Has three unique input loop codes one for a Primary contact loop with programmable options the others for two Auxiliary closed circuit contact loops Recessed Transmitter Reed switch magnetic contact sensor that is easily concealed in the frame and edge of a door or window Has a single unique input loop code Wireless Keypad Can be used to turn the burglary protection on and off Features the same built in panic functions as wired keypads The keypad is identified as zone 00 on wired keypads when it transmits with a low battery 5
72. be owned and managed by the same person s All partitions must be part of one building at one street address The audible alarm device s must be placed where it they can be heard by all partitions The Control cabinet must be protected from unauthorized access This can be done by installing a tamper switch on the cabinet door not supplied with VISTA 50P supplied with VISTA 50PUL or by installing a UL Listed passive infrared detector positioned to detect cabinet access Wire the selected device to any EOLR supervised zone zone 1 8 Program this zone for day trouble night alarm type 05 or 24 hour audible alarm type 07 response The 24 hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned systems Remote Downloading and auto disarming are not UL Listed features UL609 GRADE A LOCAL MERCANTILE PREMISES LOCAL MERCANTILE 1 2 SAFE amp VAULT Use the VISTA 50PUL All zones must be configured for EOLR supervision 41 0 Wireless sensors may not be used If 4190WH RPMs are used set field 24 to 0 to enable tamper detection Attach a door tamper switch supplied to the VISTA 50PUL cabinet backbox For safe and vault installations a shock sensor not supplied must also be attached to the backbox Also see MOUNTING THE CABINET section Wire an Ademco AB12 Grade Bell Box to the bell output Bell wires must be run in conduit Program the bell output for 16 or more minute timeout and for confirmation of a
73. by step through the options Auto Arming The system can automatically arm AWAY mode itself at the end of a pre determined closing arming time window if the system has not been armed manually Auto arming can be delayed three ways by use of the auto arm delay the auto arm warning or by manually extending the closing arming time window with a keypad command The system can also automatically bypass any open zones when auto arming Auto Arm Delay Auto arm delay provides a delay grace period before auto arming It starts at the end of the closing window The delay is set in 4 minute increments up to 56 minutes in partition specific program field 2 05 The expiration of this delay causes the auto arm warning to start Auto Arm The auto arm warning causes the keypad sounder to warn Warning the user of an impending auto arm The warning can be set to start 01 to 15 minutes prior to arming in partition specific program field 2 06 During this period the keypad will beep every 15 seconds and display AUTO ARM AA on non alpha keypads The beeps may be silenced by hitting any key on a keypad When the remaining time drops below 60 seconds the keypads will begin to beep every 5 seconds The panel will arm at the conclusion of the auto arm warning period 122 Extend Closing Window Force Arm Auto Disarming Disarm Delay Restrict Disarming Exception Reports Time Driven Event
74. certain non supervised transmitters e individually assignable to one of 8 partitions U L Wireless may not be used in UL Commercial Burglary installations Wireless Systems Available The VISTA 50P supports wireless zones which may be used exclusively or in addition to hardwire and or polling loop zones The system supports two different wireless systems which have many similarities but notable differences in the programming of the transmitters for each system The following receivers may be used with this system and each supports the number of zones shown below 5700 Series Recvr Zones 4281L up to 4 4281M up to 8 4281H upto63 5800 Series Recvr Zones 5881L up to 8 5881M to 16 5881H up to 86 In Canada 5800 systems must use 5882 series receivers 5882L 5882H Information gh this manual relative to the 5881 receivers applies as well to the 5882 receivers 5881 and 5882 receivers can all use the same transmitters 41 42 Wireless System Operation and Supervision The receiver responds to status and alarm signals from wireless transmitters 345MHz USA 315MHz 5700 series and 345 MHz 5800 series Canada within a nominal range of 200 feet and relays this information to the control Each supervised transmitter sends a supervisory signal to the receiver every 70 90 minutes If after a programmed interval of time i e 12 hrs the receiver
75. closing time windows The system sends early opening closing reports if done earlier than the corresponding window The system sends late opening closing reports if done later than the corresponding window The system sends missed open close reports if no opening closing occurs by the end of the corresponding window By using time windows the system can automatically activate and de activate relays and or power line carrier X 10 devices at pre detemined times to turn lights or other devices on and off The system can perform the same actions on a daily basis or can be made to perform an action only once i e turn on the porch light this Wednesday at 8 00pm The system also provides up to 20 timers available to the end user for the purpose of activating output devices at preset times and on preset days A user s access can be limited to a certain time period during which he can perform system functions Outside this time that user s code will be inactive The system provides up to 8 Access Schedules each consisting of two Time Windows one for opening one for closing for each day of the week and two time windows for holidays The access schedules are programmed via 80 Menu Mode and enabled for a given user when that user is added to the system If a user tries to operate the system outside of the schedule the alpha keypad will display Access Denied 123 124 Time Windows Definitions Time Windows Exam
76. de ces entreprises Les r parations du mat riel homologu doivent tre effectu es pas un centre d entretien canadien autoris d sign par le fournisseur La compagnie de t l communications peut demander l utilisateur de d brancher un appareil la suite de r parations ou de modifications effectu es par l utilisateur ou cause de mauvais fonctionnement Pour sa propre protection l utilisateur doit s assurer que tous les fils de mise en terre de la source d nergie lectrique des lignes t l phoniques de r seau de conduites d eau s il y en a soient raccord s ensemble Cette pr caution est particuli rement importante dans les r gions rurales Avertissement L utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui m me il doit avoir recours un service d inspection des installations lectriques ou un lectricien selon le cas L indice de charge IC assign chaque dispositif terminal pour viter toute surcharge indique le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut tre raccord un circuit t l phonique boucl utilis par ce dispositif La terminaison du circuit boucl peut tre constitu e de n importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l ensemble des dispositifs ne d passe pas 100 173 174 DIP SWITCH TABLES DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR ADDRESSABLE POLLING LOOP DEVICES 4208 ZONE EXPANDER 02000000000 000000
77. description of the entire system is located at the beginning of the manual followed by the basics of programming The wiring and physical setup of the hardware follows The sections at the core of the manual include both hardware setup and programming requirements of each device to make that specific device operational in the system A checkout procedure is included at the end of each section We recommend this method to ensure that each device is working properly before proceeding to the next section It must also be used if you are making a particular addition to the system of one of these devices Each of the sections covering the installation of peripheral devices includes the programming for that device If you are an experienced user of Ademco products you may choose to wire and then program the entire system at once If so refer to Sections 18 through 20 for complete system programming options after the hardware setup is complete A blank pull out programming form is included with this manual Use this in addition to the 93 and 80 Menu modes for complete system programming options Without an understanding of the programming methodology you will not be able to successfully perform the required programming in each of these sections We therefore urge you to read Section 4 THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING before any programming is performed This manual uses various icons to denote critical notes and technical tips to assist you with the
78. displayed 2 lines of text are displayed at a time This function operates in either the armed or the disarmed state There are three panic key pairs shown below that if programmed can be used to manually initiate alarms and send a report to the central station Each key pair can be individually programmed for 24 Hour Silent Audible or Auxiliary Emergency responses as well as Fire The panic function is activated when the appropriate key pair is pressed at the same time The panic functions are identified by the system as follows PANIC Displayed as Zone 4 95 For alpha keypads these panic keys can also be programmed with an alpha 3 96 descriptor 99 2h For the Panic functions to be of practical value the system must be connected to central station Speed Key D Macros The D key can be used to activate a string of up to 16 keystrokes These keystrokes are known as a macro and are stored in the system s memory Each partition may have its own macro Typical Speed Key functions include Arming sequences that involve first bypassing certain zones before arming Seldom used but repeatable sequences Relay activation sequences To program a macro enter your user code D The following appears ENTER SPEEDKEY D existing sequence displayed Enter up to 16 keystrokes A speed key sequence can include different commands Press the
79. does not hear from a particular transmitter the word CHECK will appear at the corresponding partition s keypad s accompanied by the zone number in question The trouble will not prevent you from arming the panel as long as the zone is first bypassed If within a programmed interval of time i e 12 hrs the receiver does not hear from any of its transmitters a CHECK message will appear for zones 88 2nd receiver or 90 1st receiver if zone type 05 is assigned to these supervisory zones This may be an indication that the wireless receiver is not able to hear signals The control checks the receiver connections about every 45 seconds If the panel has lost communication with the receiver a CHECK message will appear for zones 89 2nd receiver or 91 1st receiver if type 05 is assigned to these supervisory zones This may be an indication that the wiring to the receiver is incorrect or that the DIP switches are not set for the same address the receiver was assigned to in the panel s Device Programming mode Two identical receivers can be used to provide either a greater area of coverage or to provide redundant protection Any zone from 1 63 can be used as a 5700 series wireless zone Any zone from 1 86 can be used as a 5800 series wireless zone with the exception of zone 64 reserved for a wireless keypad Wireless System Installation Advisories 1 Place the receiver in a high centrally located area for best reception Do
80. exceed 2000 feet when 22 unshielded quad conductor cable is used 1000 feet if shielded cable is used 2 If more than one keypad is wired to a run then the above maximum lengths must be divided by the number of keypads on the run i e the maximum length would be 225 feet if two keypads are wired ona 22 gauge run For keypads connected to a single 4 wire run determine the current drawn by all units connected to the single wire run then refer to the Wiring Run chart to determine the maximum wire length that can be safely used for each wire size Current draw for all devices can be found in the SPECIFICATIONS AND ACCESSORIES section 3 Run field wiring from the control to the keypads using standard 4 conductor twisted wire cable using the wire gauge determined in step 1 4 Connect keypads to the Keypad Port terminals 6 7 8 and 9 on the control board as shown in Figure 4 KEYPADS YELLOW CONTROL TERMINALS Figure 7 Keypad Connections To the Keypad Port terminals Using a Supplementary Power Supply to Power Additional Keypads The control provides 750mA of auxiliary standby power for powering keypads and other devices from the auxiliary power output Aside from this the control can support up to 16 peripheral devices keypads RF receivers relay modules etc The backup battery will supply power to these devices in the event that AC power is lost When the control s auxiliary power load f
81. exit beeps 02 suppress chime mode beeps only 03 suppress arm disarm entry exit and chime mode beeps The screen will display the next device number to be programmed Press 00 to exit Menu Mode Press 99 to exit program mode Enter the Installer Code OFF to cancel the system s settling delay Device Address 00 is always set as an alpha keypad assigned to Partition 1 with no sounder suppression options 22 Relay Voice Descriptors If using the 4285 VIP Module voice descriptors can be programmed for each of the 16 relays Powerline Carrier devices used in the system These descriptors will be announced by the voice module when accessing the relays via the 70 relay access mode via telephone Each voice descriptor can consist of up to 3 words selected from the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list found later in this section descriptors only For normal system voice annunciation eg alarms troubles status use the highlighted words in the alpha vocabulary list found in the alpha programming section The index numbers from this vocabulary list are to be used for relay voice To enter relay voice descriptors do the following 1 From data field programming mode press 93 to display the ZONE PROG prompt 2 Press 0 NO to each menu option until the RLY VOICE DESCR prompt is displayed Follow the instructions below While in this mode press to
82. failure if power is lost Incoming Q Handset Telco Line 2 CS 26 27 28 29 30 TERMINALS ON CONTROL 4 EARTH GROUND DIRECT 5 CORD e PREMISES co JACK PHONES Figure 4 Standard Telephone Line Connections Connecting the AC Transformer 1361 1 Wire the 1361 transformer 1361 in Canada to terminals 1 and 2 on the control panel before connecting the battery as shown Figure 5 See wiring table below for wire guage to use Do not plug the transformer into the AC outlet until you are instructed to do so 22 13 14 PRIMARY POWER Supplied by 1361 Plug in Connect to i Transformer which 1200405 is rated at 16 5VAC 40VA A Caution must be CHARGING taken when wiring VOLTAGE this transformer to 137 VOC the panel to guard Replace AEN H 2 VI against blowing the 3 years 60 Hz Outlet 5 fuse inside the 2 transformer non 9 replaceable TRANSFORMER Q 16 5VAC 40VA ADEMCO No 1361 IN CANADA USE No 1361CN or 4300 IF X 10 DEVICES WILL BE USED NOTE WHEN POWERING UP THE PANEL PLUG THE TRANSFORMER IN BEFORE CONNECTING THE BATTERY Figure 5 AC Power And Battery Connections 4300 If using Powerline Carrier devices the 4300 transformer interface must be used instead of the regular 1361 transformer The 4300 supplies the control panel with AC and also acts to send control
83. have been programmed enter 00 at the TIME WINDOW prompt to quit Time Window menus sure that changing a time window does not adversely affect desired actions in other partitions _ Since the time windows shared among all partitions it is important to make Daily Open Close Worksheet Write in the open amp close time window numbers for each partition p Op 129 130 Programming Open Close Schedules Each partition can be assigned one daily open close schedule plus a holiday open close schedule Temporary schedules are programmed separately using the 81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode To program additional open close schedules see the Time Driven Events section After entering Scheduling Menu Mode press 0 until the O C Schedules prompt appears O C Schedules Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules 1Yes 0 0 Partition Enter the appropriate partition number to which the 01 08 00 Quit 01 following open close schedules will apply Enter 00 then at the PARTITION prompt to quit O C Schedules programming and display the Quit prompt Enter 0 at the Quit prompt to Quit return to the main menu choices and continue programming Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode Mon P1 OP WIND For each day in which an opening or closing schedule is 00 00 00 00 00 desired beginning with Monday enter a time window number 01 20 for the displayed day s opening schedule
84. hours Failure of an individual transmitter to send a supervision signal within the time entered will result in a trouble response and related communication report Entry 00 disables transmitter supervision Max 6 12 hr for UL RECEIVER TYPE Enter 1 if using 4281 series receivers Enter 2 if using 5881 series receivers Important the 4281 microprocessor must have part number N5334Vx where x is any number TOUCH TONE W ROTARY BACKUP Enter 1 to enable Rotary back up dialing if communicator is not successful on dialing using touch tone DTMF on first attempt Enter 0 if this option is not desired COMM SPLIT REPORT SELECTION This field allows certain reports to be directed to either the primary or secondary phone number Enter 0 1 or 2 in accordance with the following 0 split reporting disabled 1 alarm alarm restore amp cancel reports sent to primary Telco number all others to secondary Telco number 2 open close amp test reports sent to secondary Telco number and all other reports to primary See 51 for split dual reporting comments REPORT CODES FOR ZONES 65 80 Enter the report codes for each zone used in the system Each digit is a two digit entry to allow for hex codes Enter 01 09 A F 10 15 Can also be entered using the 93 Zone Programming mode EVENT LOGGING REPORT CODES Enter the appropriate code as shown on the programming form CALL WAITING DEFEAT
85. in this section 3 Program the transmitters using the 93 Menu mode Zone Programming option Refer to PROGRAMMING WIRELESS ZONES later in this section for specific instructions Wireless Zone Assignments for 5700 Series Transmitters Each wireless zone can be assigned any zone response type such as Entry Exit Interior Follower Perimeter etc see the ZONE TYPES section for explanations of each zone type For 5700 series transmitters each response type uses a certain range of zone numbers Each range of zone numbers is indicated below Zone Type Trans Zone Entry Exit Burg 1 through 47 Perimeter 1 through 47 Interior 1 through 47 32 through 47 5775 RING Hosanna ek eee 48 through 63 48 through 55 5706 24 Hour 48 through 63 silent or audible 62 or 63 5701 Day Night Burglary 1 through 47 24 Hour Auxiliary 1 through 47 Note that zones 1 63 can be used but have the following limitations 1 Transmitters set for zones 48 55 will transmit once every 12 seconds while the zone is faulted Transmitters set for zones 56 63 will transmit once every 3 seconds while faulted These two ranges of zone numbers could adversely affect transmitter battery life Trans
86. installation of this system These are easily seen in the lefthand column of the relevent information CONVENTIONS USED THIS MANUAL MAIN SECTION TITLES ARE SHOWN IN REVERSE TYPE Before you begin using this manual it is important that you understand the meaning of the following symbols icons These notes include specific information which must be followed if you are installing this system for a UL Listed application UL with the installation and which if not observed could result in operational difficulties A These notes include information that you should be aware of before continuing the system or could cause damage to the system Please read each warning carefully This symbol also denotes warnings about physical harm to the installer This symbol indicates a critical note that could seriously affect the operation of Enter Zn Num 00 Quit Many system options are programmed in an interactive mode by responding to Alpha keypad display prompts These prompts are shown in a double line box 00 When programming the system data fields are indicated by a star 7 followed by the data field number PRODUCT MODEL NUMBERS Unless noted otherwise references to specific model numbers represent Ademco products viii RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PROPER PROTECTION The Following Recommendations For The Location Of Fire And Burglary Detection Devices
87. locations leaving the last one unfilled by entering a PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER Let e f d This field is used to enter the primary central station phone number up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause This is the phone number the control will use to transmit alarm and status messages to the central station Do not fill unused spaces Note that back up reporting is automatic only if a secondary phone number is entered 8 calls are made to the secondary phone number if no acknowledgment is received after 8 attempts to the primary number SECONDARY PHONE NUMBER This field is used to enter the secondary phone number up to 17 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause This number It is used if communication on the primary number is unsuccessful or if split dual reporting is desired Do not fill unused spaces If this field is programmed a secondary subscriber account number field 90 must also be programmed can be the same as the primary account number 97 98 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 DOWNLOAD PHONE NO Ee Ae A EE Ee This field is applicable only if downloading will be utilized Enter the downloading phone number up to 12 digits 0 9 enter 11 for 12 for and 13 for a 2 sec pause Do not fill unused spaces DOWNLOAD ID NO
88. of Access by Time Worksheet Limitation of Access is a means by which a user s access code is limited to working during a certain period of time The system provides 8 Access Schedules each of which consists of two time windows for each day of the week and two time windows for holidays typically one for an opening time window and the second for a closing time window If an Access Schedule has been programmed a user required to follow that schedule would be assigned to an Access Group of the same number 1 8 when that user is added to the system If no limitations apply enter 0 Enter the appropriate time window numbers for each partition Monday Tuesday Wed Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Holiday Wij W2 Wi W2 wi W2 wi 2 1 2 Wi W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 Access Control Schedules To program Access Schedules do the following Enter Scheduling Menu Mode Installer Code 80 After entering Scheduling Menu Mode press 0 until the Access Sched prompt appears Access Sched Enter 1 to program access schedules 1Yes 0 0 Enter the access control schedule number between 01 01 08 00 Quit 01 and 08 Press to accept entry Enter 00 at the Access Sched prompt to quit the Access control menus and display the Quit prompt Enter 0 at the Quit prompt to return to the main menu choices 12 YES 0 NO 0 and continue programming Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode MON A1 Window 1 Enter the first time w
89. of Partitions 105 Open Close Reporting 126 132 Open Close Reporting for Keyswitch 77 98 Open Close Schedules 125 128 130 Operator Code 158 Operator Level A Operator Level 2 155 Operator Level C 2 155 Optional Expansion Zones 1 Output Devices 2 58 400 2 79 81 p 81 PABX 2 13 97 tenore Rhea 93 Partition Descriptors Partitioning LE 5 Perimeter Burglary 92 Permanent Keypad Display Backlight ns Phone Line Connections Polling Loop 5 ren Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheet 88 Power Up in Previous State 88 96 Power Up Procedure zs Prevent Fire Time out Prevent Zone XX Bypass Primary Format Primary Phone Number Primary Subscriber Acct PRINTER BAUD RATE Programming Alpha Descriptors 113 Programming The Wireless Receiver 44 Programming Time Windows QUICK ARM QUICK ARM partition specific RADIONICS LOW SPEED RANDOMIZE AC LOSS REPORT real time clock
90. of controlling output devices 4204 relays or Powerline Carrier devices e g X 10 These timers are analogous to the individual appliance timers that might be purchased at a department store The output devices themselves are programmed into the system by the installer during 93 Menu Mode Relay Programming The end user needs only to know the output device number and its alpha descriptor The installer may set certain relays to be restricted during 93 Menu Mode Relay Programming These relays may not be controlled by the end user prevents end user from controlling doors pumps etc To enter this mode the user enters Security Code 83 Output Timer Enter the output timer number to be programmed 01 20 01 20 00 Quit 01 Press to accept entry and move to the next prompt Enter 00 to quit and return to normal mode 06 07 00 11 45P If that timer number has already been programmed a PORCHLITE 04 summary screen will appear In this example 06 Timer 04 Output Device affected by this timer PORCH LITE Descriptor for Output Device 4 07 00PM Start Time 11 45PM Stop Time Press to continue Enter the desired output number 01 16 PORCHLITE 04 As the number is entered the descriptor changes to indicate which output device is being affected Note 00 entered as the output deletes the timer Timer 06 in this example and displays an output descriptor of None Devices are programmed via 93 Me
91. panel A polling loop zone has been tampered cover removed on a 4190 wireless zone has not checked in during the time programmed in field 1 31 5800 series transmitter has been tampered cover removed CHECK accompanied by a numeric display of 87 Indicates the 4285 VIP Module is not communicating with the control panel CHECK accompanied by a numeric display of 97 Indicates that a short exists on the Polling Loop and may eliminate some of the protection Fault 97 can be assigned an alpha descriptor when using the alpha keypad CHECK accompanied by a numeric display of 88 89 90 or 91 Indicates a wireless receiver problem These faults indicate the following 88 The 2nd receiver has not heard from any supervised RF transmitters for the period of time programmed in field 1 30 89 The 2nd receiver is not communicating with the control panel 90 The 1st receiver has not heard from any supervised RF transmitters for the period of time programmed in field 1 30 91 The 1st receiver is not communicating with the control panel If the problem has been corrected key an OFF sequence Security Code plus OFF twice to clear the display Other System Messages COMM FAILURE alpha or FC fixed word at the Keypad Indicates that a failure occurred in the telephone communication portion of your system LO BAT alpha or BAT fixed word and a zone descriptor accompanied
92. pulses through the premises electrical system to control the Powerline Carrier devices Connect the 4300 as follows 1 Connect terminals 1 and 3 AC and terminal 2 Ground of the 4300 transformer interface to control panel terminals 1 2 and 30 respectively 2 Runa 6 conductor cable between the 4300 and the panel Splice this cable to a 4142TR cable as shown in Figure 6 Note that the white and yellow wires of the 4142TR must be spliced together 4300 TRANSFORMER INTERFACE J8 CONNECTOR Earth AC Ground AC Sync Data Com YELLOW TB1 TB1 TBI 1 30 2 Figure 6 4300 Transformer Connections Do not plug the transformer into the AC outlet until you are instructed to do so later in the manual The complete wiring for the 4300 transformer is also covered in Section 9 RELAY OUTPUTS amp POWERLINE CARRIER DEVICES Installing The Back Up Battery If necessary refer to Section 15 FINAL POWER UP PROCEDURE for information regarding battery size to use etc Do not attach the connector cable to the battery terminals until you are instructed to do so later in the manual 1 Place the 12 volt back up battery in the control cabinet 2 Attach Red and Black wires on the battery connector cable as follows a Red to the positive battery terminal on the control board see Figure 4 or the Summary of Connections Diagram for location if necessary b Black to the ne
93. relay will activate without the other zone being faulted b Ifa relay is programmed to activate on either an alarm or trouble both zones must trip before the relay will activate and both zones must restore for the relay to deactivate if relay is programmed to deactivate on a Zone List Restore Call Waiting Defeat Logic Although this option does not directly prevent false alarms it may prevent the central station from taking action on a potential false alarm After the panel s initial call to report the alarm if the panel attempts to make an additional call perhaps for a cancel or a zone restoral an operator at the central station attempting to contact the premises to verify whether or not the alarm is valid will hear the phone ringing indefinitely and will have to dispatch on the call This option enabled in program field 1 42 will attempt to defeat call waiting on the first out going call attempt to both the primary and secondary numbers It does this by dialing a special sequence preceding the phone number but after the PABX number The panel will dial 70 if using touchtone and 1170 if using rotary 26 panel does not attempt to defeat call waiting on each call attempt since the phone company may not complete the call if the sequence is dialed on a phone line that does not have call waiting 91 Section 17 ZONE DEFINITIONS This section provides the following information Zone numbe
94. reports are to be sent 2 13 2 14 ALLOW DISARMING ONLY DURING ARM DISARM WINDOWS partition specific Enter 1 if disarming of the system should be allowed only during the arming disarming windows or if the system is in alarm if 2 11 is set to 1 Note that this applies only to operator level users Installer Master and manager level users can disarm the system at any time Enter O if disarming can occur at any time 0 disable for displayed partition 1 enable for displayed partition 2511 2 13 2 14 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 21 ALLOW DISARM OUTSIDE WINDOW IF ALARM OCCURS Used only if field 2 10 partition specific field is set to 1 Enter 1 to allow the system to be disarmed outside the programmed disarm opening window if an alarm has occurred Enter 0 to allow disarming only during the disarm window regardless of system status If field 2 10 is set to 0 for a partition this field 2 11 has no effect for that partition SCHEDULING RELATED DIALER REPORTS Enter the report codes for the scheduling related events as shown on the programming form ENABLE GOTO FOR THIS PARTITION partition specific Enter 1 if this partition is to be accessed from another partition s keypad using the GOTO command Otherwise enter 0 USE PARTITION DESCRIPTORS Enter 1 if partition descriptors will be programmed If enabled the normal keypad display will i
95. sound the bell s siren s and the console sounder s for 10 seconds It will then start the entry delay period This gives the user time to re enter the premises and disarm the system before an alarm occurs If the user does not re enter the premises and disarm the system the system will bypass the faulted entry exit zone s The rest of the system will be armed In addition the following dialer reports will be sent to the central station if programmed Exit Error by User Exit Error by Zone Bypass reports Another report designed to notify the central station that an alarm has occurred within five minutes of arming is called the Recent Close report This report as well as the Exit Error reports are programmed in data fields 1 40 and 1 41 Exit Delay Reset This feature is designed to allow an operator to re exit the premises to retrieve a forgotten item without triggering an alarm This feature is enabled in program field 1 21 and works in the following way When the panel is armed the normal exit delay begins After the user exits and the door closes the exit delay time is reset to 60 seconds If within this 60 second period the entry door is re opened the panel will restart the exit delay sequence again using the programmed exit delay time This feature will only be activated once after arming Cross Zoning The Cross Zoning feature is designed so that a combination of two zones must be faulted within a five minute
96. specific Enter 1 if this partition affects the common lobby Will cause lobby to disarm when this partition disarms Enter 0 if it does not 101 102 1 19 120 1 21 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 25 1 28 1 29 ARMS LOBBY partition specific Enter 1 if arming this partition causes the system to attempt to arm the common lobby partition automatically Can only arm lobby if all other affecting partitions are armed To enable this field field 1 18 must also be enabled partition specific Enter 0 if arming this partition will not attempt to arm the common lobby partition EXIT ERROR LOGIC Enter 1 to enable Exit Error Logic entry exit doors will be bypassed if left open Enter 0 if Exit Error Logic is not desired EXIT DELAY RESET Enter 1 to reset Exit Delay to 60 seconds after door is closed Enter 0 if Exit Delay not to be reset CROSS ZONING PAIR ONE Enter the first pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five minute period to cause an alarm Enter 00 00 to disable CROSS ZONING PAIR TWO Enter the second pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five minute period to cause an alarm Enter 00 00 to disable CROSS ZONING PAIR THREE Enter the third pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five minute period to cause an alarm Enter 00 00 to disable CROSS
97. that they have a problem and request prompt repair service The user may not under any circumstances in or out of warranty attempt any service or repairs to the system It must be returned to the factory or an authorized service agency for all repairs FCC PART 68 NOTICE This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the front cover of this equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company This equipment uses the following jacks An RJ31X is used to connect this equipment to the telephone network The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENS contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a co
98. the control 1 If you need more information about actual programming procedures see Section 4 THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING 2 You cannot use Output 1 for an Ground Start if using it for a Remote Keypad Sounder Open Close trigger or an AAV module Open Close Trigger Setup Output 1 may alternately be programmed to change states when the system is armed in the away mode and then disarmed If field 1 46 is set to 1 the output will be set high when the system is in the disarmed state and will switch to 0 volts when the system is armed in the away mode This trigger will not change state unless all partitions are armed and will change state again as soon as one partition is disarmed Programming the Open Close Trigger 1 With at least one two line alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 wired and set to a proper address power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC transformer into a 120VAC outlet previously wired to the control 2 Enter data field programming mode Installer Code 800 Program the following data field 1 46 AUXILIARY OUTPUT ENABLE Set for 1 1 If you need more information about actual programming procedures see Section 4 THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING 2 You cannot use Output 1 for an Open Close trigger if using it for a Remote Keypad Sounder Ground Start module or AAV module Remote Keypad Sounder Output 1 may alternately be programmed for a remote keypad sounder You may use an
99. the cursor 1 space right 4 Moves the cursor one space to the left 7 Inserts a space at the cursor location erasing any character at that location 8 Saves the new word in the system s memory Returns to description entry mode 2 Enter the custom word number 01 20 you want to create For example if you are creating the first word or word string enter 01 when creating the second word enter 02 and so on A cursor will now appear at the beginning of the second line 3 Type the word using one of two methods as follows a Press the key followed by the two digit entry for the first letter you would like to display e g 6 5 for A 8 When the desired character appears press the 6 key to select it The cursor will then move to the right in position for the next character Press plus the two digit entry for the next letter of the word b Use the 3 key to advance through the list of symbols numbers and letters Use the 1 key to move back through the list When you have reached the desired character press the 6 key to select it The cursor will then move to the right in position for the next character Repeat step 3 to create the desired custom word or words Use the 4 key to move the cursor to the left if necessary Use the 7 key to enter a blank or to erase an existing character Each word or word string cannot exceed 10 characters Save the word by pressing t
100. these partitions would be denied automatically To ADD a Master Manager or Operator Code 22 During user code entry normal key depressions at other keypads a partition will be ignored However panic key depression will cause an alarm and terminate user entry Enter Installer Codet 8 new user 02 75 new user s code TOr Master or Manager code but must be code with higher level of authority than the code being changed i e Master code can add a Manager or Operator level code but cannot add another Master code a Manager code can add an Operator level code but cannot add a Master or another Manager code Keypad will prompt for the Authority Level for this user User Number 03 Enter the level number as follows Enter Auth Level 1 2 Master Arm Disarm Bypass add or modify lower level users 2 Manager Arm Disarm Bypass add or modify lower level users Operator Level A Arm Disarm Bypass 4 Operator Level B Arm Disarm 5 Operator Level C Arm Disarm only if system armed with this code 6 Duress Arm Disarm triggers silent panic alarm Keypad will then prompt for Open Close reporting option for this user Press 0 NO or 1 YES depending on whether or not 0 NO 1 YES arming disarming by this user will trigger opening amp closing reports This prompt appears only if the installer code is used to add a user If access schedules have been programmed this
101. type sends a report to Central Station and provides an alarm sound at the keypad No bell output is provided This zone type is usually assigned to a zone containing a button for use in personal emergencies or to a zone containing monitoring devices such as water sensors temperature sensors etc Type 09 Supervised Fire No Verification This zone type provides a fire alarm on short circuit and a trouble condition on open circuit The bell output will pulse when this zone type is shorted This zone type is always active and cannot be bypassed This zone type can be assigned to any wired zone except zone 9 and can be assigned to certain wireless systems zones 10 Interior w Delay This zone type gives entry and exit delays using the programmed entry exit time if tripped when the panel is armed in the Away mode This zone type is also active during Maximum mode but no entry delay is provided alarms occur immediately if zone is tripped This zone type is bypassed when the panel is armed in the Stay or Instant modes Delay begins whenever sensors in this zone are violated regardless of whether or not an entry exit delay zone was tripped first 20 Arm Stay This is a special purpose zone type used with 5800 series wireless pushbutton or contact closure or opening and which will result in arming the system in the STAY mode when the zone is activated 21 Arm Away This is special purpose z
102. will quit User Scheduling mode and return to normal mode Section 21 SYSTEM COMMUNICATION This section provides the following information The process of a successful transmission An explanation of reporting formats for this system Loading communication defaults Contact ID report codes A Successful Transmission When a control panel calls the central station receiver it waits to hear a handshake frequency from the receiver to confirm that the receiver is on line and ready to receive its message Once the panel hears the handshake it is programmed to listen for it sends its message The panel then waits for a kissoff frequency from the receiver acknowledging that the message was received and understood If the handshake frequency is not given or is not understood by the panel the panel will not send its message Once the handshake frequency is received and understood by the panel the panel will send its message If there is an error in the transmission the receiver does not receive a valid message the kissoff frequency will not be given by the central station receiver The panel will make a total of eight attempts to the primary telephone number and eight attempts to the secondary telephone number if programmed to get a valid message through If the panel is not successful after its numerous attempts the keypad will display Communication Failure Alpha keypad or FC Fixed word keypad Reporting Formats
103. 0 Press 94 to enter the second page of data fields and program the following data fields 1 28 RF TX LOW BATTERY ANNUN 1 immediate 0 when disarmed must be 1 for UL installations 1 29 RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORT ENABLE 1 0 must be 1 for UL installations 1531 RF TRANSMITTER CHECK IN INTERVAL 02 15 times 2 hrs max of 6 for UL installations 1 44 WIRELESS KEYPAD TAMPER DETECT 1 0 no 1 48 WIRELESS KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT 1 49 SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION SOUNDING 1 yes 0 must be 0 for UL installations If using a wireless button 5801 5803 etc also program the following fields 1 57 5800RF BUTTON GLOBAL ARM 1 yes 0 1 58 5800 RF BUTTON FORCE BYPASS 1 yes 0 no Press 99 to return to the first page of data fields From data field programming mode press 493 to display the ZONE PROG prompt ZONE PROG Press 1 to enter ZONE PROGRAMMING mode 1 0 While this mode press to display the next screen or press to display the previous screen Enter Zn No Enter the zone number to be programmed 01 86 00 QUIT 10 Press to accept entry 10 ZT P RC In L Asummary screen for that zone will appear ZT 00 1 00 RF N zone type P partition to which zone is assigned RC report code for that zone In input type of zone L learned RF input Press to continue 10 Zone Zone d
104. 0 0 IGNORE EXPANSION ZONE TAMPER 0 Tamper 1 Ignore Tamper 3 From data field programming mode press 93 to display the ZONE PROG prompt ZONE PROG 1 Yes 0 Enter Zn No 00 QUIT 10 10 ZT P RC In L 00 100 N 10 Zone Type Zone disabled 00 Refer to the ZONE TYPE DEFINITIONS section for definitions of each zone type Zone Types are as follows 00 Assign For Unused Zo 01 Entry Exit 1 Burglary 02 Entry Exit 2 Burglary 03 Perimeter Burglary Press 1 to enter ZONE PROGRAMMING mode While in this mode press to display the next screen or press to display the previous screen Enter the zone number to be programmed 09 to 87 Press to accept entry A summary screen for that zone will appear ZT zone type P partition to which zone is assigned RC report code for that zone In L input type of zone Press to continue Each zone in a system must be assigned a zone type which defines the way in which the system responds to faults in that zone Enter the zone response type for each zone The screen will automatically display the zone type for the number entered Press to accept entry If a different zone response type is desired enter a different number and press nes 06 24 Hour Silent Alarm 07 24 Hour Audible Alarm 08 24 Hour Auxiliary 09 Fire 04 Interior Follower Burglary 10 Interior Del
105. 0 SESCOA RADIONICS SELECT 10 Radionics ALARM REPORT CODE amp ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 1 32 amp SUPERVISORY amp RESTORE CODES 54 CODE 55 1D 56 CODE 57 ID 58 59 CODE 6010 61 CODE 6210 63 1 O 1 0 0 9 0 3 0 0 0 1 Alarm Rst 17 0 4 0 0 25 0 4 0 0 O 1 Alarm Rst 2 0 2 0 0 10 0 3 0 0 0 0 Trouble 18 0 4 0 0 26 0 4 0 0 0 0 Trouble 3 0 2 0 0 111 O 3 0 0 OJO Rst 19 0 4 0 0 27 0 4 0 0 0 0 Trble Rst 4 0 2 0 0 12 0 3 0 0 0 0 Bypass 20 0 4 010 28 0 4 010 0 0 Bypass 5 0 2 0 0 13 0 3 0 0 0 0 Bypss Rst 21 0 4 010 29 0 4 010 0 0 Bypss Rst 6 0 2 0 0 14 0 3 0 0 22 0 4 0 0 30 0 4 0 0 7 0 2 0 0 15 0 3 0 0 23 0 4 0 0 31 0 4 0 0 8 012 0 0 16 0 3 0 0 24 0 4 0 0 32 0 5 0 0 ALARM REPORT CODE amp ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 33 64 amp SUPERVISORY amp RESTORE CODES 64 CODE 65 ID 66 CODE 67 ID 68 69 CODE 70 ID 71 CODE 72 ID 73 33 0 5 0 0 411 0 5 0 0 O 1 Alarm Rst 49 011 010 57 016 010 011 Rst 34 015 010 421 0 5 010 010 Trouble 50 011 0 0 58 0 6 0 0 0 0 Trouble 35 0 5 010 43 0 5 010 010 Rst 51 01 0 0 59 066 0 0 0 0 Trble Rst 36 0 5 0 0 44 05 010 010 Bypass 52 011 010 60 06 010 0 0 37 0 5 010 45 05 010 010 Bypss Rst 53 01 010 61 06 010 010 Bypss Rst 38 015 010 46 015 010 54 011 010 62 0 9 0 0 39 0 5 0 0 47 0 5 0 0 55 01 0 0 63 0 9 0 0 40 o5 00 48 o1 o0 56 016 010 64 016 010 ALARM REPORT CODE amp ID
106. 023 Off 011 South 155 Alarm 255 Den 052 Gas 138 Office 147 Stairs 006 And 067 Detector 128 Glass 139 058 Station 156 Apartment 117 Device 060 One 070 Storage 157 Appliances 161 Dim 163 Hall 050 Open 148 Sun 154 118 Dining 031 Heat 010 Outside 210 System 062 Attic 119 Door 016 Down 008 Inside 209 Panic 013 Temperature 158 Baby 120 Downstairs 184 Partition 090 Third 159 Back 121 Driveway 130 Kitchen 022 Patio 149 Three 072 Bar sins 122 Duct 131 Phone 061 Tool 213 Basement 021 Laundry 140 Power 063 Two 071 Bathroom 051 East 132 Left 027 Pump 166 Battery
107. 09 to begin programming When the first field s entry is completed the next partition specific field will automatically be displayed When all partition specific fields are programmed the system returns to the global programming fields page 1 fields To return to the global program fields before finishing all fields enter any global field number Repeat this procedure for each partition in the installation PROGRAMMING PARTITION SPECIFIC FIELDS Press 91 to select a partition Enter the partition be programmed M Enter a partition specific field and make entry M After partition specific fields are programmed press 91 to select next partition Enter any global field number to return to the global fields at any time 93 Menu Mode Programming The 93 Menu Mode is a mode through which much of the system s programming is done It offers main menu selections for the following Zone Programming Serial Number Programming Alpha Programming Device Programming Relay Programming Relay Voice Descriptors Custom Index Programming VIP Module substitute words Press 0 NO or 1 YES in response to the displayed menu selection Pressing 0 will display the next choice in sequence The keypad will then prompt you with questions regarding the programming of a particular zone or device Refer to the individual sections to program each option shown The following is a list of commands used while in the me
108. 118 119 20 21 122 123 24 125 26 27 28 29 130 131 32 33 134 35 136 37 138 39 140 41 42 43 144 45 146 47 148 49 50 INTERIOR INTRUSION JEWELRY KITCHEN LAUNDRY LEFT LEVEL LIBRARY LIGHT LINE LIQUOR LIVING LOADING LOCK LOOP LOW LOWER MACHINE MAGNETIC MAIDS MAIN MASTER MAT MEDICAL MEDICINE MICROWAVE MONEY MONITOR MOTHERS MOTION MOTOR MUD NORTH NURSERY OFFICE OIL OPEN OPENING OUTSIDE OVERFLOW OVERHEAD PAINTING PANIC PASSIVE PATIO PERIMETER PHONE PHOTO POINT 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 POLICE POOL POWER QUAD RADIO REAR RECREATION REFRIG REFRIGERATION RF RIGHT ROOM ROOF SAFE SCREEN SENSOR SERVICE SHED SHOCK SHOP SHORT SHOW SIDE SKYLIGHT SLIDING SMOKE SONIC SONS SOUTH SPRINKLER STAMP STATION STEREO STORE STORAGE STORY STRESS STRIKE SUMP SUPERVISED SUPERVISION SWIMMING SWITCH TAMPER TAPE TELCO TELEPHONE TELLER TEMPERATURE THERMOSTAT TOOL CHARACTER ASCII CHART For Adding Custom Words 52 53 54 61 62 63 64 71 OQmmogouw g v Notes This factory provided vocabulary of words is subject to change Bulleted words in
109. 2 VOLTAGE TRIGGERS Connector J7 72 This section provides the following information General information about the voltage triggers Ground Start trigger setup Open Close trigger setup Keyswitch setup Remote keypad sounder setup Long Range Radio setup General Information Connector J7 located on the right hand side of the main PCB provides 4 trigger outputs These outputs may be configured in a number of ways depending upon the requirements of the installation They may be used for Operating the 675 Ground Start Module Operating the 4146 Keyswitch LEDs Operating a remote piezo sounder that imitates the keypad sounder Triggering auxiliary alarm signaling equipment such as the 7720 and 7920SE LORRA Subscriber Radios Operating an Audio Alarm Verification AAV module see previous section on AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION 24 These output triggers can be enabled by partition via programming field 2 20 The pin assignments of this connector are shown in Figure 20 Use only the 4142TR 9 wire cable available as an option for making connections to this connector Output 1 Operates by default as a trigger for the 675 ground start module This output may optionally be programmed to operate as an open close trigger a remote keypad sounder output or an AAV module output programmed in data field 1 46 Only one of these options may be used at a time Output 1 Rating When Activ
110. 255 Den 052 Gas 138 Office 147 Stairs 006 E 067 Detector 128 Glass 139 058 Station 156 Apartment 117 Device 060 ONG seca at 070 Storage 157 Appliances 161 Dim 163 Hall 050 Open 148 Sun 154 118 Dining 031 Heat 010 Outside 210 System 062 Attic 119 Door 016 Down 008 Inside 209 Panic 013 Temperature 158 Baby 120 Downstairs 184 Partition 090 Third 159 Back 121 Driveway 130 Kitchen 022 Patio 149 Three 072 Bar ues 122 Duct 131 Phone 061 Tool 213 Basement 021 Laundry 140 Power 063 Two 071 Bathroom 051 East 132 Left 027 Pump 166 Battery 053 Eight 077 Library 141 Ups iiie 025 Bed eitis 092 Eighth
111. 28 Wiring Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8 29 Polling Loop CODIeotlODs ees rode ee RSEN 34 Polling Loop Extender Module Wiring eene 35 5881 RF Receiver showing receiver setup 43 4204 Module eie i ether ete 57 4300 Transformer Connections 57 4285 Voice Module Connections eene 67 Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections 71 J7 Connector For Voltage Triggers sene eter rt erret rere eet et 73 Ground Start Module Connections 74 Remote Keypad Sounding Connections esses 75 Remote Keyswitch 71 Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment eese 78 External Sounder Connections eene 79 ABI Bell Box Wining idet be pear decepit 80 Event Log Printer Connections i 82 1321 Transformer and Battery Connections esee 87 4300 Transformer Connections eese 87 Direct Wire Downloading Connections With 4100SM Module 153 Summary Of Connections Diagram Inside Back Cover HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL This manual is written to accommodate both the new and the experienced installer of Ademco products A general
112. 3 Communication failure 44 RF low battery 45 polling loop failure 51 RF receiver failure 52 kissoff 54 fire zone reset 55 disarm 1 minute 56 XX minutes enter XX in field 1 74 try ves stop condition only 57 YY seconds enter YY in field 1 75 stop condition only 58 Duress 60 Audio Alarm Verification must be selected for both START and STOP operation Or at Disarming whichever occurs earlier 22 If using options 56 and or 57 usually as the STOP Zone data fields 1 74 and 1 75 for the respective relay timeouts for minutes and seconds must be programmed 01 Start Part 01 Stop Zn LIST No list 01 Stop Zn Typ 01 Stop Part If the starting event will be limited to occurring specific partition enter the partition number 1 8 in which the start event will occur Enter 0 for any partition Press to continue If a zone list is being used to stop this relay action enter the zone list number 1 8 The restore of all zone s on the Zone List will stop the relay If a zone list is not being used enter 0 Press to continue If a Zone Type System Operation is being used to stop the relay action enter the 2 digit code as listed in the start Zone Type System Operation prompt paragraph Press to continue This is the partition to which the stop condition will be limited Enter 0 for any partition Enter 1 8 for sp
113. 4 09 and 93 Menu Mode Relay Programming output command 56 refer to 93 and 80 Menu Mode sections in this manual RELAY TIMEOUT YY SECONDS Enter the relay timeout 000 127 seconds desired for 80 Menu Mode time driven event relay command numbers 05 10 and 93 Menu Mode Relay Programming command 57 refer to 93 and 80 Menu Mode sections in this manual ACCESS CONTROL RELAY partition specific The system can be programmed to provide user activated access control If enabled the assigned relay will pulse for 2 seconds when the user enters his code and presses 0 Enter the relay number 00 16 for the relay that will be used for access control Enter 00 if not used in this partition 105 106 2 00 2 01 2 02 2 05 2 06 2 07 2 08 2 09 2 10 NUMBER OF PARTITIONS Enter the number of partitions 1 8 to be used in the system DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME START END MONTH Enter the months 00 12 in which daylight savings time starts and ends Enter 00 00 if daylight savings time does not apply to the user s region Standard setting for U S is 04 10 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME START END WEEKEND Enter the start and end weekends for daylight savings time as follows 01 first O2 second 03 third 04 fourth 05 last 06 to last 07 third from last Standard setting for U S is 01 05 AUTO ARM DELAY p
114. 82 WARNING OWNER S INSTRUCTION NOTICE NOT TO BE REMOVED WEEKLY TESTING IS REQUIRED TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM NOTES 1 Zone 1 may be selected for EOLR supervised COMPLIES WITH FCC RULES PART 68 J7 Header J8 Header MAKE CONNECTIONS USING or normally closed no EOLR operation via FCC REGISTRATION NO AC398U 68192 AL E n ENTE No 4142TR CABLE cut jumper Cut red jumper for normally closed RINGER EQUIVALENCE 0 7B 1 Not Used 1 In 2 Printer DTR Optional pae m dlik di gt operation Do not cut for Fire Usage Zones 2 8 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF 2 Ground LED ee e may be selected for either operation via program FCC RULES OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE 3 Out 1 Ground Start 3 In 3 sync OU 4 Ready LED field 41 FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS 1 THIS DEVICE lt Gur 2f 4800 Ratings for Out T 00000000 8 2 Zone 1 supports 2 wire smoke detectors 201 5 2 5 Ground Rati 10VDC 13 8VDC through 4k OHMS See Installation Instructions for recommended type MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE AND 6 Ground 6 Out 5 4300 data Active LOVIN TS roug 123456789 and maximum number of detectors supported 2 THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE 7 Out 3 burg aud panic 7 Out 6 Printer RXD Not 100 9 5 to ground BATTERY 3 Zone 7 may be used for
115. 827BD Wireless House ID Bi directional Keypad used with 5800TM Module Operates the system similarly to wired k eypads Can indicate system status via its 3 LEDs and sounder Includes 3 panic keys House ID must be set Requires 5800TM Transmitter Module must be enabled in 93 Menu Mode Device Programming and assigned to a partition in 1 48 Glass Break Detector Requires both sound and shock of breaking glass to cause alarm to be transmitted Has unique input code PIR Detector Dual element passive infrared detector transmitter with built in selectable pulse count Has unique input code Note There is a 3 minute lock out be tween fault transmissions to conserve battery life Magnets Package of 4 magnets for use with 5816 and 5817 transmitters UL The 5816 and 5817 do not supervise their loop wiring Therefore for UL Household Burglary installations the loop wiring may not exceed 3 feet 51 52 Programming Wireless Transmitters Zone number assignments can be from 01 63 for 5700 series transmitters and 01 86 for 5800 series transmitters except for zone 64 which is reserved for a wireless keypad 1 a A With at least one alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 wired and set to a proper address power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC transformer into a 120VAC outlet previously wired to the control Enter data field programming mode Installer Code 80
116. 88 91 as applicable zone type 5 Enter the partition number 1 8 that this zone is located in Enter the report code for this zone Enter the input device type as follows 0 not used 1 hardwired 3 supervised RF transmitter RF type 4 unsupervised RF transmitter UR type 5 RF button type transmitter BR type 6 serial number polling loop device SL type 7 DIP switch type polling loop device 8 right loop of DIP switch type device Right loops refer to the use of the right loop on a 4190WH zone expander module and or 4278 PIR which allow hard wired devices to be monitored by the polling loop If hardwired dipswitch polling loop or 5700 series devices are being programmed after completing this entry the summary display appears Press to continue The display will now return to the Enter Zone Number prompt for programming the next zone into the system If all zones are programmed enter 00 and press to exit back to normal programming mode If either 5800 series RF or polling loop serial number devices are being programmed continue to the next prompt If this is a previously learned sensor the loop number for this zone will appear Press to continue If the sensor s serial number has not been learned the serial number can be learned now by entering 1 or it can be learned later by using the SERIAL NUMBER LEARN mode see next section 20 INPUT S N L 000 0000 1 20PROGAS RF 1
117. ABLES FOR POLLING LOOP DEVICES 4275 PIR MIRROR SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 A 1234567 UP SIDE VIEW 4278 PIR MIRROR Y HOWN SET FOR ID 10 SIDE VIEW r DN 12345678 INST MODE PULSE COUNT WALK TEST W T DISABLE THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH WORD DN DEVICE DIP SWITCH POSITI ID Ty 5 E 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 S U SIS D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 S Is U U SISISISISISISISISISISISISISISIS 0 0 D THIS TABLE FOR DIPS WITH WORD UP DEVICE DIP SWITCH POS D it e548 10 UP 11 UP ciue c 0 SI ISIS I all alla lt ISl Ld U SIS D lt y POS 7 UP NORMAL MODE DN INSTANT MODE POS 8 UP W T DISABLE DN WALK TEST P SWITCH POSITION 4 UP UP UP DEVICE ID 10 11 12 13 CIS Cy Cyc CIC YC CJC CIC IC JC CIC JCIC CIC HISISISISISISISISISISISISIS SIS S v vu v vv ined ime vovv vir
118. CS SELECT 0 Radionics ALARM REPORT CODE amp ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 1 32 amp SUPERVISORY amp RESTORE CODES 54 CODE 55 1D 56 CODE 57 ID 58 59 CODE 60 ID 61 CODE 62ID 63 1 0 0 0 9 O 3 0 0 O 9 Alarm Rst 17 0 3 0 0 25 O 3 0 0 0 9 Alarm Rst 2 0 3 0 0 10 0 3 0 0 0 0 Trouble 18 0 0 26 O 3 0 0 0 0 Trouble 3 0 3 0 0 111 O 3 0 0 0 0 Rst 19 0 3 0 0 27 01 3 0 0 0 0 Trble Rst 4 01 3 0 0 12 013 0 0 0 0 20 0 3 0JO 28 010 0 0 5 0 3 0 0 13 0 3 0 0 0 0 Bypss Rst 21 0 3 0 0 29 0 3 0 0 OJO Bypss Rst 6 0j3 0 0 14 03 0 0 22 03 ojo 30 013 ojo 7 0 3 0 0 15 013 0 0 23 013 0 0 31 0 3 0 0 8 0 3 0 0 16 0 3 0 0 24 03 0 0 32 0 3 0 0 ALARM REPORT CODE amp ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 33 64 amp SUPERVISORY amp RESTORE CODES 64 CODE 65ID 66 CODE 67 ID 68 69 CODE 70 ID 71 CODE 721D 73 33 0 5 0 0 41 0 0 019 Alarm Rst 49 0 1 010 57 016 010 0 9 Alarm Rst 34 015 0 0 42 0 5 0 0 010 Trouble 50 01 010 58 016 010 010 Trouble 35 0 5 0 0 43 0 5 0 0 010 Trble Rst 51 01 0 0 59 016 010 0 0 Rst 36 0 5 010 44 05 010 00 Bypass 52 011 010 60 016 010 010 Bypass 37 0 5 0 0 45 05 010 010 Bypss Rst 53 01 010 61 06 010 010 Bypss Rst 38 0 5 010 46 0 5 010 541 011 0 0 62 oj 0 0 39 0 5 010 47 0 5 0 0 55 oj 010 63 ojo 0 0 40 015 00 48 01 010 56 016 010 641 016 OO ALARM REPORT CODE amp ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 81 87
119. CVRs PANICS amp THEIR SUPV amp RESTORE CODES 1 35 CODE 1 36 10 1 37CODE 1 38 ID 1 39 74 CODE 75ID 76CODE 77 ID 78 65 066 0 5 73 0 7 0 3 114 Alarm Rst 81 0 8 01 89 0 8 019 1 4 Alarm Rst 66 0 6 016 74 017 04 010 Trouble 82 08 o2 90 0 9 110 010 Trouble 67 06 0 7 75 0 7 0 5 0JO Trble Rst 83 0 8 03 91 0 9 01 010 Rst 68 0 6 0 8 76 017 016 010 Bypass 84 08 04 Dures 1 3 1 3 0 0 Bypass 69 0 6 0 9 77 0 7 0 7 0 0 Byps Rst 85 0 8 0 5 97 0 9 07 010 Bypss Pst 70 07 10 78 017 018 86 0 8 016 95 0 9 015 a 71 017 01 79 0 7 09 87 0 8 07 96 0 9 016 3 8 72 017 012 80 0 8 110 88 0 8 018 99 0 9 09 SYSTEM NON ALARM CODES NOTES 97 Poll Loop Short 88 amp 90 RCVR not receiving transmitter signals 89 amp 91 RCVR not responding bad conn to panel ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES 79 ZONE TYPES 1 8 All enabled 1111 sty yt yay pty 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 80 ZONE TYPES 9 amp 10 1 1 All enabled 9 81 First Digit 82 Second Digit Close 0 0 0 0 Open Low Battery Low Bat Res AC Loss AC Restore Test Power Cancel o
120. D key to separate different commands For example you may want to perform the following sequence Desired function Keystrokes GOTO partition 2 Enter 2 Bypass zones 10 amp 11 Press bypass 6 then the zone numbers 10 amp 11 Arm in maximum mode Press maximum 4 key Return to partition 1 Enter 1 program that speed key sequence type the following 210 610110 4 DI DD Note that the D key is pressed after the 2 the last 1 and the 4 separating the different commands Press D twice to complete the entry and exit To execute a speed key sequence press the D key The following appears ENTER USER CODE Enter your user code The programmed speedkey sequence will begin automatically When defining speedkey sequences do not use the key to represent Quick 22 Arming system uses the code entered in response to the prompt to initiate commands in a speedkey sequence so the quick arm key is unnecessary The system interprets the use of the key in a speedkey sequence as its designated function only e g 2 is not interpreted as arm in away mode but rather as enter house ID sniffer mode Manual Relay Activation Mode 70 Mode The system allows users to manually activate relays X 10 modules by keypad command using either the keypad or a telephone keypad if VIP module is used The user will be prompted either by keypad alpha display or t
121. D LIABLE WHETHER DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE REGARDLESS OF CAUSE OR ORIGIN SELLER S MAXIMUM LIABILITY SHALL NOT IN ANY CASE EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT WHICH SHALL BE THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST SELLER This warranty replaces any previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Seller on this product No increase or alteration written or verbal of the obligations of this Limited Warranty is authorized ADEMCO GROUP 165 Eileen Way Syosset New York 11791 Copyright 1997 PITTWAY CORPORATION N5944 6V1 1 98
122. DIGITS FOR ZONES 81 87 65 80 RF RCVRs PANICS amp THEIR SUPV amp RES Tone CODES 135 CODE 1 36 10 1 37CODE 19810 1 3 74 CODE 75 ID 76 77 ID 78 1 4 0 0 73 115 0 0 on Alarm Rst 81 1 3 0 0 89 0 7 0 0 011 Alarm Rst 66 14 0 0 74 115 0 0 0 0 Trouble 82 113 00 90 08 00 010 Trouble 6714 o0 75 15 01 0 010 Trble Rst 83 1 3 0 0 91 0 8 0 0 0 0 Trble Rst 68 1 4 0 0 76 1 5 0 0 0 0 Bypass 84 1 3 0 0 Dures O 1 0 0 0 0 69 1 4 0 0 77 1 5 0 0 0 0 Byps Rst 85 1 3 0 0 97 0 7 0 0 0 0 Bypss Rst 70 14 0 0 78 1 5 0 0 86 1 3 0 0 95 10 1 71 14 010 79 1 5 010 87 O 7 010 96 111 00 3 72 1 4 010 80 1 5 010 88 0 7 010 99 1 2 010 SYSTEM NON ALARM CODES NOTES 97 Poll Loop Short 88 amp 90 RCVR not receiving transmitter signals 89 amp 91 RCVR not responding bad conn to panel ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES 79 ZONE TYPES 1 8 All enabled 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 il 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 80 ZONE TYPES 9 amp 10 1 1 All enabled 9 10 148 81 First Digit Close Open Low Battery Low Bat Res AC Loss AC Restore Test Power Cancel Prog Tamper 82 Second Digit 0 0 0 0
123. ER CODE Installer s Code is 4 digit code reserved for installation company use This is the only code that can be used to enter the Program mode from the keypad This code cannot be used to disarm the system if not used to arm the system This code cannot reenter programming mode if exited by the 98 command 02 05 ZONE RESPONSE TYPES FOR ZONES 1 27 95 99 These fields are programmed using 93 Menu Mode Zone Programming 09 ENTRY DELAY 1 partition specific Entry delay defines the delay time which allows users to reenter the premises through a door that has been programmed as an entry delay door and disarm the system without sounding an alarm The system must be disarmed within this period or an alarm will occur Enter the entry delay time 01 15 times 15 seconds or 00 for no delay up to a maximum delay of 225 seconds entry 15 times 15 seconds for zones assigned to Zone Type 01 10 EXIT DELAY 1 partition specific Exit delay defines the delay period that allows users to leave the premises through a door that has been programmed as an entry exit delay door after arming the system without setting off the alarm Enter the exit delay time 01 15 times 15 seconds or 00 for no delay up toa maximum delay of 225 seconds for zones assigned to Zone Type 01 11 ENTRY DELAY 2 partition specific Entry Delay 2 is used for the zone assigned to Entry Delay 2 zone type Note
124. ERFACE Earth AC Ground AC Sync Data Com TB1 TB1 TBI xil 30 2 J8 CONNECTOR Figure 17 4300 Transformer Connections 57 58 Programming the Relay Module 1 With at least one alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 wired and set to a proper address temporarily power up the system by plugging the transformer into a 120VAC outlet 2 Enter data field programming mode Installer Code 800 3 From data field programming mode press 93 to display the ZONE PROG prompt 4 Press 0 NO to each menu option until the DEVICE PROG prompt appears DEVICE PROG Press 1 YES to enter DEVICE PROGRAMMING mode 1 YES 0 The following prompts will appear DEVICE ADDRESS The device address identifies the module to the control 01 31 OO QUIT Enter the 2 digit address number as set at the module s DIP switches 01 15 Press to continue DEVICE TYPE Select the relay output device as follows 00 device not used o 6 04 output device Press to continue The system will prompt for the next Device Address to be programmed Repeat the procedure above for each relay module used in the system When all modules have been programmed press 00 menu mode programming at this prompt to exit Do not exit out of programming at this time but continue to the next section Output Programming Options Defined The following will help
125. Enter 00 if no schedule is desired for a particular day As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for that window will be displayed as a programming aid Press the key to accept the entry Mon P1 CL WIND Enter the time window number for the displayed day s 00 00 00 00 00 closing schedule As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window will be displayed Press the key to accept the entry Tue P1 OP WIND The keypad will now prompt for Tuesday s open close 00 00 00 00 00 schedule etc Follow the procedure for Mondays prompts When the last day of the week has been programmed the holiday opening and closing window prompts are displayed Hol P1 OP WIND Enter the holiday opening time window number Press 00 00 00 00 00 the key to accept the entry Hol P1 CL WIND Enter the holiday closing time window number Press the 00 00 00 00 00 key to accept the entry When the entries are completed the PARTITION prompt is displayed again Repeat this procedure for each partition in the system When all partitions have been programmed enter 00 at the PARTITION prompt to quit open close schedules Holiday Definitions amp Schedule Worksheet The system provides up to 16 holidays that can be assigned for the system Each holiday can be assigned to any combination of partitions List the desired holidays on the following worksheet Check the partitions for which these holiday
126. Enter the timed event number to be programmed 01 20 and press the key The system will then prompt the user to enter the desired action to be taken Enter 00 at the TIMED EVENT prompt to quit the timed event menus and display the Quit prompt Enter 0 at the Quit prompt to return to the main menu choices 12 YES 0 NO 0 and continue programming Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode Enter the action code for the desired action for this event number from the list at the left This could be an output command an arming command or any other time driven event Press to accept the entry and display the appropriate action specifier prompt as follows on the next page Actions 01 05 101 RELAY Enter the relay number and press 00 to accept entry The Time Window prompt appears Enter the relay group number and 00 press to accept entry The Time Window prompt appears Actions 21 24 and 40 41 PART 12345678 Enter the partition to which the HIT 0 8 action applies Enter 0 to select all partitions Enter a partition number again to deselect it Press to accept entry The Time Window prompt appears 30 Auto bypass Zone list 31 Auto unbypass Zone list 42 Enable Access Window for Access group s 01 Time Window 00 00 00 00 01 01 Active time 0 Actions 30 31 01 ZONE LIST Enter the zone list number which ENTER 1 8 1 co
127. Fast 10mSec 15mSec Normal 350mSec 500mSec default response Figure 9 Zones 1 9 Wiring Connections The maximum zone resistance is 100 ohms for zones 1 and 8 and 300 ohms for all other zones excluding the 2K EOL resistor 22 25 UL 1 A zone must be EOLR supervised when used for fire or burglary UL Listed Commercial Burglary installations 2 Zone 9 is unsupervised and may not be used in UL Commercial Burglary installations 3 A closed circuit unsupervised zone may be used for burglary in UL Residential Burglary installations provided that interconnecting wires are no longer than three feet with no intervening walls or barriers Wiring 2 Wire Smoke Detectors to Zone 1 Zone 1 has the added capability of supporting 2 wire smoke detectors This zone provides enough standby current 2 mA to power up to sixteen of the smoke detectors listed on the following page Each zone provides only enough alarm current 20 mA to power one smoke detector in the alarmed state When assigned zone type 9 the second entry of a Security Code OFF sequence at a keypad will interrupt power to this zone to allow detectors to be reset following an alarm 1 Connect 2 wire smoke detectors across zone 1 terminals 10 amp 11 as shown in Figure 10 Observe proper polarity when connecting the detectors 2 If an EOL resistor is presently connected across zone 1 terminals remove it The EOL resistors must be conn
128. Help Provide Proper Coverage For The Protected Premises Recommendations For Smoke And Heat Detectors With regard to the number and placement of smoke heat detectors we subscribe to the recommendations contained in the National Fire Protection Association s NFPA Standard 72 noted below Early warning fire detection is best achieved by the installation of fire detection equipment in all rooms and areas of the household as follows For minimum protection a smoke detector should be installed outside of each separate sleeping area and on each additional floor of a multi floor family living unit including basements The installation of smoke detectors in kitchens attics finished or unfinished or in garages is not normally recommended For additional protection the NFPA recommends that you install heat or smoke detectors in the living room dining room bedroom s kitchen hallway s attic furnace room utility and storage rooms basements and attached garages In addition we recommend the following Install a smoke detector inside every bedroom where a smoker sleeps Install a smoke detector inside every bedroom where someone sleeps with the door partly or completely closed Smoke could be blocked by the closed door Also an alarm in the hallway outside may not wake up the sleeper if the door is closed Install a smoke detector inside bedrooms where electrical appliances such as portable heaters air conditioners or humidi
129. ICATION AAV UNIT 69 General Information iq tn 69 AAV Module Op ration ee oti tp 69 AAV Module COmnece Os seio ter NR 70 Programming Audio Alarm Verification Module Options 70 VOLTAGE TRIGGERS Connector 7 eee eee eene n 72 General Information ic vas Ue I Aro PE Rd BURN Ia NOR 72 Ground Start Trigger 2 2 74 Open Close Set 75 Remote Keypad Sounder E 75 Keyswitch Sepeni penai 76 Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment 7720 79208 78 EXTERNAL SOUNDERS wii cssicsccsssenscassedsvesisosescasovasdecssoonseessteneooterseoeiese 79 General Information eu su e ea en MERE un 79 WIRDS eu REM de md 79 1 985 Household Fire Installations 79 UL1023 amp UL609 Commercial Burglary Installations 80 Wc TiS ta A 80 Programming External Sounders eere 80 Compatible Sounders and Siren 81 EVENT LOG OPTIONS sissscssccsscassecsossosessssseoncenseosescscessonsocvosessdenecasoesses 82 Gen r l Informati
130. ION N5944 6 for VISTA 50P and polling loop current must be limited to 750mA ZONES 1 8 350mSec 500mSec maximum number wh ASSOCIATION S STANDARD 72 NATIONAL FIRE VISTA SOPUL for Ea Household Fire Installations nad de ME maximum wire ran length PROTECTION ASSOC BATTERYMARCH PARK Normal 350mSec 500mSec QUINCY MA 02269 PRINTED INFORMATION default response DESCRIBING PROPER INSTALLATION OPERATION TESTING MAINTENANCE EVACUATION PLANNING AND REPAIR SERVICE IS TO BE PROVIDED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT 68 ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY Alarm Device Manufacturing Company a Division of Pittway Corporation and its divisions subsidiaries and affiliates Seller 165 Eileen Way Syosset New York 11791 warrants its products to be in conformance with its own plans and specifications and to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for 18 months from the date stamp control on the product or for products not having an Ademco date stamp for 12 months from date of original purchase unless the installation instructions or catalog sets forth a shorter period in which case the shorter period shall apply Seller s obligation shall be limited to repairing or replacing at its option free of charge for materials or labor any product which is proved not in compliance with Seller s specifications or proves defective in materials or workmanship under normal use and service Seller shall have no obligation under this Limit
131. LARM REPORT CODE amp ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 81 87 65 80 RF RCVRs PANICS amp RESTORE CODES 1 35 CODE 1 36 10 1 37 COD 74 CODE 751D 76 CODE 77 ID 78 65 0 5 010 73 113 Wt Alarm Rst 81 0 6 0 0 89 1 4 0 0 O 1 Alarm Rst 66 0 6 0 0 741114 0 0 0 0 Trouble 82 017 010 90 15 010 010 Trouble 67 017 010 75 115 010 010 Rst 83 018 00 911 010 010 Rst 68 018 010 76 01 010 010 Bypass 84 0 9 0 0 Dures 0 2 0 0 0 0 Bypass 69 0 9 0 0 77 0 2 0 0 0 0 Byps Rst 85 1 0 00 97 00 00 Bypss Rst 70 10 010 78 0 3 010 86 111 010 95 0J4 00 1 71 11 010 79 010 87 12 010 96 015 00 3 72 12 010 80 05 010 88 1 3 010 99 016 010 SYSTEM NON ALARM CODES NOTES 97 Poll Loop Short 88 amp 90 RCVR not receiving transmitter signals 89 amp 91 RCVR not responding bad conn to panel ZONE TYPE RESTORE ENABLES 79 ZONE TYPES 1 8 All enabled 1 1 1 yay sty yay pty ya 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 80 ZONE TYPES 9 amp 10 1 1 All enabled 9 Low Battery Low Bat Res AC Loss AC Restore Prog Tamper 81 First Digit 82 Second Digit Close 0 0 0 0 Open Test Power Cancel
132. N Set for 1 81 CANCEL REPORT Set for non zero digit 45 PRIMARY DIALER FORMAT Set for 1 Contact ID If you need more information about actual programming procedures see Section 4 THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING 3 Zone 5 must be programmed for response type 10 and the EOLR must be removed Zone 5 is no longer available as a protection zone 4 f using 4204 relay instead of the trigger program the relay to trip on Zone Type Sys Op 60 Audio Alarm Verification see SECTION 7 RELAY OUTPUTS AND POWERLINE CARRIER DEVICES 5 Press 99 to exit program mode 6 Enter Installer Code OFF to cancel the system s settling delay All switches should switch 5 which 123456 INCOMING TELCO LINE RED 4 GREEN Notes RJ31X ALLER 1 Remove any EOL JACK ID UNIT resistor from control panel on zone 5 if any present BROWN GRAY 8 CONDUCTOR DOUBLE PLUG CORD SUPPLIED gt PREMISES ANSWERING MACHINE AND PHONES ANSWERIN MACHINE CONTROL be off except 3xX should be on REFER TO AAV MODULE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONNECTIONS TO AUDIO SPEAKERS AND MICROPHONE TO CONTROL ZONE5 ZONE 5 ooooooooOo 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 5 GRAY BROWN 4204 RELAY MODULE MODEL EAGLE SECURITY RELAY 1 SHOWN OFF Figure 19 Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections 71 Section 1
133. ON POWERING UNIT 12345678910 12345678910 6606066606666 N CONNECT TO C COM EARTH GROUND SCREW TB30 VISTA 50 OR VISTA 50UL 7920SE WIRING USE VISTA 50UL FOR UL LISTED COMMERCIAL BURGLARY INSTALLATIONS CABLE TB2 GND GRAY FIRE Ll OPTIONAL OPTIONAL BROWN REQUIRED 4 7K NOT SUPPLIED RADIO OK OUTPUT TO C COM AUX PWR SEE NOTE 2 NOTE 35mA DRAW S FOR UL LISTED COMMERCIAL BURGLARY INSTALLATIONS 1 MOUNT THE 7920SE WITHIN 3 FEET OF THE C COM RUN WIRING FROM C COM TO 7920SE IN CONDUIT 2 CONNECT RADIO OK OUTPUT TO C COM EOLR SUPERVISED ZONE ZONE 2 7 ONLY USE 2K EOLR 3 SEE UL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ON A LATER PAGE TO DETERMINE WHEN 659EN USAGE IS REQUIRED 4 CONNECT TO C COM EOLR SUPERVISED ZONE ZONE 2 8 ONLY WHEN DESIRED TO HAVE PANEL LOCALLY ANNUNCIATE PHONE SEE LINE FAULTS PHONE LINE MONITOR OPENS ON FAULT 12V ON FAULT er REQUIRED OPTIONAL INCOMING PHONE LINE Figure 24 Auxiliary Alarm Signalling Equipment Section 13 EXTERNAL SOUNDERS This section provides the following information General information about external sounders Connecting external sounders for UL non UL applications Programming options for external sounders Compatible sounders General Information The Control provides one bell relay output used to power external alar
134. P TO 87 DEVICES 87 ZONES COMBINED TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON BOTH LOOPS COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 ft 3200 ft IF USING UNSHIELDED WIRE IN CONDUIT OR SHIELDED WIRE NOTES No more than 4197 may be used Refer to instructions provided with the 4197 for additional information on mounting UL considerations etc Figure 14 Polling Loop Extender Module Wiring Polling Loop Supervision A short on the polling loop is indicated by a trouble on its supervisory zone 97 and reports as a trouble condition only even if the system is armed As such it should be assigned zone type 05 if annunciation is desired If a device on the polling loop fails the panel cannot see that device the partition or partitions that use that device will display a trouble condition for all zones associated with that device If the panel is armed when a device fails the zones associated with that device will cause an alarm on the corresponding partition s A trouble on Zone 97 will not prevent a partition from being armed as long as all gh polling loop zones on that partition are bypassed 25 Programming Polling Loop Zones 1 With at least one two line alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 wired and set to a proper address power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC transformer into a 120VAC outlet previously wired to the control o wm Program data field 24 Enter data field programming mode Installer Code 8
135. R CABINET SIDEWALL OUTSIDE Figure 2 Cabinet Attack Hesistance Considerations Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Follow the instructions given above for Mercantile Premises listing n addition mount a shock sensor such as Sentrol No 5402 to the panel s backbox Follow the manufacturer s instructions for proper sensor mounting This sensor must also be wired to the same zone that is used to supervise the panel s tamper switch mE Installing the Control s Circuit Board Refer to the diagram below when mounting the PC board Hang the three mounting clips on the raised cabinet tabs Make sure the clip orientation is exactly as shown in the diagram to avoid damage to the clip when mounting screws are tightened This will also avoid problems with insertion and removal of the PC board Insert the top of the circuit board into the slots at the top of the cabinet certain that the board rests in the slots as indicated in step 2 detail Swing the base of the board into the mounting clips and secure the board to the cabinet with the accompanying screws as illustrated in Figure 3 ground connection between the PC board and the cabinet Also dress field wiring away from the microprocessor center section of the PC board Use the 2 loops on the left and right sidewalls of the cabinet for anchoring field wiring using tie wraps These steps are important to minimizing the risk of panel RF interference wi
136. RED NOTE Channel 1 will contain the user ID 1 9 A F if Open Close reporting is enabled The status channel might have one of the following conditions 1 DURESS For Duress Plus Channels 9 15 Only 2 OPENING 3 BYPASS For Channels 1 8 Only 4 CLOSING 5 SUPERVISORY TROUBLE For Channels 1 8 Only 6 SYSTEM STATUS AC LOSS in Channel 1 LOW BATTERY in Channel 2 TIME SET in Channel 3 LOG CLEAR in Channel 3 LOG 50 FULL in Channel 3 LOG 90 FULL in Channel 3 LOG OVERFLOW in Channel 3 POWER ON RESET in Channel 4 WALK TEST START END in Channel 8 7 NORMAL ALARM STATUS Channels 1 8 Only 9 TEST REPORT A typical high speed report may look as follows 1234 5115 5555 7 Acct 1234 with alarms on channels 2 3 LIMITATIONS 1 When using Ademco high speed remember there are only 15 channels available plus a duress channel If more than 15 zones are being used they will have to share channels 2 With Ademco High Speed reporting channels 9 15 cannot report troubles or bypasses Use these channels for zones that will not report these conditions 3 Only user numbers 1 15 can be uniquely reported with open close reports in Ademco High Speed 143 Loading Communication Defaults To help expedite the installation the system provides 4 different communication defaults Low Speed Ademco Express Ademco High Speed amp Ademco s Contact ID These defaults automatically program industry standard code ass
137. SS or SSSS Subscriber ID C Close Code 1st Digit A Alarm Code tst digit U User Number 1st amp 2nd digits Z Typically Zone Number 2nd digit Gg Test Code 1st amp 2nd digits Trouble Code 1st amp 2nd digits R Restore Code Alarm 1st amp 2nd digits Bb Bypass Code 1st amp 2nd digits Ryt Restore Code Trbl 1st amp 2nd digits EAc AC Loss Code 1st amp 2nd digits Rgb Restore Code Byps 1st amp 2nd digits LLg _ Low Battery Code 1st amp 2nd digits Restore Code AC 1st amp 2nd digits Open Code tst Digit R Lg Restore Code Bat 1st amp 2nd digits Zone numbers for or 99 3 or C 1 or A 95 Duress 92 142 Ademco Contact ID Reporting takes the following format CCCC QEEE GG 772 where CCCC Customer subscriber ID Event qualifier where E new event and R restore Event code 3 hexadecimal digits GG Partition Number system messages show 00 277 Zone contact ID number reporting the alarm or user number for open close reports System status messages AC Loss Walk Test etc contain zeroes in the ZZZ location Ademco High Speed Reporting events by channel Channels 1 through 8 could have one of the following conditions 1 NEW EVENT 2 OPENING Status Channel Always 2 3 RESTORE 4 CLOSING Status Channel Always 4 5 NORMAL NO EVENT TO REPORT 6 PREVIOUSLY REPORTED NOT YET RESTO
138. Sensor Fire Piezo Horn No MA12 24D System Sensor 12575 Fire Horn Strobe No Wheelock AS 121575W Fire Horn Strobe No RF JAM DETECTION The panel can now annunciate an RF jam condition as per UL985 when used in conjunction with a 5881 Series RF Receiver that supports RF jam detection identified by microprocessor Part No K3452 10 or higher The RF jam annunciation feature can be enabled by assigning response type 05 to zone 90 for the first RF receiver and to zone 88 for the second RF receiver This will be interpreted as a trouble regardless of whether the panel is armed or disarmed The RF supervisory zones are assigned to all partitions that have RF transmitters or RF keypads for keypad display event logging and dialer reporting purposes Contact ID Code 344 will be used to report RF jam faults Refer to the Installation Instructions provided with the 5881 RF Receiver for information on installing and configuring the receiver for RF jam detection BATTERY TESTING The panel now runs an extended 10 minute battery test every 4 hours instead of the previous 24 hour test interval to check on the condition of the battery as per UL985 During this test the panel PCB and external peripherals are powered from the battery and the panel initiates a trouble indication if the battery voltage is found to be low less than approximately 11 5V Some panels i e VISTA 50P VISTA 50PUL also run a brief 5 second battery test every 3 minutes to check if
139. The following chart defines the three sets of handshake kissoff frequencies that the panel supports and the different formats that can be sent for each FORMAT HANDSHAKE TRANSMITS DATA KISSOFF TRANSMIT TIME Low Speed 1400Hz 1900Hz 10PPS 1400Hz Under 15 secs 341 Standard report 4 1 4 2 2300 2 1800Hz 20PPS 2300Hz Under 10 secs 3 1 Standard report 4 1 4 2 Express 1400 2300 2 DTMF 10 cps 1400Hz Under 3 secs 4 2 High Speed 1400 2300 2 DTMF 10 cps 1400Hz Under 5 secs Contact ID 1400 2300 2 DTMF 10 cps 1400Hz Under 3 secs ADVISORY Ademco s Contact ID reporting is capable of uniquely reporting all 86 zones of information as well as openings and closings for all 75 users to central stations equipped with the Ademco 685 receiver using software level 4 4 or higher Must be level 4 6 or higher to fully support all new VISTA 50 report codes 685 software levels below 4 4 cannot support Contact ID reporting For information regarding updating the 685 receiver contact the Technical Support group at 1 800 645 7492 NY or 1 800 458 9469 CA 141 The following describes each format in greater detail 341 and 4 1 Standard Formats Comprised of a 3 or 4 digit subscriber number and a single digit report code e g Alarm Trouble Restore Open Close etc 341 and 4 1 Expanded Formats Comprised of a 3 or 4 digit subscriber number and a two digit re port code
140. UP uP up up ue uP UP UP UP UP UPTUPTUPT UP UP c RJ UP UP 5775 PIR DETECTOR TRANSMITTER MIRROR SIDE VIEW UP HOUSE ID 1 SHOWN Y 2 345 6 7 8 9 10 UP DN XMTR ID 32 SHOWN U 4 COUNT INST MODE DIP SWITCH POSITION 6 7 9 UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP uP uP UP uP UP UP uP UP UP uP uP ue up UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP uP UP UP UP UP Lue UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP 115655 UP UP UP UP UP UP c RJ UP RJ UP UP UP UP g a UP UP u UP UP UP UP UP UP UP
141. ZONING PAIR FOUR Enter the fourth pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five minute period to cause an alarm Enter 00 00 to disable RF TX LOW BATTERY SOUND Enter 0 if audible beep and display annunciation upon RF transmitter low battery condition is desired only in disarmed state Enter 1 if audible beep and display is desired in both armed and disarmed states Must be 1 for UL RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORT ENABLE Enter 1 if a trouble message for RF transmitter low battery conditions is to be sent to the central station Enter 0 if no report for transmitter low battery is desired Note that a trouble message will be sent for a transmitter supervision failure independent of this selection Must be 1 for UL 1 30 1 31 1 32 1 33 1 34 1 35 1 39 1 40 1 41 1 42 RF RCVR SUPERVISION CHECK IN INTERVAL Enter the check in monitoring interval in 2 hour increments Enter 02 15 times 2 hours 4 30 hours Failure of a receiver to receive any RF signal within the time entered will result in activation of the response type programmed for zone 90 for the first receiver and zone 88 for the second receiver and their related communication reports Enter 00 to disable receiver supervision Max 6 12 hr for UL RF TRANSMITTER CHECK IN INTERVAL Enter the check in monitoring interval in 2 hour increments Enter 02 15 times 2 hours 4 30
142. a 120VAC outlet previously wired to the control 2 Enter data field programming mode Installer Code 800 Program the following data fields 15 KEYSWITCH ASSIGNMENT for the partition in which the keyswitch is used 40 OPEN CLOSE REPORTING FOR KEYSWITCH as desired The keyswitch reports as user 0 enabled The system automatically assigns Zone Type 10 to Zone 7 if a keyswitch is 3 Press 99 to exit program mode 4 THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING If you need more information about actual programming procedures see Section LED indications are defined as follows Green Off Disarmed amp Not Read Disarmed amp Read On Stead Slow Flash Armed Sta Rapid Flash Alarm Memory 77 78 Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment Long Range Radio The J7 header provides triggers for fire alarm burglary audible panic alarm silent duress alarm These triggers are programmed as the defaults for Outputs 2 3 and 4 These may be used to trip auxiliary alarm signaling equipment such as Ademco s 7720 and 7920SE Long Range Radios The triggers for Fire Output 2 and Silent Panic Duress Output 4 may be used 22 to operate keyswitch armed and ready LEDs instead when field 15 is enabled When used as alarm triggers these outputs are normally low and go high when the corresponding alarm condition occurs These triggers remain high until the security code OFF is e
143. a battery is connected BATTERY BACKUP Household Fire or Combination Household Fire Burg installations require use of a backup battery that is sized to provide 24 hours of standby time followed by 4 minutes of alarm time UL1023 Household Burg only installations require use of a backup battery that is sized to provide 4 hours of standby time followed by 4 minutes of alarm time 4 hours of standby time followed by 15 minutes of alarm time for VISTA 50PUL UL609 Mercantile Burg Use Tables 2 3 and 4 below to determine the required backup battery capacity and battery model number dual battery harness is supplied that allows two batteries to be wired in parallel for increased capacity ADDENDUM Battery Backup continued Note The cabinet supplied with the VISTA 40 and VISTA 50P panels can house up to 12V 14AH batteries two 12V 7AH batteries wired in parallel The VISTA ULKT kit provides a cabinet that can house up to 12V 17 2AH batteries and that may be used with these panels The cabinet supplied with the VISTA 50PUL panel can house up to 12V 17 2AH batteries The total standby current drawn from the auxiliary power and polling loop outputs combined must be limited to 270mA when 14AH batteries are used and to 390mA when 17 2AH batteries are used Table 2 Total Current Drain Table Source of Current Drain Total Standby Current Total Alarm Current Auxiliary Power Output Polling Loop Output Bel
144. ach partition Master Manager or several other Operator levels e Opening Closing central station reporting option What partitions the code can operate Global arming capability ability to arm and disarm all partitions the code has access to in one command Useofa wireless transmitter to arm and disarm the system wireless transmitter must first be learned into the system Peripheral Devices Supports up to 16 addressable devices which can be any combination of keypads 6139 6137 6128 5137AD 4137AD RF receivers 4281 5881 relay modules 4204 and the 4285 VIP module Peripheral Devices have the following characteristics Terminated at the Keypad Port terminals on the control panel Each device set to an individual address physically according to the device s instructions Each device enabled in the system using the Device Programming Mode covered later in this manual Keypad Panic Keys Accommodates three keypad panic keys 1 A B and 3 C Characteristics of the panic keys are Designated as zones 95 1 96 3 and 99 Activated by wired and wireless keypads Activated and reported separately by partition distinguished by Subscriber Acct No or Partition No if Contact ID reporting is used Keypad Macros Accommodates one keypad macro command per partition each macro is a series of keypad commands which can be assigned to the D key on each partition s keypads This means
145. ad s Users Each user can be assigned to one or more partitions If a user is to operate more than one partition and would like to arm disarm all or some of those partitions with a single command the user must be enabled for Global Arming for those partitions when entering user codes A user with access to more than one partition multiple access can log on to one partition from another partition s keypad provided that program field 2 18 ENABLE GOTO is enabled for each partition you want to log on to from another A partition can be selected as a common lobby partition and other partitions can affect this partition by causing arming disarming of this partition to be automated see Common Lobby Logic later in this section Setting Up a Partitioned System The basic steps to setting up a partitioned system are described below If you need more information on how to program the prescribed options see Section 4 THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING as well as each corresponding section s programming procedure 1 Determine how many partitions the system will consist of programmed in field 2 00 Assign keypads to partitions 93 Device Programming mode Assign zones to partitions 93 Zone Programming mode Confirm zones are displayed at the keypad s assigned to those partitions Assign users to partitions Enable the GOTO feature program field 2 18 for each partition a multiple access user can log on to alp
146. al zone faults will be displayed one at a time To display a new partition s status press Partition No This will display the status of the new partition The Armed LED on a Master keypad will be lit only if all partitions have been armed successfully The Ready LED will be lit only if a partitions that are disarmed are ready to arm Neither LED will be lit if only some partitions are armed and only some disarmed partitions are ready The sounder on a Master keypad will reflect the sound of the most critical condition on all of the partitions The priority of the sounds is as follows A Pulsing fire alarm sounds B Steady burglar alarm sounds C Trouble sounds rapid beeping The sounder may be silenced by pressing any key on the Master keypad or a keypad on the partition where the condition exists Eg A Master keypad uses the same panics as Partition 1 Master keypad panics are sent to Partition 1 and will activate on Partitions 1 Therefore panics must be programmed for Partition 1 Section 3 INSTALLING THE CONTROL 10 1 This section provides installation instructions for the following Mounting the control cabinet Installing the cabinet lock if used Installing the main circuit board Standard phone line connections Connecting the AC transformer Installing the backup battery in the cabinet Making earth ground connections Mounting the Cabinet Mount the control cabinet to a stu
147. amp keypad blue wire if present d S m X SHOWN e e UR Yr e EE Figure 8 Using A Supplementary Power Supply For Keypads Mounting the Keypads 1 Mount the keypads at a height that is convenient for the user Refer to the instructions provided with the keypad for mounting procedure You can either surface mount or flush mount keypads using an appropriate Trim Ring Kit 5137TRK or 6139TRK Refer to the mounting instructions and template included with the keypad and or trim ring kit for specific information Addressing the Keypads Preliminary Check out Procedure If you want to check that the system is working before connecting field wiring from zones and devices do the following 1 Temporarily connect a 2000 ohm end of line resistor across each of the basic hard wire zones 1 8 as shown in the Summary of Connections diagram Connect a jumper across the zone 9 terminals Without actual zone wiring or EOL resistors connected the keypads will not display the Ready message 2 Power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC transformer previously wired to the control into a 120VAC outlet the system s Device Programming Mode 4 The keypads will not operate until they are physically addressed and enabled in 3 Set each keypad to an individual address 00 30 according to the keypad s instructions Set one alpha keypad for address 00 and other keypads for higher addresses 01 02
148. an be used in conjunction with an output relay to permit voice dialog between an operator at the central station and a person at the premises Requires the use of an optional AAV unit such as Eagle model 1241 If using Zone 5 is no longer available as a protection zone Cross Zoning Capability Helps prevent false alarms by preventing a zone from going into alarm unless its cross zone is also faulted within five minutes Exit Error False Alarm Prevention Feature System can tell the difference between a regular alarm and an alarm caused by leaving an Entry Exit door open If not subsequently disarmed faulted E E zone s will be bypassed and the system will arm Generates an Exit Error report by user and by zone so the Central Station knows it was an exit alarm and who caused it Communications Formats Supports the following formats for the Primary and Secondary Central Station receivers Ademco Low Speed Standard or Expanded Sescoa Radionics Ademco Express e Ademco High Speed Ademco Contact ID Built in User s Manual and Descriptor Review Contains a built in Users Manual and Descriptor Review mode alpha keypad only By depressing and holding any of the function keys on the keypad for 5 seconds a brief explanation of that particular function scrolls across the alpha numeric display By pressing and holding the READY key for 5 seconds and then releasing it all programmed zone descriptors can be displ
149. artition specific Enter the time between the end of the arming window and the start of auto arm warning time in values of 01 14 times 4 minutes Enter 00 if no delay is desired Enter 15 if auto arming is not desired AUTO ARM WARNING PERIOD partition specific Enter the time 01 15 in one minute increments during which the user is warned by a keypad sounding and display to exit the premises prior to auto arming of the system AUTO DISARM DELAY partition specific Enter the time between the end of the disarming window and the start of auto disarming of the system in values of 01 14 times 4 minutes Enter 00 if no delay is desired Enter 15 if auto disarming is not desired ENABLE FORCE ARM FOR AUTO ARM partition specific Enter 1 if the system should automatically bypass any faulted zones when it attempts to auto arm Otherwise enter 0 OPEN CLOSE REPORTS BY EXCEPTION partition specific Enter 1 if it is desired that open close reports be sent only if the openings closings occur outside the arm and disarm windows Open reports will also be suppressed during the closing window in order to prevent false alarms if the user arms the system then reenters the premises to retrieve a forgotten item Note that openings and closings are still recorded in the event log Enter 0 if exception reporting is not desired Note This field must be set to 1 if late early opening late early closing and no opening closing
150. ated 10 13 8 VDC through ohms When De activated 100 ohms to ground Outputs 2 amp 4 Operates by default as Fire and Silent Panic Duress triggers respectively These triggers may optionally be programmed to act as Arm and Ready status indicators when it is desired to use the 4146 keyswitch programmed in data field 15 Output 2 amp 4 Rating When Activated 10 13 8 VDC through 5K ohms When De activated 1k ohms to ground Output 3 Operates as a Burglary Audible Panic trigger There are no other options for this output Output 3 Rating When Activated 10 13VDC through 5K ohms When De activated 1k ohms to ground J7 CONNECTOR OUT 1 GROUND START OR OPEN CLOSE OUT 2 FIRE OR KEYSWITCH ARMED LED OUT 3 BURGLARY AUDIBLE PANIC AUXILIARY OUT 4 SILENT PANIC DURESS OR KEYSWITCH READY LED Figure 20 J7 Connector For Voltage Triggers 73 74 Ground Start Trigger Setup UL Not intended for use in UL Listed applications Output 1 may be used to trigger an optional 675 Ground Start module for installations having telephone lines which require ground start instead of loop start operation to obtain dial tone from the telco central office When the panel has a message to transmit to the central station it will seize the line go off hook and then trigger the 675 module to connect the RING side of the telephone line to earth ground The panel will cause the module to break the connecti
151. ating see Section 15 FINAL POWER UP PROCEDURE for auxiliary power ratings 22 Auxiliary power to 4 wire smoke detectors is not automatically reset after an alarm and therefore must be momentarily interrupted using either a normally closed momentary switch wired in series with one side of the aux power to the smokes or using a 4204 relay as described below Using a 4204 relay allows the detectors to be reset via the second entry of a Security Code OFF sequence The 4204 relay must be programmed to activate on Zone Type System Operation 54 Fire Zone Reset See Section 9 RELAY OUTPUTS amp POWERLINE CARRIER DEVICES for more information 1 Connect 12 volt power for the detectors from Auxiliary Power terminals 6 and 7 as follows Wire the side of Auxiliary Power Terminal 6 to the N C contact of the 4204 relay Wire the Pole of the Relay to the Power side of the smoke detector Connect the side of the smoke detector to Aux Power Terminal 7 Observe proper polarity when connecting detectors see Figure 11 27 U L Power to 4 wire smoke detectors must be supervised use a System Sensor A77 716 01 EOL relay module connected as shown TO PANEL ZONE ZONE 2 8 TO PANEL AUXILIARY POWER TERMINALS 6 7 NOTES PROGRAM THE RELAY TRANSFER ON FIRE ZONE RESET ACTIVATION CODE 54 SEE 4204 RELAY MODULE SECTION FOR DETAILS SECOND CODE AND OFF RELAY 1 2 3 OR 4
152. ational To accomplish this do the following With at least one two line alpha keypad connected to the system and addressed as described previously 1 Enter data field programming mode Installer Code 8 0 0 2 Program field 2 00 Number of Partitions d Refer to Section 4 THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING if you need information about how to move around in program mode 3 From Data Field Programming mode press 93 4 Press 0 NO to each menu option until the DEVICE PROG prompt appears DEVICE PROG Press 1 YES to enter DEVICE PROGRAMMING mode 1 YES 0 NO The following prompts will appear DEVICE ADDRESS The device address identifies the keypad to the control 01 31 00 QUIT Enter the 2 digit address number as set at the keypad 01 30 Press to continue DEVICE TYPE Select the type of addressable keypad as follows 00 device not used 01 alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 02 fixed word keypad 4137AD 6137 6128 Press to continue CONSOLE PART Enter the partition number to which you are assigning this keypad 01 to maximum number of partitions programmed for the system in field 2 00 This is the primary partition for which the keypad is intended to be used Enter 09 if the keypad is to be used as a master keypad to view the status of all other partitions see Master Keypad Setup and Operation in Section 3 PLANNING A PARTITION SYSTEM Press to continue
153. atus AC Power Status List of Faulted Zones List of Bypassed Zones 224 Event Log List of Zones Currently in Alarm List of Zones Currently in Trouble Set the Real Time clock 151 152 Access Security Accessing the Control from a remote location is protected against compromise by the use of 4 levels of protection 1 Security Code Handshake The subscriber s account number as well as an 8 digit ID number known only to the office must be matched between the Control and computer 2 Hang Up and Call Back The Control panel will hang up and call the computer back at the pre programmed number only if the security codes match 3 Data Encryption All data that is exchanged between the computer and Control is encrypted to reduce the possibility of anyone tapping the line and corrupting data Additionally all account files are encryped to prevent them from being opened on another installer s VLink downloading software package 4 Operator Access Levels Up to 15 operators can have access to the DOWNLOADER each having their own log on code However each operator can be assigned one of three levels of access in both FILE and COMMAND functions as follows FILE ACCESS Read Only able only to look at the database cannot change any information and cannot see the customer s access codes Part Read Write able to look at and change all information except the customer s access codes Full Read Write ab
154. ault one or more zones Silence alarm sounder s each time by entering the code and pressing OFF Check that Entry Exit delay zones provide the assigned delay times Check the keypad initiated alarms if programmed in field 05 by pressing the Panic key pairs 1 3 If the system has been programmed for audible emergency the keypad will emit a loud steady alarm sound The word ALARM and a descriptor 99 will be displayed for t if 1 is pressed 95 will be displayed if 4 3 is pressed 96 will be displayed Silence the alarm by entering the security code and pressing OFF If the system has been programmed for silent panic there will be no audible alarms or displays but a report will be sent to the central station if programmed to do so Notify the central station that all tests are finished and verify results with them Turning The System Over To The User 1 2 Fully explain the operation of the system to the user by going over each of its functions as well as the User s Manual supplied In particular explain the operation of each zone entry exit perimeter interior fire etc Be sure the user understands how to operate any emergency feature s programmed into the system IMPORTANT In the spaces provided in the User s Manual record the Entry and 3 To The Installer Exit Delay times and those functions that have been programmed into the available pa
155. aults shorts FCC REGISTRATION NO AC398U 68192 AL E 4137AD 5137AD REMOTE KEYPADS Physical Width 8 4 inches Height 4 75 inches Depth 1 1 inches Electrical Voltage Input 12VDC Current Drain 60 mA 4137AD 90 mA 5137AD Interface Wiring RED 12VDC input auxiliary power BLUE Not Used GREEN Data to control panel YELLOW Data from control panel BLACK Ground and connection from supplemental power supply 6137 6139 Remote Keypad Physical Width 6 25 inches Height 4 75 inches Depth 1 25 inches 6137 1 inch Electrical Voltage Input 12VDC Current Drain 100 mA 6139 85mA 6137 Interface Wiring RED 12VDC input auxiliary power BLUE Not Used GREEN Data to control panel YELLOW Data from control panel BLACK Ground and connection from supplemental power supply 178 CONTACTING TECHNICAL SUPPORT PLEASE Before you call Technical Support be sure you READ THE INSTRUCTIONS Check all wiring connections Determine that the power supply and or backup battery are supplying proper voltages Verify your programming information where applicable Be sure all keypads and devices are addressed properly Note the proper model number of this product and the version level if known along with any documentation that came with the product Note your ADEMCO customer number and or company name Having this information handy will make it easier for us to serve you
156. ay Burglary 05 Trouble By Day Alarm 10 Partition 10 Report Code By Night 23 No Alarm Response Used for Relay Activation Enter the partition number 1 8 you are assigning this zone to Press to continue Enter the report code for this zone Enter the first digit and press Enter the second digit and press again summary of both digits will be displayed Press to continue 10 Input Enter the input device type as follows 6 serial number polling loop device SL type 7 DIP switch type left loop polling loop device DP type 8 right loop of DIP switch type device PS type wh Right loops refer to the use of the right or secondary loop on a 4190WH zone expander module and or 4278 PIR This loop allows standard contacts to be monitored by the polling loop N C non supervised devices only CANNOT be used in UL installations 10 LOOP NUMBER OR 10 LEARN S N 1 YES 0 10 INPUT S N L A000 0000 1 10PROGAS SL 1 A001 3078 1 If this is a previously learned sensor the loop number for this zone will appear Press to continue If type 6 was entered and the sensor s serial number has not been learned the serial number can be learned now by entering 1 or it can be learned later by using the SERIAL NUMBER LEARN menu Enter 0 if serial number will be learned later The summary screen will then appear se
157. ay have been improperly installed and positioned Smoke detectors may not sense fires that start where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys in walls or roofs or on the other side of closed doors Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or building A second floor de tector for example may not sense a first floor or basement fire Finally smoke detectors have sensing limitations No smoke detector can sense every kind of fire every time In general detectors may not always warn about fires caused by carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed violent explosions escaping gas improper storage of flammable materials overloaded electrical circuits children playing with matches or arson Depending on the nature of the fire and or location of the smoke detectors the detector even if it operates as anticipated may not provide sufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their installation manual Passive Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection They do create multiple beams of protection and intrusion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by those beams They cannot detect motion or intrusion that takes place behind walls ceilings floors closed doors glass partitions glass doors or windows Mechanical tamperin
158. ayed one at a time This serves as a check for installers to be sure all descriptors are entered properly Improved Downloading Speed Uploads and downloads at 300 baud old rate is 75 baud making upload download speed approximately three times faster Section 2 PLANNING A PARTITIONED SYSTEM This section provides the following information Theory of partitioning Setting up a partitioned system Common Lobby Logic Master keypad setup and operation Theory of Partitioning This system provides the ability to arm and disarm up to 8 different areas each as if it had its own control These areas are called partitions Partitions are used when the user desires to disarm certain areas while leaving other areas armed or to limit access to certain areas to specific individuals Each user of the system can be assigned to operate any or all partitions and can be given a different authority level in each Facts you need to know about partitioning First you must determine how many partitions are required 1 8 This must be done before anything can be assigned to those partitions Keypads Each keypad must be given a unique address and assigned to one partition can also be assigned to Partition 9 if Master keypad operation is desired see Master Keypad Setup and Operation later in this section Zones Each zone must be assigned to one partition The zones assigned to a partition will be displayed on that partition s keyp
159. back through the list When you have reached the desired character press the 6 key to select it The cursor will then move to the right in position for the next character Repeat step 2 to create the desired word or words Save the word by pressing the 8 key This will return you to the RELAY DESCRIPT display Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each relay Exit Relay Descriptor Mode by entering 00 at the RELAY DESCRIPT prompt NOTE Relay descriptors will appear on an alpha keypad when turning a relay on or off using the Code 70 Relay Menu mode 115 116 Custom Message Display Installer s Message Normally when the system is in the disarmed state the following display is present on the keypad DISARMED READY TO ARM Part or all of the above message can be modified to create a custom installer message for each partition For example DISARMED on the first line or READY TO ARM on the second line could be replaced by the installation company name or phone number for service Note that there are only 16 character spaces on each of the two lines To create a custom display message proceed as follows 1 Select DEFAULT SCREEN mode The keypad will ask for the partition number for this message Enter the partition number Press to accept entry The following will appear DISARMED READY TO ARM A cursor will be present at the extreme left of the first line over the first star
160. be assigned a different zone number and learned separately For button transmitters wireless keys such as the 5803 and 5801 you must assign a unique zone number to each individual button used on the transmitter Each button on the transmitter also has a pre designated loop or input number which is automatically displayed when learned 5800 Series Transmitter Supervision Except for some transmitters that may be carried off premises 5802 5802CP 5803 5827 and 5827BD each transmitter is supervised by a check in signal that is sent to the receiver at 70 90 minute intervals If at least one check in is not received from each supervised transmitter within a programmed time period i e 12 hrs the missing transmitter number s and CHECK will be displayed The supervision for a particular transmitter that may be carried off the premises 5801 5802MN may be turned off by learning it as a UR Unsupervised RF type as described later 5800 series transmitters have built in tamper protection and will cause a CHECK condition to be annunciated if covers are removed provided that program field 24 Disable Expansion Zone Tamper is set for 0 5800 Series Transmitter Input Types All of the transmitters described one or more unique factory assigned loop inputs Each of the inputs requires its own programming zone e g 58035 three button inputs require three programming zones Transmitters can be learned as o
161. ber from the relay voice descriptor and custom word substitutes vocabulary list found in the Relay Voice Descriptors section Press to accept entry The CUSTOM WORD NO prompt will be displayed Enter the next custom word number to be substituted or enter 00 to quit 121 Section 20 SCHEDULING OPTIONS This section provides the following information Main features of scheduling Time Window Definitions Open Close Schedule Definitions Programming in the 80 Scheduling menu mode Programming Time Windows Open Close Schedules Holiday Schedules Time Driven Events Access Schedules Introduction To Scheduling This section describes the scheduling features provided with this control panel U L 1 You must program bypass and auto arm fail reports fields 2 13 amp 2 14 for UL installations 2 Auto disarming is not for use in UL installations General The scheduling features of this control allow certain operations to be automated such as auto arming auto disarming auto bypassing and un bypassing of zones and activating relay outputs using powerline carrier devices or 4204 modules The system uses time windows for defining open close schedules holiday schedules and user defined temporary schedules Scheduled events are programmed by user friendly menu modes of programming 80 81 amp 83 modes explained in detail in this section These menus take you step
162. bold face type are those that are also available for use by the 4285 VIP module If using a VIP module and words other than these are selected for alpha descriptors the voice module will not provide annunciation of those words OvozzUum m 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 250 to 269 See the RELAY VOICE TRANSMITTER TRAP ULTRA UP UPPER UPSTAIRS UTILITY VALVE VAULT VIBRATION VOLTAGE WALL WAREHOUSE WASH WEST WINDOW WINE WING WIRELESS WORK XMITTER YARD ZONE No ZONE 4TH 5TH 6 6TH 7 8 8TH 9 9TH Custom Word 1 Custom Word 20 Nxx lt e lt c4un 117 118 Device Programming This menu is used to program keypads receivers and relay modules From Data Field Programming mode press 93 to display ZONE PROG Press 0 repeatedly to display DEVICE PROG DEV PROG 1 YES 0 NO DEV ADDR 01 31 00 QUIT XPANDFER HOUSEID XX MODULE PART Press 1 to enter DEVICE PROGRAMMING mode The device address identifies the device to the control Enter the 2 digit device address number to match the device s physical address setting 01 30 Press to accept entry Note Device Address 04 must be used for the 4285 Voice Module if one is utilized If not it can be
163. by a once per minute beep at the Keypad Indicates that a low battery condition exists in the wireless transmitter displayed The audible warning sound may be silenced by pressing any key SYSTEM LO BAT alpha or BAT with no zone number fixed word indicates that a low battery condition exists with the system s backup battery RCVR SET UP ERROR alpha or E8 fixed word at the keypad Indicates that the system has more wireless zones programmed than the wireless receiver can support If this is not corrected none of the zones in the system will be protected If additional wireless zones are desired use an appropriate receiver MODEM COMM alpha or CC fixed word Indicates that the control is on line with the remote computer and the control is not operating Panel s response to alarm and trouble conditions will be delayed until on line session is completed Power Failure If the POWER indicator is off and the message AC LOSS alpha or NO AC fixed word is displayed the keypad is operating on battery power only Check to see that your system s plug in transformer has not been accidentally pulled out Instruct the user to call a service representative immediately if AC power cannot be restored 169 REGULATORY AGENCY STATEMENTS 170 UL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS The following requirements apply to both UL Residential and UL Commercial A N gt 5 Burglary installations All partitions must
164. by is disarmed the lobby will also be disarmed b The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed c Arming the last partition that is programmed to arm the lobby will automatically attempt to arm the lobby If any faults exist in the lobby partition or another partition that affects the lobby is disarmed the lobby cannot be armed and the message UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION will be displayed You cannot select a partition to arm the lobby unless it has first been selected to affect the lobby Enable field 1 18 before enabling field 1 19 The following chart sums up how the common lobby partition will operate if different options are set for another partition in fields 1 18 and 1 19 8 9 Disarms when Attempts to arm when Affects Lobby Arms Lobby partition disarms partition arms other partitions disarmed NO NO YES YES NO NO YES YES NO ENTRY NOT ALLOWED Here is an example of how the lobby would react in a typical setup OFFICE 1 OFFICE 2 COMMON LOBBY MAIN ENTRANCE User 1 has access to Office 1 and the Common Lobby User 2 has access to Office 2 and the Common Lobby Office 1 is set up to affect the Common Lobby but not arm it Office 2 is set up to affect and arm the Common Lobby For the purpose of this example the indicate the current status of the other partition when the user takes a
165. ce s instructions or the DIP Switch Tables found at the end of this manual when setting addresses Certain polling loop devices such as the 4139SN and 4191SN do not have DIP switches Instead they have embedded serial numbers which must be enrolled by the control during 93 Menu Mode Zone Programming number mode When used with the Vista 50P these devices MUST be set for the Certain polling loop devices be set for either dip switch mode or serial serial number mode of operation Note Twisted pair recommended for all normal wire runs IMPORTANT When in a star configuration no individual run can be longer than the table indicates and the total length of all the sensor star runs combined cannot exceed 4000 If using unshielded wire in conduit or shielded wire the maximum is 2000 If longer wire runs are needed a 4197 Loop Extender Module must be used 9 69 Polling loop rating 64mA maximum POLLING LOOP TO RIGHT LOOP Figure 13 Polling Loop Connections Polling Loop Limitations The built in polling loop has the following limitations that must be observed The maximum allowable current draw from the polling loop is 64mA Refer to the POLLING LOOP CURRENT DRAW WORKSHEET found in Section 15 FINAL POWER UP PROCEDURE for current draws of various polling loop devices If devices total more than 64 mA a 4197 Polling Loop Extender Module is required Regardless of cur
166. ction Sequence 1 Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action Disarms Armed Disarms Disarmed Disarms No Change Disarmed No change Arms Arms Sequence 2 Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action Armed Disarms Disarms Disarms Disarmed No change Disarmed No Change No Change Notice that in sequence 1 since Office 2 was the last to arm the lobby also armed Office 2 is programmed to affect and arm the lobby In sequence 2 the lobby could not arm when Office 2 armed because Office 1 which affects the lobby was still disarmed When Office 1 armed the lobby still did not arm because Office 1 was not programmed to arm the lobby User 1 would have to arm the lobby manually Therefore you would want to program a partition to affect and arm the lobby if the users of that partition are expected to be the last out of the building 8 How User Access Codes Affect the Common Lobby Codes with Global Arming If a code is given global arming when it is defined see Section 24 SECURITY ACCESS CODES the keypad will ask Arm all or Disarm all whenever the user tries to arm or disarm the partitions he has access to from an alpha keypad This allows the user to pick and choose the partitions to be armed or disarmed and so eliminates the automatic operation of the lobby Keep in mind however that if attempting to arm all and another affecting partition is disarmed the user will not be able to arm the
167. ctors to zones 1 8 Compatible smoke detectors 2 and 4 wire Wiring 2 wire glassbreak detectors to zone 8 Zone 9 applications Check out procedure for hardwired zones Common Characteristics of Hardwired Zones 1 8 EOLR supervision optional for zones 2 8 supporting or N C sensors Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions Upto 16 2 wire smoke detectors on zone 1 4 wire smoke or heat detectors on zones 1 8 power to 4 wire smokes must be supervised for UL installations Upto 50 2 wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8 Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1 8 1 Connect sensors contacts to the hardwire zone terminals 10 through 22 Connect N C devices in series with the high side of the loop The 2K EOL resistor must be connected in series with the devices following the last device Connect N O devices in parallel across the loop Observe polarity when wiring smoke detectors The 2K EOL resistor must be connected across the loop wires at the last device 4 Red Jumper 43 3 4 9 69 9 49 6 O O N 2 Programmable Response Fast Normal Loop 2 WIRE SMOKE DETECTOR LOOP Also supports NO NC Burg contacts Burg Usage 2kEOLR 2k EOLR 2K EOLR Zone resistance Excluding EOLR 2k EOLR ZONE 1 8 100 OHMS MAXIMUM Zone response time ALL OTHER ZONES 300 OHMS MAXIMUM ZONES 1 8 350 5 500 5 ZONE 9 for
168. d NORMALLY CLOSED OR EOLR ZONES 2 8 Enter 0 if end of line resistors are to be used Enter 1 if end of line resistors are not to be used in which case only normally closed devices must be used Must be 0 for UL DIAL TONE PAUSE This field sets the time the system will wait for dial tone before dialing Applies if true dial tone is not selected in field 43 Enter the desired wait time for dial tone detection as follows Enter single digit 0 2 5 seconds 1 11 seconds or 2 30 seconds Must be 0 for UL 43 DIAL TONE DETECTION Determines whether the control will wait for a true dial tone before dialing or if it will wait for a predetermined delay before dialing delay is programmed in Dial Tone Pause field 42 The latter may be necessary in high noise environment Telco networks where noise can be confused with dial tone resulting in premature dialing Enter 1 for true dial tone wait If no dial tone is detected will dial at end of pause programmed in field 42 Enter 0 to pause for seconds entered in field 42 then dial 44 RING DETECTION COUNT Only applicable if using a 4285 VIP Module and or if station initiated downloading will be used Enter 00 to disable ring detection Enter 01 14 for ring counts of 1 14 Enter 15 to select answering machine defeat mode which allows the System to receive calls even when a telephone answering machine is connected to
169. d safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution User should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total
170. dow Start Time Stop Time Number HH MM HH MM Keep this worksheet handy as you will be asked for a given time window number later in this section Time windows are defined by a start and a stop time using the Time Windows programming menu 128 Programming Time Windows Enter Scheduling Mode by entering the installer code 80 The keypad will display the Time Window programming prompt Time Window Enter 1 at this main menu prompt to program time 1Yes 0 0 windows Time Window Enter the 2 digit time window number to be programmed 01 20 00 Quit 01 Press to accept the entry Enter 00 then at the TIME WINDOW prompt to quit Time Window programming and display the Quit prompt Enter 0 at the Quit prompt to Quit return to the main menu choices 1 YES 0 NO 0 and continue programming Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode 01 TIME WINDOW If a time window number was entered the cursor will be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start of window entry Enter the desired start of window hour and press The cursor moves to the minutes Enter the desired minutes and press Toggle the AM PM indication by pressing any key 0 9 while the cursor is under the letter A P position Repeat for the end of window time entry When the entry is completed the TIME WINDOW prompt is displayed again Enter the next time window number to be programmed and repeat the procedure When all time windows
171. e List continue to the next procedure in this section If not enter 00 at the next two prompts Then enter 99 to exit programming completely After exiting enter the Installer Code OFF to cancel the system s settling delay 62 Zone List Programming After all relays have been programmed upon entering 00 at the ENTER RELAY NO prompt you will be asked to enter a Zone List If a Zone List number was used to start or stop a relay you must define the zones belonging to that list as follows Enter Zone LIST Enter the zone list number 01 08 Enter 00 to quit 00 QUIT 00 01 Enter Zn Num Using two digit entries enter each zone to be 00 QUIT 00 included in this zone list Press after each zone number is entered When all zones have been entered enter 00 then press ee 01 Del Zn LIST Enter 0 to save the zone list entered Enter 1 to 0 1 Yes delete that zone list 01 Delete Zone Enter 1 to delete one or more zones in that zone list O No 1 Yes Enter 0 if no changes are necessary If 1 is entered the next screen will appear otherwise the Enter Zone List prompt will reappear 01 Zn to Delete Enter each zone number to be deleted from the zone 00 QUIT 00 list pressing after each number View Zn LIST This will appear if 00 is pressed at the ENTER ZONE 00 QUIT 00 LIST prompt Enter the zone list number that you wish to view Press to continue
172. e connections between the Control and the 41005 are different than those shown in the 4100SM Installation Instructions See the diagram below for correct connections In addition when the green wire is referred to in step 2 of the IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY section of the 4100SM Instructions use the violet wire Connector J8 located above connector J7 on the right hand side of the main PC board see the Summary of Connections diagram on the inside back cover of this manual is intended to be interfaced to either a local serial printer see EVENT LOG PRINTER CONNECTIONS or a computer Make connections to a computer as shown below Note that the violet wire connection for a computer differs from that used when connecting a serial printer J8 CONNECTOR To TB6 Aux Power 25mA current draw To TB7 Aux Power not used not used not used C not used d RED BLUE WHITE Figure 30 Direct Wire Downloading Connections 153 Section 23 SETTING THE REAL TIME CLOCK 154 This section provides the following information General information about the real time clock Setting the time and date General Information This system provides a real time clock which must be set in order for the system s event log to keep track of events by time and date It must also be set in order to execute scheduling programs time driven events via the Downloader software Only
173. e control 3 Wire the 1361 transformer 1361CN in Canada to the panel before connecting the battery as shown in Figure 28 or wire the 4300 transformer as shown in Figure 29 if using Powerline Carrier devices 4 Plug the transformer into a 24 hour uninterrupted 120VAC 60Hz outlet After a few seconds the keypad display will appear 86 PRIMARY POWER Supplied by 1361 Plug in Connect to i 12VDC 4AH Transformer which or 12VDC 7AH is rated at 16 5VAC 40VA Z Caution must be CHARGING taken when wiring VOLTAGE this transformer to TS VDG the panel to guard Replace 2 0700010 every 60 Hz Outlet against blowing the 3 years fuse inside the transformer non replaceable TRANSFORMER 16 5VAC 40VA ADEMGO No 1361 IN CANADA USE No 1361CN or 4300 IF X 10 DEVICES WILL BE USED NO CONNECTION NOTE WHEN POWERING UP THE PANEL PLUG THE TRANSFORMER IN BEFORE CONNECTING THE BATTERY Figure 28 1321 Transformer and Battery Connections 4300 TRANSFORMER INTERFACE Earth AC Ground AC Sync Data Com YELLOW TB1 TB1 zl 30 2 Figure 29 4300 Transformer Connections J8 CONNECTOR 4142TR CABLE 87 Programming Power and AC Options 1 With at least one alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 wired and properly addressed power up the system 2 Enter data field programming mode Installer Code 800 Program the following data f
174. e restores Refer to the SYSTEM COMMUNICATION section for event code definitions 145 COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for LOW SPEED FORMAT 94 80 45 PRIMARY FORMAT O Ademco Low Speed 51 DUAL REPORTING 0 mo 46 LOW SPEED FORMAT Primary 0 Ademco Low 52 STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY Speed E 0 0 0 0 0 0 standard 47 SECONDARY FORMAT 0 Ademco Low Speed Alam Bypass Opn Cls Low Bat 48 LOW SPEED FORMAT Sec 0 AdemcoLowSpeed 53 STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY 49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 standard checksum Primary Secondary Alarm Rstr Bypass Opn Cls Low Bat 50 SESCOA RADIONI
175. e summary screen description above If learning the serial number now entering 1 at the last prompt this prompt appears Fault the sensor two times The keypad will beep twice after the first fault and three times upon receiving a matching fault signal When the serial number has been successfully learned its number appears in the display Alternatively if the serial number is printed on the device it can be entered in manually Once entered press to display the next screen Press to continue The summary screen will then appear as it did when first entering the zone number to be programmed see summary screen description above Press to display the ENTER ZN NO prompt and program the next zone After all zones have been programmed enter 00 at this prompt and press B The system will prompt Quit Menu Mode Press 1 to quit This will return you to normal data field programming mode Press 99 to exit program mode Enter the Installer Code OFF to cancel the system s settling delay 27 38 Check Out Procedure For Polling Loop Zones After installation of all polling loop zones is complete each partition of the security system should be checked as follows 1 Make certain that all devices and sensors connected to the polling loop are not in a faulted state Doors and windows with contacts should be closed PIRs should be covered use a cloth to mask them temporar
176. e user for battery life Do not install batteries in wireless transmitters until ready to learn as will be 22 indicated under Programming the Wireless Transmitters later in this section Though it is not critical to remove batteries after learning it is recommended in order to avoid interference while learning additional transmitters Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters Learn As Description Input Type Wireless Panic Has four pushbuttons each with a Transmitter unique input loop code Programmable responses 0 Panic Arm Stay Arm Away Disarm etc For arming disarming functions button must be assigned to a user code when adding a user 5802 Pendant BR Only Has single pushbutton Personal Emergency Usually be programmed for Transmitter response type of 24Hr Audible or 24 Hr Silent other zone responses are possible Belt Clip Contains a non replaceable Personal Emergency battery At the end of the battery s Transmitter life the entire unit must be replaced e If using for arming disarming the button must be assigned to a user code when adding a user Wireless Key BR Only Has three pushbuttons each with Transmitter a unique input loop code Programmable responses e g Arm Stay Arm Away Disarm etc Contains non replaceable battery At the end of the battery s life the entire unit must be replaced e If using for arming disarming the button must be
177. ecific partition number Press to continue 61 Relays may be grouped for common activation by time driven events commands 06 10 see Section 20 SCHEDULING OPTIONS for more information Enter 0 no group or 1 8 for a specific group number Press to continue Restriction The system may have some devices which are not 1 yes 0 intended to be under end user control such as relays activating fire doors or machinery Enter 1 if the end user will be restricted from accessing this relay Press to continue Enter 1 for 4204 relay outputs Enter 2 for Powerline Relay Type Carrier devices Press to continue ECP ADDRESS For relay module 4204 outputs enter the actual relay module s address 01 15 as set by its DIP switches MODULE RELAY For 4204 relay outputs enter the specific relay number on that module 1 4 Press to continue House Code For Powerline Carrier devices enter the numerical equivalent of the House Code of the device as follows 00 04 1 08 12 01 05 4 09 13 02 G 06 K 10 O 14 D 03 H 07 L 11 P 15 Unit Code Enter the numberical unit code of the Powerline Carrier device 00 15 Press to continue The keypad will display the Start and Stop summary screens again Press to continue 5 When all relays have been programmed enter 00 at the ENTER RELAY NO prompt 6 If defining a Zon
178. ected across the loop wires of each zone at the last detector 3 See Programming Hard Wired Zones later in this section for a detailed programming procedure The alarm current provided by zone 1 will support only one smoke detector in the alarmed state 2 WIRE SMOKE DETECTOR W104 Figure 10 2 Wire Smoke Detector Connected to Zone 1 Compatible 2 Wire Smoke Detectors You may use up to sixteen 2 wire smoke detectors each on zone 1listed in the table below llonization w B401B base lonization w B401B base System Sensor 1451 Photoelectric duct detect w DH400 base System Sensor 2451 Photoelectric w heat sensor direct wire System Sensor 2100T Photoelectric w B110LP base System Sensor 2151 NOTE These smoke detectors are Listed for use with the Vista 50P and are the only 2 wire smoke detectors that may be used in UL applications Unsupervised Usage of Zone 1 Zone 1 can also be used for normally closed unsupervised devices by doing the following 1 Cut the red jumper the PC board located above Zone 1 see Figure 9 2 Connect closed circuit devices in series with terminals 10 and 11 Wiring 4 Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 8 When programmed for fire warning usage all zones can monitor 4 wire smoke detectors or N O fire alarm initiating devices You may use as many 4 wire smoke detectors as can be powered from the panel s auxiliary power output without exceeding the output s r
179. ections 1 Connect the 4146 keyswitch s normally open momentary switch to Zone 7 2 Connect a 2k EOL resistor across the switch regardless of whether or not zones 2 8 are selected to use EOL resistors See diagram below TO AUX POWER O TERMINAL 6 YELLOW WHITE RED GREEN ARMED READY 820ohms 8200 RED BLACK TOJ7 OUT2 4 TO J7 OUT4 2K EOLR TO ZONE 6 4 TERMINAL 18 TAMPER SWITCH CONTACTS CLOSE WHEN SWITCH DEPRESSED SEE NOTE d TO ZONE 6 20 7 de TERMINAL 19 ZONE 7 TERMINAL 20 A 2K EOLR BROKEN LINES REPRESENT INSTALLER WIRING CONNECTIONS NOTE The tamper switch need not be used for UL Household Fire or Burglary installations The tamper switch must be connected to an EOLR supervised zone programmed for trouble by day alarm by night type 05 response as shown for UL Commercial Burglary installations When the keyswitch is removed from the wall the tamper switch will open causing a fault trouble or alarm on zone 6 and causing the panel to disable keyswitch operation until the partition is disarmed from a console Figure 23 Remote Keyswitch Wiring 3 Connect the keyswitch Armed and Ready LEDs to the trigger connector as shown in Figure 23 Programming The Remote Keyswitch 1 With at least one two line alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 wired and set to a proper address power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC transformer into
180. ed Warranty or otherwise if the product is altered or improperly repaired or serviced by anyone other than Ademco factory service For warranty service return product transportation prepaid to Ademco Factory Service 165 Eileen Way Syosset New York 11791 THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF IN NO CASE SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OR UPON ANY OTHER BASIS OF LIABILITY WHATSOEVER EVEN IF THE LOSS OR DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY THE SELLER S OWN NEGLIGENCE OR FAULT Seller does not represent that the products it sells may not be compromised or circumvented that the products will prevent any personal injury or property loss by burglary robbery fire or otherwise or that the products will in all cases provide adequate warning or protection Customer understands that a properly installed and maintained alarm may only reduce the risk of a bur glary robbery fire or other events occurring without providing an alarm but it is not insurance or a guarantee that such will not occur or that there will be no personal injury or property loss as a result CONSEQUENTLY SELLER SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY PROPERTY DAMAGE OR OTHER LOSS BASED ON A CLAIM THE PRODUCT FAILED TO GIVE WARNING HOWEVER IF SELLER IS HEL
181. ed on the tens of hours digit of the start time for the arm window Enter the desired hour Press to move to the minutes field The minutes are entered in the same manner The AM PM indication is toggled by hitting any key in the 0 9 range while the cursor is under the letter A P position Repeat for the stop time entry After the windows for that day have been completed the system will prompt for disarm and arm time windows for the next day Press if no changes are desired Tue DISARM WIND Repeat the procedure described above for all days 00 00AM 00 00AM of the week When all of the days have been completed the system will ask which days are to be activated This is the prompt that actually activates the Hit 0 7 x x temporary schedule and allows the temporary schedule to be customized to a particular week s needs To select the days which are to be activated enter 1 7 Monday 1 An X will appear under that day indicating the schedule for that day is active Entering a day s number again will deactivate that day Pressing 0 will toggle all days on off The temporary schedule will only be in effect for the days which have the letter x underneath them As the week progresses the selected days are reset to the inactive state When completed press or to exit the temporary schedule entry mode 83 User Scheduling Menu Mode The system provides up to 20 timers which will be available to the end user for the purpose
182. ed that no test report be sent if any other type of report was sent since the last test report Enter 0 if test reports are to be sent at the set intervals regardless of whether or not other reports have been sent Must be 0 for UL applications TEST REPORT INTERVAL Enter the test reporting interval in hours 001 999 Enter 000 if no test reporting is desired If a test report is desired enter a test code in fields 81 amp 82 location 7 Set first test report time in field 83 Max 024 for UL POWER UP IN PREVIOUS STATE Enter 1 if upon power up after a prolonged power loss which caused the system s battery to discharge the system will assume the system status prior to the power loss Enter 0 if it is desired that the system will always power up in a disarmed state When the system powers up armed an alarm will occur 3 minutes after arming if a zone is faulted When so armed reports closing as User 0 if open close reporting for installer was enabled in field 39 Note that if the previous state was armed AWAY or STAY the system may not respond to sensor changes for a small period of time 1 3 min which allows sensors such as PIRs to stabilize Must be 1 for UL applications Note that authority levels 0 or 5 cannot be used to disarm the system if control powers up armed 29 30 QUICK ARM partition specific Enter 1 to enable arming of the burglary system in AWAY STAY
183. ed to activate outputs bypass zones etc based ona time schedule There are 20 of these events that may be programmed for the system with each event governed by the previously defined time windows The actions that can be programmed to automatically activate at set times are relay commands arm disarm and zone bypassing commands and open close access conditions To fill out the worksheet 1 2 First enter the schedule number 01 20 and time window number 01 20 and note the day of the week the action is desired Enter the code for the desired action and action specifier The action codes are the events that are to take place when the scheduled time is reached Each action also requires an action specifier which defines what the action will affect relay relay group partition zone list user group The action specifier varies depending on the type of action selected The following is a list of the Action codes desired actions used when programming time driven events Note that these codes are independent of the relay codes programmed during the 93 Menu Mode Relay Programming mode Relay commands Action Code Action Specifier 01 Relay On Relay 02 Relay Off Relay 03 Relay Pulse Relay 04 Relay Pulse XX minutes set in field 1 74 Relay 05 Relay Pulse YY seconds set in field 1 75 Relay 06 Relay Group On Relay Group 07 Relay Group Off Relay Group 08 Relay Group Pulse Relay Group 09 Relay Gro
184. eeps from the keypad The descriptor for each protection zone will appear on the keypad display Motion Detectors Walk in front of any interior motion detectors Listen for three beeps when the detector senses movement While it is activated its descriptor will remain displayed on the keypad Note that wireless PIRs will have a 3 minute lockout between transmissions to conserve battery life remove cover for walk test to override the 3 minute lock out on 5700 series units move jumper inside 5800 series units to Test position put back to Normal position when test is complete Smoke Detectors Follow the test procedure provided by the manufacturer of each smoke detector to ensure that all detectors are operational and are functioning properly NOTE A 2 wire smoke detector display will not clear until the Test mode is exited Turning Off TEST mode Enter the security code and press the 1 OFF key 166 Armed System Test FAL 2 A message will be sent to the central station during the following tests Notify the central station that a test will be in progress A display of COMM FAILURE FC on fixed work keypads indicates a failure to communicate no Kissoff by the receiver at the central station after the maximum number of transmission attempts is tried If this occurs verify that the phone line is connected the correct report format is programmed etc 3 Arm the system and f
185. elephone voice module To activate relays from a keypad enter 4 digit security code 70 To activate relays using a telephone and VIP module first dial the 2 digit phone access code When the system acknowledges the access enter 4 digit security code 70 The following prompts voice responses will begin ENTER DEVICE NO Voice ENTER DEVICE CODE NOW 00 QUIT 01 Enter the 2 digit number of the relay X 10 module to be activated nn DEVICE IS OFF Voice voice descriptor DEVICE nn ON OFF FOR HIT 0 1 voice descriptor ON ENTER 1 FOR voice descriptor OFF ENTER 0 Press 0 or 1 to turn the device off or on respectively nn represents the 2 digit relay X 10 module number and voice descriptor is the relay voice descriptor programmed by the installer see relay descriptor programming section nn DEVICE IS OFF Voice voice descriptor DEVICE nn ON OFF TO EXIT HIT THE KEY ENTER 00 NOW From a keypad press to continue The ENTER DEVICE NO prompt will appear From a telephone keypad enter 00 to exit or enter the next relay number to be programmed The current on off state of that relay will be annunciated as described above Alternatively if 6 seconds elapses with no key depression the voice module will annunciate the ENTER DEVICE CODE NOW message 165 Section 26 TESTING THE SYSTEM This section provides the following informati
186. enesssessossssnessensscosses 155 General Information aea eaae re euren e Ease tu UU osea ean 155 User Codes and Levels of Authority seen 155 To ADD a Master Manager or Operator Code 158 To CHANGE a Master Manager or Operator Code 159 Adding an RF Key to an Existing User eere 160 To DELETE a Master Manager or Operator Code 160 To EXIT the User Edit vane eno o quete 160 KEYPAD FUNCTIONS ee medida 161 General Information i CREARI INASRE 161 Arming PUNCHOMS T 161 Global a M 162 5 M 163 IBEX D DIME EDT 163 Partition GO Command eH i E 163 Viewing Capabilities of a User as ie petet e BOWEN NUMINE 163 VIEWING Zone Descriptors s ui etate oed ee 163 Viewing Downloaded 164 Using the Built in User s 164 Panic Ie VS cho e Er er t mus 164 Speed Key D CM ACOs eae aeuo 164 Manual Relay Activation Mode 70 sse 165 50 166 Using Test Mod n h 166 Armed System esas ti
187. er 1 to enable 1 2 second external alarm sounding ding at the end of exit delay or after kisoff from the central station if sending closing reports Otherwise enter 0 AC LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDING Enter 1 to enable sounding at the keypad rapid beeping when AC power is lost sounding occurs about 2 minutes after actual AC loss Enter 0 if no AC power loss keypad sounding is desired AC LOSS SIREN Enter 1 to enable the external alarm sound after AC power has been out for 4 hours Otherwise enter 0 no alarm Must be 1 for UL RANDOMIZE AC LOSS REPORT Selecting this option helps prevent an overload of AC loss messages at the central station during a community blackout Enter 1 to randomize AC loss reporting between 10 40 min after an actual AC loss Enter 0 for normal AC loss reporting about 2 minutes after actual AC loss VIP MODULE PHONE CODE If a 4285 voice module is being used enter the 2 digit phone code used to access the system Enter 01 09 for first digit and enter 11 for or 12 for for second digit To disable the voice module enter 00 for the 1st digit and enter 11 for the 2nd digit of the code disable code 00 11 PREVENT FIRE TIME OUT Enter 1 to disable no timeout the alarm sounder duration for any zone designated as a fire zone regardless of partition so that fire sounding continues until the system is reset Enter 0 if the nor
188. er report code for zone Input Device Type for zone whether RF polling loop etc Learning serial numbers of 5800 series transmitters amp serial polling loop devices into the system all other zone characteristics must be pre programmed ALPHA PROG For entering alpha descriptors for the following 0 no 1 Zone Descriptors Installer s Message Custom Words Partition Descriptors Relay Descriptors DEVICE PROG For defining the following device characteristics for 0 no 1 yes addressable devices including keypads RF receivers 4281 5881 4204 output relay modules and 4285 VIP Module Device Address Device Type Keypad Options incl partition assignment RF House ID RELAY PROG For defining output relay functions This prompt is 0 no 1 fully explained the 4204 RELAY MODULE section RLY VOICE DESCR For entering voice descriptors for relays Power Line 0 no 1 yes Carrier devices to be used with the 4285 VIP Module This prompt is fully explained in the RELAY OUTPUTS POWER LINE CARRIER DEVICES section CUSTOM INDEX For creating custom word substitutes for VIP Module 0 no 1 yes annunciation This prompt is fully explained in the 4285 VIP MODULE section 108 Press 0 or 1 YES in response to the displayed menu selection Pressing 0 will display the next choice in sequence Refer to the ZONE PROGRAMMING section for instructions on how to program zone characteris
189. erial Number Surface Mount Reed Contact Compact surface mount magnetic reed contact with built in RPM Serial number ID learned by control panel 4191SN Serial Number Recessed Reed Contact Recessed 1 2 dia magnetic reed contact with built in RPM Serial number ID learned by control panel 4939SN Surface Mount Magnatic Reed Contact Surface mount magnetic reed contact with built in RPM 5 ft jacketed cable Serial Number ID learned by control panel 49595 Aluminum Overhead Door Contact Aluminum overhead door contact 24 inch armored cable Serial number ID learned by control Single Technology Glass Break Detector Glass break detector with built in RPM DIP switch programable Dual Technology Glass Break Detector Dual technology glass break detector with built in RPM DIP switch programmable Section 8 WIRELESS RF ZONE EXPANSION This section provides the following information characteristics of wireless zones Wireless systems available Installing the wireless receiver 4281 5881 Installing the 5800 Module e Programming the wireless receiver 4281 5881 Installing the wireless transmitters 5700 5800 series e Programming the wireless transmitters 5700 5800 series e Checkout Procedure for wireless zones test modes Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones e Supervised by control panel for check in signals except
190. erial number into the System Press to continue Input S N L If 1 was entered at the Learn S N prompt this oocL screen will appear The device s serial number can be automatically learned by faulting the device at least twice two consecutive transmissions must be received by the panel The keypad will beep twice after the first transmission and three times after the second If the serial number is printed on the wireless device it may be entered manually rather than learned The loop number you want to use for this zone must also be entered 10 PROG AS RF 2 A summary screen will appear if the serial number A000 5372 2 was successfully learned Press to continue ZN ZT P RC 1 A summary screen for the zone will appear showing 3 1 10 03 1 RF 2 the zone number zone type ZT partition assignment P report code RC and input device type IN L Press to continue The Enter Zone No prompt will appear again 112 Programming Alpha Descriptors General Information 4 If using a 5137AD or 6139 alpha keypad in the system you can program a user friendly English language description location for all protection zones relays keypad panics polling loop short and RF receiver supervision troubles Each description can be composed of a combination of words up to a maximum of 3 that are selected from a vocabulary of 244 words stored in memory and any
191. ernatively if the serial number is printed on the device you may enter it through the keypad see each device s Installation Instructions for the desired Loop input for this zone Then press The next screen will be displayed Press to continue The summary screen will then appear as it did when first entering the zone number to be programmed see summary screen description above Press to display the ENTER ZN NO prompt for programming the next zone After all zones have been programmed enter 00 at this prompt and press The system will prompt Quit Menu Mode Press 1 to quit This will return you to normal data field programming mode Press 99 to exit program mode Enter the Installer Code OFF to cancel the system s settling delay Check Out Procedure for Wireless Zones Go No Go Test Mode Before mounting transmitters permanently conduct Go No Go tests to verify adequate signal strength and reorient or relocate transmitters if necessary During this mode wireless receiver gain is reduced by 50 Testing in this mode assists in determining good mounting locations for the transmitters and verifies that the RF transmission has sufficient signal amplitude margin for the installed system 1 Enter the Installer Code and press 5 TEST For multi partition systems all partitions must be disarmed in order for the RF signal gain to be reduced T
192. ey repeatedly to advance through the available words until the word BACK is displayed To add an s or s if you need to press the 2 key The first depression adds an s the second depression adds an s the third depression displays no character to erase the character the fourth depression adds an s etc 4 Accept the word To accept the word press the 6 key which switches back to alphabet list for the next word or press 8 to store the complete descriptor and exit 5 Select the next word For selection of the next word DOOR repeat step 3a word 057 or 3b but selecting the word DOOR To accept the word press the 6 key which again switches back to alphabet list 6 Store the descriptor When all desired words have been entered press key 8 to store the description in memory 7 To review the zone descriptors key plus zone number 0 01 To edit zone descriptors key plus zone number e g 01 8 Exit zone description mode enter 00 Custom Words Upto 20 installer defined words can be added to the built in vocabulary Each of the 20 words can actually consist of several words but bear in mind that a maximum of 10 characters can be used for each word string 1 Select CUSTOM WORD mode The keys perform the following functions 3 Advances through alphabet in ascending order 1 Advances through alphabet in descending order 6 Selects desired letter moves
193. f Radionics format is to be used with hexadecimal 0 9 B F reporting Enter 1 if SESCOA format is to be used with only numeric reporting 0 9 Note that selection applies to both primary and secondary phone numbers DUAL REPORTING This field allows all reports to be sent to both primary and secondary phone numbers Enter 1 if all reports are to be sent to both primary and secondary phone numbers If used with Split Reporting option 1 1 34 alarms go to both primary amp secondary numbers while all other reports go to secondary only If used with Split Reporting option 2 alarms go to both lines open close and test messages go to secondary only while all other reports go to primary STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT PRIMARY Enter 0 for standard or 1 for expanded reporting for the primary phone number Note Expanded overrides 4 2 format STANDARD EXPANDED REPORT SECONDARY Enter 0 for standard or 1 for expanded reporting for the secondary phone number Note Expanded overrides 4 2 format b4 78 REPORT CODES FOR ZONES 01 64 81 91 95 99 79 80 81 82 Enter the report codes for each zone used in the system Each digit is a two digit entry to allow for hex codes Enter 01 09 A F 10 15 Can also be entered using the 93 Zone Programming mode ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR ZONE TYPES 1 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Enter 1 to enable resto
194. fer Mode cannot be entered while any partition is armed 45 46 5700 Series Transmitter Setup Each 5700 series transmitter has DIP switches to set both the transmitter s zone number Transmitter ID and the system House ID The House ID will be the same for all transmitters and must match the House ID programmed into the system via Device Programming for the wireless receiver This can be likened to a family in which everyone has the same last name House but each person has a different first name Transmitter ID The zone number must then be programmed into the system using 93 Menu Mode Zone Programming Menus 5700 Series Transmitter Supervision Each transmitter except 5701 and 5727 is supervised by a check in signal that is sent to the receiver at 70 90 minute intervals If at least one check in is not received from a transmitter within a certain period of time Programmed in field 1 31 the keypad will display the zone number and CHECK Each transmitter including 5701 and 5727 is also supervised for a low battery condition and will transmit a low battery signal to the receiver when the battery has approximately 30 days of life remaining The keypad will display the transmitter number and LO BAT or 00 and LO BAT for a wireless keypad 5700 Series Transmitter Battery Life Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last about 2 years for 5700 series transmitters depending on the environme
195. fiers are used Install a smoke detector at both ends of a hallway if the hallway is more than 40 feet 12 meters long Install smoke detectors in any room where an alarm control is located or in any room where alarm control connections to an AC source or phone lines are made If detectors are not so located a fire within the room could prevent the control from reporting a fire or an intrusion A o o KITCHEN DINING BDRM LI LIVING ROOM BDRM e e ll Smoke Detectors for Minimum Protection Smoke Detectors for Additional Protection A Heat Activated Detectors KITCHEN A o DINING LIVING ROOM BEDROOM BEDROOM 9 TO BEDROOM BEDROOM LVNG RM E Recommendations For Proper Intrusion Protection For proper intrusion coverage sensors should be located at every possible point of entry to a home or commercial premises This would include any skylights that may be present and the upper windows in a multi level building In addition we recommend that radio backup be used in a security system so that alarm signals can still be sent to the alarm monitoring station in the event that the telephone lines are out of order alarm signals are normally sent over the phone lines if connected to an alarm monitoring station Section 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The VISTA 50P is an 8 Partition alarm control panel that supports up to 86 zones using basic hardwired pol
196. g masking painting or spraying of any material on the mirrors windows or any part of the optical system can re duce their detection ability Passive Infrared Detectors sense changes in temperature however as the ambient tempera ture of the protected area approaches the temperature range of 90 to 105 F 32 to 40 C the detection performance decrease Alarm warning devices such as sirens bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors If warning devices are located on a different level of the residence from the bed rooms then they are less likely to waken or alert people inside the bedrooms Even persons who are awake may not hear the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a stereo radio air conditioner or other appliance or by passing traffic Fi nally alarm warning devices however loud may not warn hearing impaired people Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily out of service Telephone lines are also subject to compromise by sophisticated intruders Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended however occupants may have insufficient time to protect them selves from the emergency situation In the case of a monitored alarm system authorities may not respond appropriately This equipment like other electrical devices is subject to compone
197. g the 80 Scheduling Menu Mode Refer to the Time Driven Event Programming section for procedures Steps To Programming Scheduling Options To use 80 Scheduling Menu Mode do the following Using the worksheets Define time windows up to 20 Define the daily open close schedules one schedule per day per partition Define the holidays to be used by the system up to 16 Define the holiday schedules up to 8 one per partition Define temporary schedules Define limitation of access times up to 8 schedules Define the time driven events up to 20 Using 80 Scheduling Menu Mode Program the time windows Program the open close schedules Program the time driven events Program the access schedules Basic Scheduling Menu Structure To program schedules enter Scheduling program mode Installer Code 80 There are 5 sets of scheduling menus as shown below Entering 1 at a displayed main menu prompt will select that menu set Prompts for programming that scheduling feature will then appear Enter to skip a menu screen and display the next menu option Time Window Upon entering Schedule Menu Mode this prompt will 1Yes O No 0 appear Enter 1 to program time windows Refer to the Programming Time Windows section for detailed procedures Enter 0 to move to the Open Close Schedules prompt O C Schedules Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules 1Yes O No 0 Refer to the Programming Open Close Schedules section fo
198. gative battery terminal on the control board U L Use a 4AH battery or larger for UL installations Earth Ground Considerations In order for the lightning transient protective devices in this product to be effective the designated earth ground terminal terminal 30 must be terminated in a good earth ground Recommended wire gauge for the ground connection is 16 AWG run no further than 30 feet The following are examples of good earth grounds available at most installations Metal Cold Water Pipe Use a non corrosive metal strap copper is recommended firmly secured to the pipe to which the ground lead is electrically connected and secured AC Power Outlet Ground Available from 3 prong 120VAC power outlets only To test the integrity of the ground terminal use a three wire circuit tester with neon lamp indicators such as the UL Listed Ideal Model 61 035 or equivalent available at most electrical supply stores 15 Section 4 THE MECHANICS PROGRAMMING This section provides the following information Using Data Field Program Mode System and communication defaults Entering Data Field Program Mode Moving from one level page of program fields to another Entering and viewing data fields Programming partition specific data fields 93 Menu Mode Programming Using Data Field Program Mode Data Field program mode is the program mode through which many system options are programmed The f
199. gins upon any alarm in an assigned zone in the zone list FAULT Relay action begins upon any opening or short of an assigned zone in the zone list TROUBLE Relay action begins upon any trouble condition on an assigned zone in the zone list NO RESPONSE Relay action is not dependent upon one of the above events ZONE LIST ZL is a group of zones to which the EVENT applies in order to activate a particular device Note that there are a total of 8 zone lists that can be programmed When the selected EVENT Alarm Fault or Trouble occurs in any zone in the selected Start ZONE LIST 1 8 activation of the selected device will START ZONE TYPE SYSTEM OPERATION ZT This option may be used instead of using a ZONE LIST and EVENT to activate the device If a specific ZONE is chosen any zone of that re sponse type going into alarm trouble or fault will cause the device to activate as selected in ACTION If the same ZONE is also chosen for the STOP programming any zone of that type that restores will de activate the device If a System Operation such as DISARMING or ANY FIRE ALARM is to activate the device the appropriate choice would also be entered under the ZONE TYPE option The selected operation will cause the device to activate as selected in ACTION The different choices for ZONE TYPE and SYSTEM OPERATION are listed in Programming Relays amp Powerline Carrier device
200. gram voice descriptors for relays 0 1 63 ENTER RELAY NO 00 QUIT 01 ENTER DESC d1 01 ENTER DESC d2 01 ENTERDESC d3 Enter the 2 digit relay X 10 module number 01 16 01 for the relay desired or enter 00 to quit relay voice descriptor programming mode Press From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list enter the 3 digit index number for the first word of the relay descriptor phrase Press 7 to accept entry From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list enter the 3 digit index number for the second word of the relay descriptor phrase If second word is not desired press 000 Press to accept entry From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list enter the 3 digit index number for the third word of the relay descriptor phrase If third word is not desired press 000 Press to accept entry The ENTER RELAY NO prompt will appear Enter the next relay number to be programmed When all output devices have been programmed enter 00 to quit Enter 99 to exit program mode Enter the Installer Code OFF to cancel the system s settling delay Relay Voice Descriptors and Custom Word Substitutes Vocabulary Word Index Word Index Word Index Word Index Word Index 116 Daughters 208 Garage 023 Off 011 South 155 Alarm
201. gramming iyd eicit die 19 Section 5 INSTALLING THE 8 20 Keypads That May Be Used edes ine che ete 20 Wiring to the Keypads e ie Ho re ERE 20 Using a Supplementary Power Supply eene 21 Mounting the Keypads Ln 22 Addressing the Keypads Preliminary Checkout sss 22 Programming Keypads eer t 23 Section 6 Section 7 Section 8 Section 9 BASIC HARDWIRED ZONES 1 9 eere eee eese eese en entente natn 25 Common Characteristics of Hardwired Zones esses 25 Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Bhes 1 8 25 Wiring 2 Wire Smoke Detectors to Zone 1 26 Compatible 2 Wire Smoke Detectors either eer 27 Unsupervised Usage of Zone 1 i d 27 Wiring 4 Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1 8 sess 27 Compatible 4 Wire Smoke Detetors 28 Configuring Zone 7 for Alternate Keyswitch Function 29 Wiring 2 Wire Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8 2 2 2 29 Compatible Glassbreak Detectors eren ertet nente tenute 30 Zone 9 Applications esos 30 Pr
202. gramming mode Installer Code 800 Program the following data fields 1 46 AUXILIARY OUTPUT ENABLE Set for 2 15 KEYSWITCH ASSIGNMENT Enter the partition whose keypad sounds are to be dupliocated at the remote sounder 3 Press 99 to exit program mode The system automatically assigns Zone Type 10 to Zone 7 whether or not a keyswitch is actually used Therefore Zone 7 is no longer available as a protection zone but is assigned as a keyswitch zone xK 1 If you need more information about actual programming procedures see Section 4 THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING 2 You cannot use Output 1 for a Remote Keypad Sounder if using it for an Open Close trigger Ground Start module or AAV module Keyswitch Setup If using an optional Remote Keyswitch for remote arming and disarming of the System its switch must be connected to Zone 7 and its Ready and Armed status LEDs must be connected to the trigger outputs and programmed in order to become operational xh Note that a keyswitch may be used in one partition only Keyswitch Operation The keyswitch must be connected to Zone 7 which is then no longer available as a protection zone A momentary short across this zone will arm the partition in the AWAY mode If the short is held for more than 3 seconds the partition will arm in the STAY mode After the partition has been armed the next time Zone 7 is shorted the partition will disarm Keyswitch Conn
203. h panic duress for which reporting is desired ENTRY WARNING partition specific Enter 0 for 3 short beeps or 1 for slow beeps that continue for the entire entry delay period BURG ALARM COMM DELAY partition specific Enter 0 for no delay on burglary alarm communication Enter 1 for 16 second delay no delay on 24 hour reports RESTORE REPORT TIMING Enter 0 for instant restore report as zone restores Enter 1 for reporting after bell timeout if zone restored Enter 2 for restore report when system is subsequently disarmed SECONDARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT partition specific Enter 00 09 B F 11 15 Enter the 3 or 4 digit number depending on report format for the secondary subscriber account 00 09 B F 11 15 Each number requires a 2 digit entry so as to allow entry of hexadecimal digits B F If a 3 digit number is to be used only enter data in the first 6 locations leaving the last two unfilled Default 15 15 15 15 Erase the field by entering 907 NOTE This field must be programmed if a secondary phone number is used field 34 This account number can be the same as the primary account number RESPONSE TYPES FOR ZONES 28 91 These fields are programmed via 93 Menu Mode Zone Programming LOBBY PARTITION Enter the common lobby partition 1 8 Enter 0 if none AFFECTS LOBBY partition
204. h the Device Adaress 4 Atthe DEVICE ADD prompt press 00 to exit Menu Mode programming and return to Data Field programming Press 99 to exit programming mode or proceed to the next section If using a 5800 TM module it must be programmed for Device Address 28 29 or 30 depending on which jumper s is cut as either Device Type 1 or 2 For UL Household Fire Burglary applications use of 1 or 2 RF RCVRs requires enabling their respective faults 88 91 as applicable type 5 House ID Sniffer Mode This mode applies only to 5700 series systems or if you are using a wireless keypad 5827 5827 BD in a 5800 series system 5700 series receivers respond only to transmitters set to the same House ID 01 31 that is programmed into the control panel This prevents system interference from transmitters in other nearby systems Use the House ID Sniffer Mode to make sure you do not choose a House ID that is in use in a nearby system To enter this mode proceed as follows 1 Enter your Installer Code 2 2 The receiver will now sniff out any House IDs in the area and display them Keep the receiver in this mode for about 2 hours to give a good indication of the House IDs being used Use a House ID that is not displayed 3 To exit the Sniffer Mode simply enter your Installer Code OFF Since Sniffer Mode effectively disables wireless point reception Snif
205. ha keypad only 7 Program Partition Specific fields see Section 17 DATA FIELD DESCRIPTIONS o cim 6 Common Lobby Logic When an installation consists of a partition shared by users of other partitions ina building that shared partition may be assigned as the common lobby partition for the system program field 1 17 An example of this might be in a medical building where there are two doctor s offices and a common entrance area see example that follows explanation This option employs logic for automatic arming and disarming of the common lobby Two programming fields affect the way the common lobby will react relative to the status of other partitions They are 1 18 Affects Lobby and 1 19 Arms Lobby 1 18 Affects Lobby must be programmed by partition Setting this option to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows a When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed the lobby will also be disarmed b The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed c Arming the last partition that affects the lobby will not automatically attempt to arm the lobby 1 19 Arms Lobby must be programmed by partition Setting this option to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows a When the first partition that affects the lob
206. he 8 key This will return you to the CUSTOM WORD display The custom word or string of words will be automatically added to the built in vocabulary at the end of the group of words beginning with the same letter Custom words are retrieved as word numbers 250 to 269 for words 1 to 20 respectively when using method 3a to enter alpha descriptors When using method 3b to enter alpha descriptors each word will be found at the end of the group of words that begin with the same letter as it does Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create up to 19 additional custom words or word strings Exit Custom Word Mode by entering 00 at the custom word prompt Partition Descriptors 1 Select Part DESCRIPT mode The system will ask for the partition number desired Enter the number as a single key entry 1 8 Follow the same procedure as for CUSTOM WORDS except that partition descriptors are limited to four 4 characters ex WHSE for warehouse Relay Descriptors The descriptor for each relay is limited to a maximum of ten 10 characters The keys perform the same functions as in the CUSTOM WORD entry 1 Select RELAY DESCRIPT mode The system will ask for the relay number desired Enter the number as a double key entry 01 16 A cursor will now appear at the beginning of the second line Type the word using the following method Use the 3 key to advance through the list of symbols numbers and letters Use the 1 key to move
207. he alpha keypad will display Burg Walk Test Reduced RF Sens 2 Once transmitters are placed in their desired locations and the approximate length of wire to be run to sensors is connected to the transmitter s screw terminals fault each transmitter Do not conduct this test with your hand wrapped around the transmitter as this will cause inaccurate results If a single receiver is used the keypad will beep three times to indicate signal reception If two receivers are used the keypad will beep once if the first receiver received the signal twice if the second receiver received the signal and three times if both receivers heard the signal which is desirable for redundant configurations If the keypad does not beep reorient or move the transmitter to another location Usually a few inches in either direction is all that is required 3 Mount the transmitter according to the instructions provided with the transmitter 4 Exit the mode by entering Installer Code 1 OFF Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode When all transmitters have been installed use the Transmitter Sniffer Mode to test that they have all been properly programmed 1 Enter Installer Code 3 The keypad will display all zone numbers of wireless units programmed into the system 2 Fault each wireless zone causing each device to transmit As the system receives a signal from each of the transmitters the zone number of that transmitter will disappear fr
208. he instructions below DEVICE PROG Press 1 to enter DEVICE PROGRAMMING mode 1 0 no DEVICE ADDRESS Enter the 2 digit device address number as set by 01 31 the receiver s DIP switches 01 07 Press to continue DEVICE Enter device type 03 RF Expander Press to continue RF EXPANDER Enter the 2 digit house ID 00 31 as determined by HOUSE ID sniffer mode use an ID not displayed during sniffer mode as explained later in this section Applies only to 5700 series systems or if using a wireless keypad 5827 5827BD with 5800 series systems Press to continue The system will now prompt for the next device address to be programmed 22 The system House ID and the Device Address of the receiver are two different things The House ID allows the system to identify transmitters with a matching House ID If using 5700 series wireless systems the DIP switches on the transmitters must match the system House ID programmed into the control If using 5827BD wireless keypad the House ID also applies Other 5800 series devices do not communicate by House ID but by transmitting a unique serial number to the control In this case programming a House ID would not be necessary The Device Address allows the system to identify the receiver as opposed to other devices connected to its keypad terminals Therefore the DIP switches on the RF Receiver must matc
209. he user number is already assigned and will prompt if this is a new user Press 0 NO The system will then confirm that the change is allowed based on authorization level 159 160 Adding RF Key An Existing User add an key to an existing user or to change a user s global arm option first delete that user s code then re add the user code as described in the Add A User paragraph To Delete a Master Manager or Operator code Enter your code 8 User number 02 75 your code again Installer Master or Manager code but must be code with higher level of authority than the code being deleted i e Master code can delete a Manager or Operator level code but cannot delete another Master code a Manager code can delete an Operator level code but cannot delete a Master or another Manager code OK TO DELETE 03 The system will prompt to confirm that you want to delete 0 1 YES this user Press 0 NO or 1 YES If yes that user s code will be removed from all partitions to which it had been assigned and all authorization levels and other information about that user will be deleted Note that a user can only be deleted by a user with a higher authority level A user cannot delete himself 22 A user code can only be deleted from the partition through which it was entered If trying to delete from another partition the message User XX Not Deleted will be displayed
210. hird pages of data fields are indicated at the keypad by a 1 or 2 respectively in front of the 2 digit field address The words ALT PROGRAM along with a 100 or 200 depending on which page of program fields is accessed to indicate the higher page of fields 1 To access the next level of fields press 94 2 Then press XX where XX the last two digits of the program field and make the desired entry 3 To return to the previous page of fields press 99 press 94 to move to 2nd page press 99 to move back to 1st page 1 01 1 76 press 94 to move to 3rd page press 99 to move back to 2nd page 2 00 2 21 Viewing Data Fields To view the contents of a data field press plus the 2 digit field address The field s entries will be displayed but no changes can be made Entry Errors If an address is improperly entered the keypad will display FC f a program entry is improperly entered for example a larger number than that which is permitted the keypad display will go blank In either of the above cases simply re enter the correct field number SUMMARY OF DATA FIELD PROGRAMMING COMMANDS Next page of fields Previous page of fields or exit programming mode with no installer lockout Select partition for programming partition specific fields Exit programming mode with installer lock out 47 18 Programming System Wide Data Fields Values for some programming fields are system w
211. hone tip and ring inputs now have overvoltage protection in accordance with UL1459 as specified in UL985 UL1023 On board PTC circuit breakers were added to these inputs to protect against overvoltage BELL SUPERVISION The panel now supports supervision of the bell wiring as specified in UL985 The panel will annunciate bell supervision status on system zone 98 Bell supervision is normally disabled factory default response type for zone 98 is 00 no response and must be enabled for household fire or combination household fire burg installations by assigning response type 05 to zone 98 which will provide a trouble indication regardless of whether the panel is armed or disarmed When supervision is enabled the panel monitors the bell wiring for open and short circuit faults while the bell is inactive The panel will provide a trouble indication when there is an open circuit in the bell wiring that disconnects all indicating devices from the panel or when there is a short circuit between the Bell and Bell terminal wiring or between the Bell terminal wiring and earth ground provided that the panel s earth ground Terminal 30 is connected to a proper earth ground When the supervision feature is used only polarized fire indicating devices may be wired to the panel s bell output Non polarized burglary indicating devices may be used only when wired to the panel s bell output using a polarizing diode two 2A diodes supplied as shown in Diagram
212. iday schedule This schedule takes effect as soon as it is programmed and remains active for up to one week Partition Windows Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 1 Disarmwindow E StartTime Hamm StopTime hemm amWindow 7 StopTime hemm 2 DisamWindw StartTime HM StopTime hemm amWindow SatTme mamm StopTime hemm 3 DisarmWindow StartTime HHMM StopTime hemm amWindow StatTime mamm StopTime hemm 4 DisamWindow StartTime HHMM StopTime hemm amWindow 7 StopTime hemm s DisamWindw StartTime HHMM StopTime hemm J amWindow J StopTime hemm epo J T 6 DisarmWwindow StartTime HM StopTime hamm amWindow 7 stattime mamm StopTime hemm
213. iday schedules It consists of one opening window and one closing window for each day of the week The schedule automatically takes effect for up to one week after which it is deactivated This schedule is programmed using the 81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode Refer to that section for procedures Daily schedule Holiday schedule Temporary schedule Additional Schedules Additional opening and closing schedules can be programmed using the time driven event programming options For example a schedule for normal store opening closing can be programmed with open close schedules and another open close schedule for beginning and ending lunch hour can be programmed using the time driven event schedule programming Refer to the Time Driven Events paragraph later in this section for detailed information The system can help reduce communication traffic to the central station by using the exception reporting feature set in partition specific program field 2 09 The Open Close by exception option suppresses these reports from being sent to central station if an arm or disarm is done within the expected time window Reports are only sent if the open close occurs outside the assigned time window The system keeps a record of all openings closings in its event log n the event an opening occurs immediately following a closing during the closing window a person who arms the system forgets something and has to reenter the
214. ide global and some can be different for each partition partition specific Note that the partition specific programming fields are automatically skipped when programming the global fields If the system has only 1 partition the partition specific fields will not be automatically skipped To program system wide data fields do the following 1 2 Enter Program Mode Installer code 800 When the program screen is displayed press 00 to begin programming the Installer Code data field When you have completed the entry the keypad sounds three beeps and automatically displays the next program field in sequential order To program specific data fields out of sequence press plus the 2 digit field address of the field number you want to program then make the required entry If the number of digits that you enter in a data field is less than the maximum permitted ex phone number the keypad displays the last entry and waits To proceed enter the next data field you wish to program ex press 05 Partition Specific programming fields are skipped To change to the next page of fields press 94 To return to the previous page of fields press 99 Programming Partition Specific Data Fields To program partition specific data fields once in program mode do the following 1 2 3 Press 91 which will prompt you for the partition number desired Enter a partition specific field number ex
215. ield numbers on the program form show the number of entries required for each field When an entry is completed the keypad beeps three times and advanced to the next field At this point you can either make the required entry in the new field or press the next field number you want to program There are several question and answer modes which we call Menu modes that can be accessed once Data Field program mode has been entered These modes prompt the user for information and for this reason a 2 line alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 is required System and Communication Defaults The system is shipped with a set of pre programmed default values that are designed to meet the needs of many installations These can be changed by the installer to suit specific needs if desired There are four sets of pre programmed communication defaults available including Low Speed 4 2 Express Ademco High Speed and Ademco Contact ID Loading one of these defaults automatically programs industry standard codes that will suit most of your needs These defaults can be changed directly from the alpha keypad 5137AD or 6139 or they can be changed by using V LINK downloading software be sure that the software version used includes a VISTA 50 with scheduling menu selection Downloading can be performed either remotely from an IBM compatible computer using an approved modem or at the job site direct wire download using the 4100SM Serial Module
216. ields 17 AC POWER LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDING 1 yes 0 no 18 AC POWER LOSS EXTERNAL ALARM 1 yes 0 19 AC RANDOMIZE 1 randomize 0 no 28 POWER UP IN PREVIOUS STATE 1 yes 0 no 3 Exit program mode by entering 99 If you need more information about actual programming procedures see Section 4 THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING x Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheet DEVICE CURRENT UNITS TOTAL CURRENT 4194 Contact 4191SN 4193SN 4939SN 4959SN 449260 Photo Smoke L 8192507 Smoke wheal 81920 Ton Smoke Ham 8275 Dual PR 4278 4278 Quad PIR PIR 1mA ae 2 Zone RPM 1 mA LOW 2mA HIGH 8208 6 Zone RPM i tO Ifthe total current draw exceeds 64 mA 4197 Loop Extender module must be used Auxiliary Device Current Draw Worksheet DEVICE CURRENT UNITS TOTAL CURRENT STANDBY ALARM 5137 Keypad 6 5 Ground Stan Module 50m amp LLL Bui Poling Loop paar AF Reever 4204 Relay Module 15mA standby active relay If using hard wire devices such as PIRs refer to the specifications for that particular unit s current draw Alarm Output Current Draw Worksheet DEVICE CURRENT UNITS TOTAL ALARM CURRENT Combined Auxiliary Power Alarm Output and Polling Loop Total Current Aem AwiayPowr o o
217. ies Transmitters essere 48 5800 Series Transmitter Setup 3 repite cto e REOR EUR GE Rea ps exe 49 Compatible 5800 Series 50 Programming Wireless Transmitters essere 92 Checkout Procedure for Wireless Zones esee 55 RELAY OUTPUTS amp POWERLINE CARRIER DEVICES 56 ADE VICE TB ASICS nmen 56 Wiring the 4204 Relay 0 0 0 56 Wiring 4300 Transformer 97 Programming the 4204 Relay Module serene 58 Output Programming Options 58 Programming Output Devices can 60 Zone List Programming SERE 63 Relay Voice Descriptors gt eed usa nl teen loved 63 Section 10 Section 11 Section 12 Section 13 Section 14 Section 15 Section 16 4285 VISTA INTERACTIVE PHONE VIP MODULE 65 General Information eic iter n RR 65 Mounting the 4285 VIP Module E EO OX ERE NEC 65 Wiring the 4285 VIP MOGdUle 66 Programming 4285 VIP Module 67 Custom Word Substitutes for VIP Module Annunciation 68 AUDIO ALARM VERIF
218. if preferred You can bring wires out from the side or back a round breakout is also available on the back 3 the 4285 connections label supplied separately to the inside of the VIP Module s cover if the cover is used Otherwise affix the label to the inside of the control cabinet s door Wiring the 4285 VIP Module The 4285 is wired between the control panel and the premises handset s It listens for touch tones on the phone line and reports them to the control panel During on premises phone access it powers the premises phones during off premises phone access it seizes the line from the premises phones and any answering machines Wire as follows 1 Make 12V and and data in and data out connections from the VIP Module to the control using the connector cable supplied with the VIP Module see below RED BLACK GREEN DATA IN YELLOW DATA OUT These are the same connections as for remote keypads 2 Insert the keyed connector at the other end into the mating header on the VIP Module 3 Connect terminals 1 through 5 on the VIP Module as shown in Figure 18 connections exactly as shown If the leads on the direct connect cord are too short to reach their assigned terminals splice additional wires to them as required You must use an RJ31X jack with a direct connect cord and make all Terminal Block Connections Earth ground terminal 30 on control 6 Audio Out 1
219. ific 1 47 CHIME ON EXTERNAL SIREN partition specific 3 Press 99 to exit program mode Then enter the Installer Code OFF to cancel the system s settling delay If you need more information about actual programming procedures see Section 4 THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING 22 80 Compatible Sounders UL Use only UL Listed sounding devices for UL installations Outdoor Siren not UL Listed Self contained siren driver built in and weatherproof for outdoor use Can be wired for either a steady or yelp sound and is rated at 120 dB 10 feet This siren can also be tamper protected or can be mounted in a metal cabinet 716 which can be tamper protected Compact Outdoor Siren not UL Listed Compact self contained siren driver built in and weatherproof for outdoor use Can be wired for either a steady or yelp sound and is rated at 90 dB 10 feet A 708BE cabinet is available which can be tamper protected if necessary High Intensity Sounder Compact high intensity sounder rated at 123 dB 10 feet This sounder emits an ear piercing high frequency sound This sounder can be mounted indoors bracket included or outdoors in 708BE cabinet Indoor Siren Attractive self contained indoor siren driver built in provides steady or warble tones and is rated at 95dB 9 10 feet ABB1031 Motor Bell amp Box AMSECO motor bell amp box rated at 81 dB
220. ignments for zones keypad panics non alarm and supervisory conditions and can be loaded at any time without affecting non communication program fields You may load communications defaults at any time However it is recommended that the panel be defaulted first 97 only if no other programming has been done If other programming has already been done there is no need to default the panel To load communication defaults do the following Enter program mode Installer Code 8 0 0 Once the Programming mode is entered first press 94 and then enter one of the following field numbers TABLE OF DEFAULT PROGRAMMING COMMANDS IPRESS TO LOAD THIS DEFAULT PROGRAM SET Low Speed communication defaults Ademco 4 2 Express communication defaults Ademco High Speed communication defaults 83 Contact ID communication defaults TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES 0 Alarm S0 Trouble global 81 LossofSupervision RF 83 RPM SensrTampe me Go N 92 m L Go O2 S 95599 So UW N 309 O2 Gay Gof Go JI SO A o o r5 92 Go oo A Go 144 Code 2 O2 A Gop J RI Ne RR NI Rd ONY OV ON O2
221. ily if necessary With all hard wired and polling loop zones intact the Alpha keypads connected to the system should display DISARMED READY TO ARM If the keypad s begins beeping and the word CHECk is displayed along with a zone or zone numbers the system either does not see the displayed zone s or the tamper switches on 4190WH units are tripped Please check your DIP switch settings for the zone s your connections and or that the covers for the 4190WH units are in place Once the situation has been corrected enter the Security Code OFF sequence twice to clear the trouble If the following is displayed DISARMED Press to show faults press the key to display the faulted zone s Restore any faulted zone s as necessary When the DISARMED READY TO ARM message is displayed you can proceed to the next step Fault and then restore every contact or sensor on each zone individually to ensure that it is being monitored by the system Each time a zone is faulted the keypads in the partition to which the zone is assigned should display the number of the faulted zone When each zone is restored the READY TO ARM message should appear again If a zone or zones are not displayed at the correct partition s keypad s check both keypad and zone programming to verify the correct partition assignment 5 When you get the proper displays on the keypad s the polling loop zones in the system are functio
222. indow number from 01 20 for which 00 00 00 00 00 this access schedule applies for the displayed day As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window will be displayed Press to continue MON A1 Window 2 Enter the second time window number from 01 20 for 00 00 00 00 00 which this access schedule applies for the displayed day As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window will be displayed Press to continue TUE A1 Window 1 Repeat the procedure for the other days of the week 00 00 00 00 00 When the last day of the week has been programmed the holiday opening and closing windows may be entered 136 Hol 1 Window 1 Enter the first time window number for holidays for which 00 00 00 00 00 this access schedule applies As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window will be displayed Press to continue Hol A1 Window 2 Enter the second time window number for holidays for 00 00 00 00 00 which this access schedule applies As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window will be displayed Press to continue When all access control schedules have been programmed enter 00 at the Access Sched prompt to quit this set of menus 81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode Each partition can be assigned a Temporary Schedule which will override the regular open close schedule and the hol
223. ion and in the Programming Form b PARTITION No P The device s Stop Zone Type System Operation may be limited to an occurrence on either one partition 1 8 or any partition 0 Programming Output Devices 1 From data field programming mode press 93 to display the ZONE PROG prompt Press 0 NO to each menu option until the RELAY PROG prompt appears Press 1 YES While in this mode press to advance to next screen Press to backup to the previous screen Enter Relay No Enter the relay output device identification number 00 Quit 01 01 16 This is a reference number only used for identification purposes The actual module address and relay number on the module is programmed in the last two prompts Press to continue 01 A EV ZL ZT P The keypad will display a summary START screen SITOO 0 00 Press to continue 01 A EV ZL ZT P The keypad will display a summary STOP screen STOPO 0 0 00 Press to continue 01 Relay Action The Relay Action is the way in which the relay will No Response respond when activated by the start event Enter the desired action for this relay as follows O not used 1 closed for 2 secs 2 stay closed 3 pulse on off 01 Start Event Not used 01 Start Zn LIST No list 01 Start Zn Typ A relay may be activated either by an Event used in conjunction with a Zone List or by a Zone Type System Operation If using an Event Zone L
224. irs of PANIC key pairs 1 4 3 Make sure the user understands the importance of testing the system at least weekly following the procedure provided in the User s Manual Regular maintenance and inspection at least annually by the installer and frequent testing by the user are vital to continuous satisfactory operation of any alarm system The installer should assume the responsibility of developing and offering a regular maintenance program to the user as well as acquainting the user with the proper operation and limitations of the alarm system and its component parts Recommendations must be included for a specific program of frequent testing at least weekly to insure the system s proper operation at all times 167 168 Trouble Conditions The word on the keypad s display accompanied by a rapid beeping at the keypad indicates that there is a trouble condition in the system The audible warning sound can be silenced by pressing any key Instruct users to call for service immediately upon seeing any of the following messages Check Messages CHECK accompanied by a display of one or more zone descriptor s Indicates that a problem exists with those zone s Zone trouble may be caused by one of the following conditions hardwired fire zone is open broken wire A Day Night zone Zone Type 5 is faulted A polling loop zone is not seen by the control
225. isabled 00 Refer to the ZONE TYPE DEFINITIONS section for definitions of each zone type Zone Types are as follows 00 Assign For Unused Zo 01 Entry Exit 1 Burglary 02 Entry Exit 2 Burglary 03 Perimeter Burglary 04 Interior Follower Burgl 05 Trouble By Day Alarm 06 24 Hour Silent Alarm 07 24 Hour Audible Alarm 10 Partition 10 Report Code 10 Input Type RF Trans Each zone in a system must be assigned a zone type which defines the way in which the system responds to faults in that zone Enter the zone response type for each zone The screen will automatically display the zone type for the number entered Press to accept entry If a different zone response type is desired enter a different number and press nes 08 24 Hour Auxiliary 09 Fire 10 Interior Delay Burglary 20 Arm Stay 5800 RF only ary 21 Arm Away 5800 RF only By Night 22 Disarm 5800 RF only 23 No Alarm Response Used for Relay Activation Enter the partition number 1 8 you are assigning this zone to Press to continue Enter the report code for this zone Enter the first digit and press kar Enter the second digit and press again A summary of both digits will be displayed Press to continue Enter the Input Device Type as follows 0 not used 3 RF supervised RF transmitter 4 UR unsupervised RF transmitter 5 BR button type RF t
226. ist combination enter the event code as follows 0 used 1 alarm 2 fault 3 trouble 4 restore If not using a Zone List to activate the relay enter 0 Press to continue A Zone List is a set of zones that can be used to initiate the start or stop relay action If a zone list is being used to start this relay action enter the Zone List number 1 8 If a zone list is not being used enter 0 Press to continue A Zone Type System Operation can be used instead of an Event Zone List combination to start the relay action If a Zone Type System Operation is being used enter the 2 digit code as listed below Press to continue Choices For Start Stop Zone Types 00 No Response Not Used 01 Entry Exit 1 02 Entry exit 2 03 Perimeter 04 Interior Follower 05 Trouble Day Alarm Night 06 24 Hr Silent 07 24 Hr Audible 08 24 Hr Aux 09 Fire Alarm or Trouble 10 Interior w Delay 23 No alarm response for output relay activation such as for access control purposes Choices For Start Stop System Operation 20 Arming Stay 21 Arming Away 22 Disarming Code Off 31 End of Exit Time 32 Start of Entry Time 33 Any Burglary Alarm 34 Code 71 Key Entry 35 Code 72 Key En 36 At Bell Timeout 37 2 Times Bell Timeout 38 Chime 39 Fire Alarm 40 Bypassing 41 AC Power Fail 42 System Battery Low 4
227. it is an 8 zone expander On some devices this is determined by the setting of DIP switches Other devices have a built in unique serial number which must be learned into the control as the zone number desired Set up the polling loop as follows 1 Run wires to each device on the polling loop using the guidelines in the following table for maximum wire runs per wire gauge Twisted pair wire is recommended for all wire runs Maximum Polling Loop Wire Runs 18 gauge 1500 feet 16 gauge 2400 feet Maximum total wire runs combined must not exceed 4000 ft regardless of wire gauge 2000 ft if shielded wire is used 33 When running polling loop wires they must be at least 6 away from A C voltage 22 telephone or intercom wiring Since the polling loop is carrying data between the control panel and the devices interference on this loop can cause an interruption of this communication The polling loop can also cause outgoing interference on the intercom or phone lines If this spacing cannot be achieved shielded wire must be used Note that the maximum total wire length supported is cut in half when shielded wire is used 2 Wire each device to the polling loop making sure to use correct polarity when making connections refer to the device s instructions 3 Note the polling loop devices that have DIP switches on them Set each device s DIP switches for the zone number you are assigning it Refer to the devi
228. ity system it does not offer guaranteed protection against burglary fire or other emergency Any alarm system whether commercial or residential is subject to compromise or failure to warn for a vari ety of reasons For example Intruders may gain access through unprotected openings or have the technical sophistication to bypass an alarm sensor or disconnect an alarm warning device Intrusion detectors e g passive infrared detectors smoke detectors and many other sensing devices will not work with out power Battery operated devices will not work without batteries with dead batteries or if the batteries are not put in properly Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off for any reason however briefly Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm receiver Even if the signal path has been recently checked during a weekly test blockage can occur if a metal object is moved into the path A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough While smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths in the United States they may not activate or provide early warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35 of all fires according to data published by the Federal Emergency Management Agency Some of the reasons smoke detectors used in conjunction with this System may not work are as follows Smoke detectors m
229. keypad is assigned a default partition for display purposes and will show only that partition s information To see information for another partition or perform system functions in another partition use the GOTO command code partition number 0 8 The keypad will remain in the new partition until directed to go to another partition or until 120 seconds has elapsed with no keypad activity To return to your home partition enter partition number 0 2h You must program data field 2 18 to enable the GOTO function This is a partition specific field that must be set for each partition the user wants to access from another partition s keypad Viewing Capabilities Of A User The keypad will display the partitions that a user is authorized for the user number and the authority level for all partitions authorized Enter code The user s capabilities in each authorized partition will typically be displayed as follows 1 AO WHSE The user s Open Close report capability is shown by the User 01 Auth 1G dot following the authority level If Open Close is not enabled for a user the dot will not appear Viewing Zone Descriptors The Alpha Keypads can display all programmed descriptors which is useful to the installer when checking entries and can be helpful to the user when there is a need to identify zones To display descriptors the system must be disarmed and ready to arm Pres
230. keypad terminals 6 7 8 and 9 Plug the connector at the other end of the harness into the receiver see Figure 15 3 Refer to the installation instructions provided with the receiver for further installation procedures regarding antenna mounting etc pe L ANTENNAS INSERT IN RIGHT HAND TERMINALS Mt TO CONTROL S REMOTE KEYPAD CONNECTION BLACK POINTS EACH RECEIVER d GREEN MUST BE ON INDIVIDUAL HOME RUN WIRING ae or OPENING HOLES ING INTERFERENCE DIP SWITCH KNOCKOUT INDICATOR AREA FOR SURFACE WIRING ON gt OFF Ms 4 NOTE DIPSWITCH POSITION 5 PRESENT ONLY ON 5881EH BLI s SWITCH POSITION ON SETS 5881EH FOR USE IN COMMERCIAL FIRE 5 PRESENT ON APPLICATIONS SEE THE RECEIVER S INSTRUCTIONS 2 5881EH ONLY OFF USE IN NON COMMERCIAL FIRE INSTALLATIONS EL Figure 15 5881 Wireless Receiver cover removed 4 Set the receiver s DIP switches for an address 01 07 which is not being used by another device i e keypads relay modules etc must be enabled in the system s Device Programming mode described later in 2 Take note of the address you select for the wireless receiver as this address this section 43 44 Installing the 5800 Module Installation of this module is necessary only if you are using one or more 5827BD Wireless Bi directional keypads The 5800TM must be located between one and two feet from the 4281 or 5881 receiver s
231. l Output Not Applicable PCB Current 250mA 330mA Total Current Table 3 Battery Calculation Table Capacity Formula Calculated Value Standby For 4 hour standby time use following formula Capacity Total standby load x 4 hours x 1 4 loading contingency factor For 24 hour standby time use following formula Total standby load x 24 hours x 1 1 contingency factor Alarm Total alarm load x 0 06 hours for 4 minute alarm Capacity 0 25 hours for 15 minute alarm Total Add standby and alarm capacities Capacity Table 4 Battery Selection Table Capacity Recommended Battery Comments 4AH Yuasa NP4 12 7AH Yuasa NP7 12 12AH Yuasa NP12 12 Fits in large mercantile cabinet only 14AH Yuasa NP7 12 Connect two in parallel 17 2AH Yuasa NPG18 12 Fits in large mercantile cabinet only ADEMCO 165 Eileen Way Syosset NY 11971 Copyright 1998 PITTWAY Corporation K3500 7 98 TABLE OF CONTENTS HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 100 0 Vii CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS viii RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PROPER PROTECTION ix Section 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ve ecoeeiree oe etos pe eto eterne 01 Section 2 PLANNING A PARTITIONED SYSTEM 0 05 Theory of Partt OBI De E er tos uiu id ies 05 Setting Up a Par
232. le to look at and change any and all information in the database CONTROL COMM ACCESS Read Only able only to Upload and arm the system Not able to DISARM BYPASS or change any information Part Read Write able to ARM BYPASS UPLOAD DOWNLOAD but cannot shutdown the system Full Read Write able to perform all control and status commands as well as shutdown all or part of the system NOTES 1 Each time the Control panel is accessed successfully a PROGRAM TAMPER report 81 is sent to central station if programmed 2 When downloading the keypad displays MODEM COMM 3 Whenever a download or a save is done an automatic time stamp is done indicating the date and time of the last download or save and the operator ID number 4 The average time for a complete download including initial call up hang up and call back is under 4 minutes 5 A complete hard copy of each individual account can be obtained by connecting a printer to the computer Refer to your computer owner s manual or contact your dealer for printer recommendations Connecting 41005 Module for Direct Wire Downloading The Control can be downloaded without using a modem or telephone line by using VLink Software and a 4100SM Serial Module The direct wire downloading connection is to be temporary and is not part of the permanent installation Direct wire downloading is meant as a tool for the installer during the installation process 22 Th
233. ling loop and wireless zones addition the control offers relay control and scheduling capabilities for automating system functions The major system features are outlined below Basic Hardwired Zones Provides 9 basic hardwire zones with the following characteristics EOLR supervision optional for zones 2 8 supporting or N C sensors Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions Upto 16 2 wire smoke detectors on zone 1 4 wire smoke or heat detectors on zones 1 8 power to 4 wire smokes must be supervised for UL installations Upto 50 2 wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8 Optional Expansion Zones Polling Loop Expansion Supports up to 77 additional hardwire zones using a built in polling multiplex loop interface Current draw can total up to 64mA Polling loop zones have the following characteristics Must use RPM Remote Point Module devices Supervised by control panel Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions Wireless Expansion Supports up to 63 wireless zones using 4281 type RF Receiver or 86 wireless zones using 5881 type RF Receiver less if using hardwire and or polling loop zones Wireless zones have the following characteristics Supervised by control panel for check in signals except certain non supervised transmitters Supervised for low battery condition Tamper protection for 5800 series supervised transmitters Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions
234. ll be used to produce an open close trigger produced only if all partitions are armed Enter 2 if the auxiliary output will be used to produce keypad like sounding at an auxiliary sounder ex 706 12 This option applies only to the partition set in field 15 NOTE Only one of the above options can be active within a system Enter 3 if AAV module is being used CHIME ON EXTERNAL SIREN partition specific Enter 1 for chime annunciation using the external alarm sounder If not desired enter 0 WIRELESS KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT Enter the partition in which RF keypad is used 1 8 Enter 0 if no RF keypad is used SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION SOUND Enter 1 to disable trouble sounding for transmitter check in failure Enter 0 if audible trouble sounding is desired Must be 0 for UL SEND CANCEL IF ALARM OFF partition specific Enter 1 if cancel reports to be sent when the system is disarmed after an alarm regardless of how much time has gone by Enter 0 if cancel reports are to be sent within Bell Timeout period only DISABLE DOWNLOAD CALLBACK Enter 1 to disable the callback requirement for downloading Enter 0 to require a callback Must be 0 for UL installations 1 57 1 58 1 60 1 70 1 71 1 72 1 73 1 74 1 75 1 76 ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON GLOBAL ARM Enter 1 to have the system arm disarm in accordance with the button s user s gl
235. load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 AVIS L tiquette du minist re des Communications du Canada identifie le mat riel homologu Cette tiquette certifie que le mat riel est conforme a certaines normes de protection d exploitation et de s curit des r seaux de t l communications Le minist re n assure toutefois pas que le mat riel fonctionnera a la satisfaction de l utilisateur Avant d installer ce mat riel l utilisateur doit s assurer qu il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l entreprise locale de t l communications Le mat riel doit galement tre install en suivant une m thode accept e de raccordement Dans certains cas les fils int rieurs de l entreprise utilis s pour un service individuel a la ligne unique peuvent tre prolong s au moyen d un dispositif homologu de raccordement cordon prolongateur t l phonique interne L abonn ne doit pas oublier qu il est possible que la conformit aux conditions nonc es ci dessus n emp chet pas la d gradation du service dans certaines situations Actuellement les entreprises de t l communications ne permettent pas que l on raccorde leur mat riel aux prises d abonn s sauf dans les cas precis pr vus par les tarifs particuliers
236. lobby and the message UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION will be displayed Codes with Non Global Arming If arming with a non global code or if arming with a global code from a non alpha keypad the lobby partition operation will be automatic as described by fields 1 18 and 1 19 Other Methods of Arming Disarming When arming or disarming a partition that affects and or arms the common lobby in one of the following manners lobby logic remains active e Quick Arm e Keyswitch Wireless Button Wireless Keypad Arming Disarming Remotely If arming or disarming remotely through VLINK downloading software the lobby will not automatically follow another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby The lobby must be armed separately after arming all affecting partitions first Auto Arming Disarming If scheduling is used to automatically arm and or disarm partitions the Lobby partition will not automatically follow another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby The lobby must be included as a partition to be armed disarmed If using auto arming make sure that the Auto arm Delay and Auto arm Warning periods fields 2 05 and 2 06 combined are longer than that of any d other partition that affects the lobby This will cause the lobby to arm last Master Keypad Setup and Operation Although this system has eight actual partitions it provides an extra partition strictly for the purp
237. m sounders This output is rated at 10 13 8VDC 2 8A maximum including auxiliary current draw Exceeding the prescribed current limits will overload the power supply or may N possibly trip the bell output circuit protector Wiring 1 Make connections to terminals 4 positive output and 5 negative return leoeoooococ ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT 10VDC 13 8 VDC 2 8A maximum Figure 25 External Sounder Connections UL985 Household Fire Installations For installations which must provide UL Listed protection the total current drawn from this output and the auxiliary power output combined must not exceed 750mA in order to comply with the battery independence requirements 01985 If two System Sensor PA400 piezo alarm sounders wired in parallel are used 24mA total then 750mA 24 726mA is available for auxiliary output use 79 011023 Household amp 01609 Commercial Burglary Installations For installations which must provide only UL Listed burglary protection the total current drawn from this output must not exceed 2 8 amps A battery must be installed since current in excess of 750mA is supplied by the battery Use any UL Listed sounding device for UL Household Burglary installations Use the Ademco AB12 Grade A bell in box for UL Commercial Burglary installations The AB12 bell should be wired as shown in Figure 26 AB12 WIRING NOTES Program the zone which moni tors AB12 tamper for day trou
238. mal burglary alarm sounder duration programmed in partition specific field 13 should apply to fire alarms KEYPAD PANIC ENABLES partition specific Enter 1 to enable the appropriate keypad panics used 95 96 99 in this partition Otherwise enter 0 95 96 23 24 25 26 27 28 MULTIPLE ALARMS partition specific Determines whether or not more than one alarm can be sounded in a given zone during an armed period Note that multiple alarm soundings will not occur more frequently than allowed by the programmed alarm sounder duration This selection applies to local sounding and has no impact on the number of communication messages transmitted Refer to Swinger Suppression for limiting communication messages Enter 1 if this feature is desired Enter 0 if not desired IGNORE EXPANSION ZONE TAMPER Only applicable to certain polling loop sensors with tamper switches or 5800 series transmitters This option is used to disable tamper detection on these devices Enter 1 to disable ignore tamper Enter 0 if tamper detection is desired BURG TRIGGER FOR RESPONSE TYPE 8 Enter 1 to allow optional triggering of the voltage output on pin 7 of the J7 header to include zone response type 8 24hr auxiliary Enter 0 if only burglary and audible panic alarms zone type 7 will trigger pin 7 INTELLIGENT TEST REPORTING Enter 1 if it is desir
239. mco Contact ID 142 144 157 178 Ademco High Speed M 144 178 Ademco LOW SPEED Alarm Report Code 67 Alarm Sounder Duration 80 94 Alpha Descriptors entering 108 ALPHA VOCABULARY 117 Amseco motor bell amp box 81 Amseco PAL 328N 75 Arm Window 137 Arm Away 42193 Arm Stay 2193 arm disarm 182 Arm Disarm commands 132 Arming Away 4161 Arming Functions 4161 Arming Instant 2 2 161 Arming Maximum 161 Arming Stay 161 Arming Window 2 00 0 106 ATLIS BBS 4 ete 179 Audio Alarm Verification 4 69 Auto Arming err net 122 Auto Disarming eese 123 Auto Arm Delay 106 122 126 Auto Arm warning 22222222221 106 126 Auto Disarm Delay 106 126 Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment t78 Auxiliary Device Current Draw 88 Auxiliary Output Enable 2 Back Up Battery Basic Hardwired Zones Basic Scheduling Menu Structure 127 irren ennt 88 Battery Life 49 Battery Selection Table 89 Baud 1200 2c 105 Baud 300 4 ecce rece 105 Bu
240. mitters set for an ID of 32 through 47 will have a 3 minute lock out between transmissions Use this last range of zone ID numbers for sensors protecting frequently used doors or windows to conserve battery life Transmitter IDs 48 through 55 have highest signal priority Transmitter IDs 62 and 63 are unsupervised to allow removal of the 5701 off premises signal priority is lower than that of fire but higher than burglary 47 Compatible 5700 Series Transmitters Product Zone Num Description Panic Transmitter Programmable for either silent or audible 24 hour alarm Photoelectric Smoke One piece smoke detector with built Detector in transmitter Built in UL Listed 85 dB piezo electric alarm sounder and audible low battery warning 5711 Slimline Door 1 63 Can be used with any closed or open Window Transmitter circuit sensor 5715WH Universal Transmitter 1 63 DIP switch selectable for fast response and open or closed sensor usage Has a tamper protected cover 5716 5716WM Door Window Can be used with any open or closed Transmitter circuit sensor Features a built in reed switch 5716WM includes magnet Audio Discriminator For use in unoccupied areas to detect the sound of shattering glass when a window is broken Dual Technology Detects the sound and shock of Glassbreak Detector breaking glass and requires the presence of both to initiate an alarm condition PIR Detecto
241. mplaint with the FCC if you believe necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this equipment please contact the manufacturer for repair and warranty information If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved There are no user serviceable components in this product and all necessary repairs must be made by the manufacturer Other repair methods may invalidate the FCC registration on this product This equipment cannot be used on telephone company provided coin service Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs This equipment is hearing aid compatible When programming or making test calls to an emergency number briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening 172 CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS DOC STATEMENT NOTICE The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational an
242. municator Move the antenna leads away from any wire runs to the control communicator Plug the control communicator into a different outlet so that it and the receiver are on different branch circuits If necessary the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for additional suggestions The user or installer may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful Interference Handbook This booklet is available from the U S Government Printing Office Washington DC 20402 The user shall not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless authorized by the Installation Instructions or User s Manual Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment IN THE EVENT OF TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS In the event of telephone operational problems disconnect the control panel by removing the plug from the RJ31X CA38A in Canada wall jack We recommend that you demonstrate disconnecting the phones on installation of the system Do not disconnect the phone connection inside the Control Panel Doing so will result in the loss of your phone lines If the regular phone works correctly after the Control Panel has been disconnected from the phone lines the Control Panel has a problem and should be returned for repair If upon disconnection of the Control Panel there is still a problem on the line notify the telephone company
243. n zone 3 of partition BURGLARY C03 8 at 12 02AM on January 1 After the last event in the selected category has been displayed using either the 1 or 3 keys the following will appear for a few seconds END OF EVENT LOG TYPE CCC UUU 84 CLEAR EVENT LOG Press 1 if Event Log is to be cleared from memory 0 1 YES All events in the log will still be displayed if the COMPLETE option is selected Only those events occurring from the time of the CLEAR command will be displayed if RECENT display option is selected Press 0 if event log is not to be cleared at this time If 1 is pressed the following will appear ARE YOU SURE Press 1 if it is desired to clear the event log Press 0 1 5 0 if event log is not to be cleared SCREEN DEFINITIONS RECENT Events since last CLEAR COMPLETE Displays all events TYPE Type of event Burg Fire etc CCC Zone contact number UUU User number 85 Section 15 FINAL POWER UP PROCEDURE This section provides the following information Earth ground considerations e Connecting the AC transformer e Connecting the backup battery e Programming power and AC options Auxiliary and Polling Loop Current Draw Worksheets General Information You can power the control from the supplied 1361 transformer 1361CN Canada rated 16 5VAC 40VA which plugs directly into a 24 hour 120VAC 60 Hz outlet If using power line carrier devices you must use the 4300
244. nclude a partition number and four digit descriptor Enter 0 to cause the keypads to display non partitioned system type of display no partition number will appear ENABLE J7 TRIGGERS BY PARTITION partition specific SUPERVISION PULSES FOR LORRA TRIGGER OUTPUTS FBS Used for supervised connection to 7920SE Enter 1 to enable pulses for each type of LORRA trigger burglary fire silent panic This option causes the control to send periodic short pulses on he J7 radio triggers These pulses are used by the 7920SE to determine that its connection to the control is still intact Enter 0 if not desired 107 Section 19 93 MENU MODE PROGRAMMING This section provides the following information 93 Menu Mode main menu options Zone Programming Serial Number Programming Alpha Programming Device Programming Relay Programming Relay Voice Descriptors Custom Index Programming VIP Module substitute words 93 Main Menu Options The following fields should be programmed before beginning 2 00 Number of 22 Partitions 1 32 RF receiver type After programming all system related programming fields in the usual way press 93 while still in programming mode to display the first choice of the menu driven programming options which are as follows ZONE PROG For programming the following 0 No 1 Yes Zone Number Zone Response Type Partition Number for Zone Dial
245. ne of the following types Type Description Sends periodic check in signals as well as fault Supervised RF restore and low battery signals The transmitter must remain within the recpivers range UR Sends all the signals that the RF type does Unsupervised RF but the control does not supervise the check in signals The transmitter may therefore be carried off premises BR These send only fault signals They do not send Unsupervised Button low battery signals until they are activated The RF transmitter may be carried off premises 5800 Series Transmitter Battery Life Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last from 4 7 years depending on the environment usage and the specific wireless device being used External factors such as humidity high or low temperatures as well as large swings in temperature may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation The wireless system can identify a true low battery situation thus allowing the dealer or user of the system time to arrange a change of battery and maintain protection for that given point within the system Some transmitters e g 5802 5802CP and 5803 contain long life but non replaceable batteries At the end of their life the complete unit must be replaced and a new serial number learned by the control 49 50 Button type transmitters 5801 5802 5802CP amp 5803 should be periodically tested by th
246. ness is provided with Ademco No 4100EOLR Resistor kit kit also contains EOL resistors having spade lug heat shrink tubing construction which has been approved by UL and CSFM for fire zone usage Both batteries will fit inside the panel s cabinet 171 FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION FCC STATEMENT This equipment has been tested to FCC requirements and has been found acceptable for use The FCC requires the following statement for your information This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly that is in strict accordance with the manufacturer s instructions may cause interference to radio and television reception It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures If using an indoor antenna have a quality outdoor antenna installed Reorient the receiving antenna until interference is reduced or eliminated Move the receiver away from the control com
247. ng window expires 125 126 Programming with 80 Scheduling Menu Mode The 80 Scheduling Menu Mode is used to program most of the scheduling and timed event options To enter this mode the system must first be in normal operating mode Enter Installer Code 80 The following can be programmed while in this mode Define time windows Assign open close schedules to each partition Assign holiday schedules Program time driven events for system functions and relay activation Assign access control schedules Some scheduling features are programmed in data field programming mode installer code 800 The general programming mode scheduling fields are listed below System Wide Fields 1 74 1 75 Relay timeout values 2 01 2 02 Daylight savings time options 2 11 Allow Disarming outside window if alarm occurs 2 13 2 14 Scheduling related report codes Partition specific fields 1 76 Access control relay for this partition 2 05 Auto arm delay value 2 06 Auto arm warning time 2 07 Auto disarm delay value 2 08 Force arm enable 2 09 Open close reporting by exception 2 10 Restrict disarm only during windows Event driven relay activation options are programmed using the 93 Menu Mode Relay Programming These actions are in response to a programmed action However relay activation can also be time driven and thus be used to initiate a desired action Time driven relay activation options are programmed usin
248. ning properly Unplug the AC transformer and continue to the next section UL The 4208 must either be mounted inside the VISTA 50P cabinet or in a separate enclosure which has a tamper supervised cover The 4190WH right loop must not be used and the left loop must be EOLR supervised The 4278 auxiliary sensor loop cannot be used The 4194 is not UL Listed The 4197 must be powered from the VISTA 50PUL auxiliary power output or from a UL listed supplementary power supply Compatible Polling Loop Devices 8 Zone Expander Accommodates up to 8 zones via the polling loop DIP switch programmable The first two zones can be either normal or fast response DIP switch selectable All zones are EOLR supervised first six zones 4 7k ohms last two zones 30k ohms provided with the 4208 4190WH 2 Zone Expander Accommodates up to 2 zones via the polling loop DIP switch programmable The left zone can be EOLR supervised required in UL installations can accept either open or closed circuit sensors and can be set for fast response The right zone is unsupervised and can accept closed circuit sensors only cannot be used in UL installations Quad PIR Quad element PIR with built in RPM connects directly to the polling loop DIP switch programmable Includes mirrors for both wide angle and curtain long range applications Features an auxiliary sensor loop that is non
249. not place receiver on or near metal objects This will decrease the range and or block transmissions Do not mount receivers or transmitters in an attic where extreme temperatures could prevent proper operation For maximum range install the wireless receiver at least 10 feet from the Control panel or any keypads to avoid interference from the microprocessors in these units If dual receivers are used A Both must be at least 10 feet from each other as well as from the Control panel and remote keypads B Each receiver must be set to a different Device Address 01 07 The receiver set to the lower address is considered the 1st wireless receiver for supervisory purposes C The house IDs must be the same applies only to 5700 series or if using a 5827 5827BD wireless keypad D Using two Receivers does not increase the number of transmitters the System can support 63 zones using 4281H 86 zones using the 5881H plus a wireless keypad 22 4281 microprocessor must have part number N5334Vx where x is number The microprocessor is located just above the DIP switch on the PC board Installation and Setup of the 4281 5881 Wireless Receivers 1 Mount the receiver s Receivers must be mounted externally to the control and can detect signals from transmitters within a nominal range of 200 feet Take this into consideration when determining mounting location 2 Connect the receiver s wire harness to the control s
250. ns and all continuous keypad sounds in all partitions will be shut off if field 1 60 is enabled When the AAV indicates that the audio alarm verification session is completed all keypad sounds will be restored Sirens will be restored if the alarm timeout period has not expired As part of its fail safe software the control will limit all audio alarm verification sessions to 15 minutes this is because once the session begins the AAV module controls the duration If a new fire alarm should occur during a session the control will break phone connection and send the new fire alarm report then re trigger AAV mode All other dialer messages triggered during on going conversation will be held until either the AAV module signals that it is inactive or the 15 minute timeout occurs One way to trigger the AAV module is by selecting option 3 in field 1 46 and make connections as shown in the VOLTAGE TRIGGER diagram Field 1 46 can be used to set ground start remote console sounding or long range radio open close trigger If any one of these functions are absolutely necessary in a given installation the alternative AAV trigger method is via the use of a 4204 relay as shown in the RELAY TRIGGER diagram If this method is selected the start and stop conditions for that relay must be set to choice 60 Audio Alarm Verification during relay programming via 93 menu mode 69 70 Some AAV modules allow remote triggering by ring detection at the
251. nstallation U L The VISTA 50UL must operate for at least 4 hours following an AC power loss in certificated burglary installations Select a battery size from the table below that will support the auxiliary power output current draw for 4 or more hours 2 Connect the battery as shown in Figure 28 Do not connect the baitery until all devices have been wired to the control 89 Section 16 FALSE ALARM REDUCTION FEATURES 90 This section provides the following information General information about false alarms Exit Error Logic and related reports Exit Delay Reset Cross Zoning Call Waiting Defeat General Information This control supports features which help minimize false alarms from occurring Most false alarms occur either upon exiting the premises or because of a zone which tends to go into alarm either due to environmental factors or because the zone s resistance to the control may be on the edge of acceptability We call this condition a swinger Features which prevent false alarms due to these circumstances are Exit Error Logic and related reports Exit Delay Reset Cross Zoning Exit Error Logic This feature is intended to reduce the incidence of false alarms due to exit doors that are left open after the exit delay has expired If this feature is enabled in program field 1 20 the following will occur At the end of the exit delay if the door is left open the system will
252. nt usage and the specific wireless device being used External factors such as humidity high or low temperatures as well as large swings in temperature may reduce the actual battery life in a given installation The wireless system can identify a true low battery situation thus allowing the dealer or user of the system time to arrange a change of battery and maintain protection for that given point within the system Button type transmitters should be periodically tested by the user for battery life ex 5701 e After replacing a low or dead battery activate the transmitter and enter the Security Code OFF to clear its memory of the Low Battery signal Installing 5700 Series Transmitters A variety of wireless system transmitters can be used to make up the wireless zones These include window door units smoke detectors PIRs and panic buttons Zone number assignments can be from 1 63 1 Setthe DIP switches on each 5700 series transmitter to the appropriate zone number and House ID Refer to the Compatible Transmitters Table later in this section for zone numbers and programming information for each particular transmitter 2 Install each transmitter in accordance with the instructions provided with the transmitter 22 Before permanently mounting the transmitters make sure reception of each transmitter s signal at the proposed mounting location is adequate To do this perform a Go No Go test which is described later
253. nt failure Even though this equipment is designed to last as long as 20 years the electronic components could fail at any time The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate maintenance This alarm system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working properly The security console and remote keypad should be tested as well Wireless transmitters used in some systems are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating conditions Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years depending on the environment usage and the specific wireless device being used External factors such as humidity high or low temperatures as well as large swings in temperature may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation This wireless system however can identify a true low battery situation thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to maintain protection for that given point within the system Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate but an alarm system is not a substitute for insurance Homeowners property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in protecting themselves and continue to insure their lives and property We continue to develop new and improved protection devices Users of alarm systems owe it to themselves and their loved ones to learn about these developments 1
254. ntains the zones to be bypassed or unbypassed Press to accept entry The Time Window prompt appears Action 42 GROUP 12345678 Enter the group number to which HITO 8 X the time window will apply Press to accept entry The Time Window prompt appears Enter the time window number 01 20 for which this timed event is to occur As the number is keyed in the actual time that has been stored for the window will be displayed Press the to continue Enter the activation code number from 1 4 listed below As the number is keyed in the activation time will be displayed The choices are 1 Trigger at the start of the window 2 Trigger at the end of the window 3 Take effect only for the duration of the window 4 Trigger at both the start and the end of the window Example coffee break buzzer Press the key when the desired choice is showing Days MTWTFSSH The system will then ask for which days the event is Hit 0 8 x x to be activated Press 0 to toggle all days on or off or else press keys 1 8 to toggle the letter x under the day on or off Monday 1 Holiday H 8 When all entries have been made the TIMED EVENT prompt is displayed again Repeat the procedure for each timed event required by the installation When all timed events have been programmed enter 00 at the TIMED EVENT prompt to quit this set of menus 135 Limitation
255. ntered at the keypad with the exception of the Silent Panic Duress trigger which is a 2 second pulse The diagrams that follow show how to make connections to the 7720 and 7920SE radios Refer to the UL Installation Requirements found in the REGULATORY AGENCY REQUIREMENTS section for a description of the specific connections and programming options required for each of the various UL Listings 7720 RADIO SEE 7720 INST INSTR FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON POWERING UNIT 123456789100 VISTA 50P OR VISTA SOPUL 66060960000 7720 WIRING USE VISTA SOPUL FOR UL LISTED A142TR CABLE COMMERCIAL BURGLARY INSTALLATIONS GRAY BURG AUDIBLE PANIC BROWN REQUIRED SILENT PANIC DURESS BLACK OPTIONAL RED OPTIONAL TO C COM AUX PWR 35mA DRAW NOTES FOR UL LISTED COMMERCIAL BURGLARY INSTALLATIONS 1 MOUNT THE 7720 WITHIN 3 FEET OF THE C COM RUN WIRING FROM C COM TO 7720 IN CONNECT RADIO FAULT OUTPUT TO C COM EOLR SUPERVISED ZONE ZONE 2 8 ONLY USE 2K EOLR SEE UL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ON A LATER PAGE TO DETERMINE WHEN 659 USAGE IS REQUIRED CONNECT TO C COM EOLR SUPERVISED gt ZONE ZONE 2 8 ONLY WHEN DESIRED TO PHONE LINE MONITOR HAVE PANEL LOCALLY ANNUNCIATE PHONE SEE OPENS ON FAULT LINE FAULTS NOTE 4 H2V ON FAULT REQUIRED OPTIONAL INCOMING PHONE LINE 7920SE RADIO 7920SE INST INSTR FOR EARTH GROUND INSTRUCTIONS
256. nu Mode 06 ON TIME Enter the ON time in 00 01 11 59 format 07 00 PM When the display shows the desired time press the key to move to the AM PM field In this field any of the keys 0 9 may be used to toggle the AM PM indication Enter 00 00 to skip Note May use two commands to perform an ON one day and an OFF another day 139 140 06 11 45 PM 06 Days MTWTFSS Hit 0 7 x x 06 Permanent 0 NO 1 YES 0 Enter the OFF time in 00 01 11 59 format When the display shows the desired time press the key to move to the AM PM field In this field any of the keys 0 9 may be used to toggle the AM PM indication Enter 00 00 to skip To select the days which are to be activated enter 1 7 Monday 1 An X will appear under that day indicating the output for that day is active Entering a day s number again will deactivate that day Pressing 0 will toggle all days on off The outputs will only be in effect for the days which have the letter x underneath them As the week progresses the selected days are reset to the inactive state unless the permanent option is selected next screen prompt When completed press to continue Selecting Permanent means that this schedule will be in effect on a continuous basis An answer of 0 means means that this schedule will be in effect for one week only The letter x under the day will then be cleared Press to accept entry The system
257. nu mode 93 Menu Mode Key Commands Enters Menu mode Serves as ENTER key Press to have keypad accept entry 0 Press to answer NO Press to answer YES 00 Escapes from menu mode back into data field programming mode if entered at the first prompt of each main menu option 19 Section 5 INSTALLING THE KEYPADS This section provides the following information A list of wired keypads that may be used Instructions for wiring and mounting the keypads Instructions for addressing the keypads A preliminary check out procedure to ensure that the keypads functioning properly in the system Keypads That May Be Used Two Line Alpha Display 6139 5137AD Fixed Word Display 6137 6128 4137AD Upto 16 addressable devices including keypads may be used in the system as long as the auxiliary current is available you may need to use an auxiliary power supply if the 750mA auxiliary output is exceeded Wiring To The Keypads 1 Determine wire gauge by referring to the wiring length gauge chart below 2 Wire keypads to a single wire run or connect individual keypads to separate wire runs The maximum wire run length from the control to a single keypad which is home run back to the control must not exceed the lengths listed in the table Wire Run Length Table Length 22 gauge 450 feet 20 gauge 700 feet 18 gauge 1100 feet 16 gauge 1750 feet 1 The length of all wire runs combined must not
258. obal arming settings Enter 0 if the button is not to be used to global arm the system however home partition arming will still occur ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON FORCE BYPASS Enter 1 to allow the RF Button user to force bypass all faulted zones When attempting to arm the system the keypad will beep once after pressing the button if any faulted zones are present If this feature is enabled the user should then press the button again within 4 seconds to force bypass those zones and arm the system Enter 0 if RF button forced bypassing is not desired ZONE 5 AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION Enter 1 if 2 Way Audio AAV is being used Enter 0 if AAV is not being used EVENT LOG TYPES Alm Chck Byps O C Systm Enter 1 for each type of event for which event logging is desired Otherwise enter 0 12 24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT Select the type of time stamping desired O standard 12 hour 12 24 hour format EVENT LOG PRINTER ON LINE Enter 1 to have the printer print events as they occur Enter 0 to enable the printer such that the logs are only printed upon request PRINTER BAUD RATE Enter 0 if printer is set for 1200 baud preferred Enter 1 if printer is set for 300 baud RELAY TIMEOUT XX MINUTES Enter the relay timeout 000 127 in multiples of 2 minutes desired for 80 Menu Mode time driven event relay command numbers 0
259. occurs which clears the beeping 22 keypad Global arming cannot be performed from a wireless keypad or a non alpha Access Control If programmed one relay may be used for access control in each partition The relay is programmed in data field 1 76 To activate this relay the user enters his user code 0 relay will pulse for 2 seconds Delaying Closing Time If Open Close schedules are used end users can manually delay closing time by extending the closing window by 1 or 2 hours This is useful if a user must stay on the premises later than usual The user must have authority level of manager or higher To extend the closing window enter user code 82 Closing Delay Enter the number hours 1 or 2 by which the end of the Hit 0 2 Hours closing window should be extended Note that the delay is from the scheduled closing time not from the current time Press to accept entry and exit this mode Press to exit this mode without changes The system will send an Access Schedule Change message to the central station when the closing window is extended if programmed in fields 2 13 and 2714 K An extension of the closing window cannot be reduced once it is set However 1 hour delay be increased to 2 hours This is to prevent the user from deleting the delay after the normal window expires thereby missing the end of the window Partition GOTO Commands Each
260. ode General Information This system allows a total of 75 security access codes to be allocated each identified by a user ID number Note that regardless of the number of partitions each code has access to it occupies only one user slot in the system If a particular code is not used in all partitions that user ID number cannot be used again The Quick Arm feature can also be programmed partition specific program field 29 which allows the key to be pressed instead of entering the security code when arming the system The security code must always be entered to disarm the system 22 User 2 must programmed for the Quick Arm feature to function User Codes amp Levels Of Authority Each user of the system can be assigned a level of authority tells system what system functions that user is authorized to do and can have different levels of authority within different partitions In general users can perform most system functions including Test and Chime modes but certain authority levels restrict disarming bypassing or the assigning of other user codes These restrictions are noted in the descriptions below Use the View Capabilities keypad function to view the partitions and authority levels for which a particular user is authorized In highest to lowest ranking these levels are described below Level 0 Installer User 1 Programmed in field 00 default 4 1 4 0 Installer open close repo
261. of individual loops ex 5801 5803 5816 5817 etc Zone disabled 00 Each zone in a system must be assigned a zone type which defines the way in which the system responds to faults in that zone Refer to Section 17 ZONE TYPE DEFINITIONS for detailed definitions of each zone type Enter the zone response type for this zone The screen will automatically display the zone type for the number entered Press to accept entry 109 110 20 Partition 20 Report Code RF Trans RF Note that input types 4 amp 5 are valid for certain 5800 series transmitters only ex 5801 5802 5802CP amp 5803 When using 5700 series transmitters always set the input type to 3 RF The zone number of the transmitter identifies whether or not supervision is required ex 5700 wireless zone number 63 is not supervised 20 LOOP NUMBER OR 20 LEARN S N 1 YES 0 Zone Types are as follows 00 Assign for unused zones 01 Entry Exit 1 burglary 02 Entry exit 2 03 Perimeter burglary 04 Interior follower burglary 05 Trouble by day Alarm by night burglary 06 24 hour silent alarm 07 24 hour audible alarm 08 24 hour auxiliary 09 Fire 10 Interior delay burglary 20 Arm stay for 5800 RF only 21 Arm away for 5800 RF only 22 Disarm for 5800 RF only 23 No alarm response ex relay action For UL applications use of 1 or 2 RF RCVRs requires enabling their respective faults
262. ogramming Hardwired Zones eese ene 30 Checkout Procedure for Hardwired Zones sese 92 POLLING LOOP ZONES 10 86 4 0 33 Polline Loop 33 Common Characteristics of Polling Loop 0 33 Wiring Addressing Polling Loop Devices eese 33 Polling Loop Limitations esses 34 Polling Loop Supervision 35 Programming Polling Loop Zones coe RR EISE uae 36 Checkout Procedure for Polling Loop Zones eese 38 Compatible Polling Loop 39 WIRELESS RF ZONE EXPANSION eese eese 9 41 Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones eee 41 Wireless Systems Available carae tust utres 4 Wireless System Operation and Supervision 42 Wireless System Installation 1 42 Installation and Setup of 4281 5881 RF Receivers esses 43 Installation Wiring of the 5800TM 44 Programming The Wireless Receiver 44 House ID Sifter Mode oerte eto ees 45 5700 Series Transmitter 46 Wireless Zone Assignments for 5700 Series Transmitters 47 Compatible 5700 Ser
263. om the display A transmitter not learned 5800 series or dipswitched correctly 5700 series will not turn off its zone number 3 To exit the Transmitter Sniffer mode enter the Installer Code 1 OFF 55 56 Section 9 RELAY OUTPUTS amp POWER LINE CARRIER X 10 DEVICES This section provides the following information Output Device Basics Wiring the 4204 relay module Wiring the 4300 transformer Programming the 4204 relay module Programming output devices Programming relay voice descriptors Output Device Basics Relays and Powerline Carrier devices i e X 10 brand devices are programmable switches that can be used to perform many different functions They can be used to turn lights on and off control sounders or for status indications n this system each device must be programmed as to how to act ACTION when to activate START and when to deactivate STOP Each of these is described in Programming Options Defined later in this section and in the programming procedure 93 Relay Programming mode provided at the end of this section The system supports a total of 16 relays provided by 4204 Relay modules and or Powerline Carrier devices Each 4204 module provides 4 relays with Form C normally open and normally closed contacts Powerline Carrier devices are controlled by signals sent through the electrical wiring at the premises via a 4300 transformer Theref
264. ompt for the next partition number in sequence If YES the keypad prompts for the following Users authority level in the displayed partition see Authority Level prompt above e Open Close option for this user in the displayed partition see Open Close prompt above e Global Arm option for this user in the displayed partition When all partitions have been displayed the keypad will scroll through all partitions to which access has been assigned and will display the user number authority level open close and global arm options that were programmed for each partition the user was granted access For example Note that the G following the authority level indicates that the global arm feature is enabled for this user in the displayed partition and that the period at the end of the second line indicates open close reporting is enabled for this user in the displayed partition The indicates the partition from which the user may be changed or deleted To CHANGE a Master Manager or Operator code Enter Installer code 8 User number 02 75 new user s code Or Master or Manager code but must be code with higher level of authority than the code being changed i e Master code can change a Manager or Operator level code but cannot change another Master code a Manager code can change an Operator level code but cannot change a Master or another Manager code User Number 03 NEW USER The system detects that t
265. on Using Test Mode Turning the system over to the user Trouble conditions Using Test Mode General Information After the installation is completed thoroughly test the Security System on a partition by partition basis as follows 1 With the System in the disarmed state check that all zones are intact If DISARMED Press T to show faults is displayed press the key to display the descriptors of the faulted zone s Restore faulted zone s if necessary so that DISARMED READY TO ARM is displayed 2 Enter the security code and press the TEST key The external sounder if used should sound for 3 seconds and then turn off the system is operating on the back up battery only at this time NOTE 1 If the sounder does not sound this may be an indication that the backup battery is discharged or missing NOTE 2 As a reminder that the system is in the Test mode the keypad will sound a single beep at 15 second intervals NOTE 3 In the Test mode no alarm reports will be sent to the central station for the partition being tested Also the external sounder if used will not be activated NOTE 4 Test mode is active only for the partition at which Test mode is entered Other partitions are still operative and will cause the external sounder and communicator to activate if an alarm condition occurs Doors and Windows Open and close each protected door and window in turn Each action should produce three b
266. on between RING and earth ground when it obtains a dial tone Ground Start Module Connections 1 4142TR CABLE GROUND START TRIGGER 675 GROUND START MODULE TO AUX POWER CUT ORANGE TERM 7 JUMPER TO AUX POWER TERM 6 50mA CURRENT DRAW IF USED 1 OUT 1 IS NO LONGER RING GROUND USABLE FOR OPEN CLOSE SEE FIELD 146 2 OUT 2 3 4 CAN STILL USED TO PROVIDE ALARM STATUS INDICATIONS OR TO OPERATE A KEYSWITCH SEE FIELD 15 3 THE 675 IS NOT UL LISTED Figure 21 Ground Start Module Connections Programming For The Ground Start Module 1 3 Enter data field programming mode Installer Code 800 Program the following data field 1 46 AUXILIARY OUTPUT ENABLE Set to 0 factory default Press 99 to exit program mode Connect the 675 Ground Start Module to the panel s J7 connector trigger output 1 to auxiliary power and to the RING side of the telephone line as shown in the diagram below Use the following procedure to determine which side of the telephone line is the RING side Connect the lead of a DC voltmeter to earth ground and the lead to one side of the telephone line The wire which reads 50VDC is the RING side J7 CONNECTOR With at least one two line alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 wired and set to a proper address power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC transformer into a 120VAC outlet previously wired to
267. ondition if that service is connected Arming Functions The following is a brief list of system commands For detailed information concerning system functions refer to the User s Manual Display Faulted Before arming the system must be in the READY Zones condition all zones must be intact If the NOT READY message appears press the READY key to display faulted zones Arming Away Enter code 2 AWAY Arming Stay Enter code 3 STAY all zones designated as zone types 4 and 10 will be automatically bypassed Arming Instant Enter code 7 INSTANT same as STAY without entry delay Arming Maximum Enter code 4 MAXIMUM same as AWAY without entry delay Disarming Enter code 1 OFF Bypassing Zones Enter code 6 BYPASS zone number To automatically bypass all faulted zones use Quick Bypass method Enter code BYPASS t Chime Mode Enter code 9 CHIME To turn chime mode off enter code CHIME again 161 162 Quick Arming Note that if QUICK ARM is enabled field 29 the key can be pressed instead of entering the security code for any of the arming procedures Away Stay Instant Maximum etc User 02 must be programmed into the system order for the Quick Arm feature to work Global Arming SUMMARY OF ARMING MODES
268. one type used with 5800 series wireless pushbutton or contact closure or opening and which will result in arming the system in the AWAY mode when the zone is activated Type 22 Disarm This is a special purpose zone type used with 5800 series wireless pushbutton or contact closure or opening and which will result in disarming the system when the zone is activated Type 23 No Alarm Response This zone type can be used on a zone when an output relay action is desired but with no accompanying alarm ex lobby door access Note that these zone types are for use by 5800 series devices only NOTE FOR PANIC KEYS Keypad panic zones share the same zone response type for all 8 partitions but panics may be individually enabled for each partition IMPORTANT FAULT ANNUNCIATION Polling loop and RF troubles zones 88 91 amp 97 will report as trouble conditions only and as such should be assigned zone type 05 if annunciation is desired See SUPERVISION notes in POLLING LOOP and WIRELESS EXPANSION information sections for more 93 Section 18 DATA FIELD DESCRIPTIONS The following is a description of all data fields provided by this control If you have followed earlier instructions during the installation of the various devices many of these fields will already have been programmed If you need more information about actual programming procedures see Section 4 THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING 00 INSTALL
269. ons a e ote ust 82 Event Log Printer Connections 4 82 Programming Event Log Options sese 83 Event Logging Procedures eee titre ev e ERE erp T 83 FINAL POWER UP PROCEDURE eee e eese eene enata setas sene 86 General nfortmiatlOE lola n eu e e aen 86 Earth Ground Considerations eee ben dT X PERS 86 Connecting the Transformer eese nete ete 86 Connecting The Battery retos Genes 88 Programming Power And AC Options eene 89 Polling Loop Current Draw 89 Auxiliary Device Current Draw Worksheet eese 89 FALSE ALARM REDUCTION FEATURES 90 General Information 90 Exit Error Lalo ence td us 90 EERIE Delay Las 90 C TOSS OI 91 Call 91 Section 17 Section 18 Section 19 Section 20 Section 21 Section 22 Section 23 ZONE TYPE DEFINITIONS 92 DATA FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
270. opening report although outside of the opening window will not be sent as long as the reentering occurs within the closing window otherwise a report will be sent This feature is designed to prevent false alarms to central station The following diagram gives an example of how the open close by exception reporting works Open Close Reports by Exception amp Scheduling 6 01PM 5 59AM 6AM 9AM 9 01AM 3 59PM 4PM 6PM 6 01PM 5 59AM Early opening reports will be sent if system No reports sent is disarmed before if system disarmed opening window begins during this time window Opening Window Auto disarm delay begins Auto disarm occurs after delay if auto disarm is enabled Closing Window No reports sent if system armed during this time Missed opening reports will window be sent if user disarming has not or disarmed if occurred at expiration of user reenters opening window premises Auto arm delay begins Auto arm warning begins Auto arm occurs after warning expires if auto arm is enabled Missed closing reports will be sent if user arming has not occurred at expiration of closing window Late opening reports will be sent if disarm occurs after the opening window expires Late closing reports Early closing reports will be sent if user arming occurs before the closing window begins will be sent if system is armed after the closi
271. or all devices exceeds 750 you can power additional keypads from a regulated 12VDC power supply e g 487 12 supplies 12V 250mA 488 12 supplies 12V 500mA Use a UL Listed battery backed supply for UL installations The 487 12 488 12 power supplies have a backup battery which can power these keypads in the event of AC power loss function when AC power is lost Therefore be sure to power at least one Keypads powered from supplies which backup battery will keypad from the Control s auxiliary power output Connect the additional keypads as shown in Figure 8 using the keypad wire colors shown Be sure to observe the current ratings for the power supply used ak 2 Make connections directly to the screw terminals as shown in Figure 5 Make no connection to the keypad blue wire if present Be sure to connect the negative terminal on the Power Supply unit to terminal 7 AUX on the control 21 SUPPLEMENTARY CONTROL FOWER SUPPLY TERMINAL STRIP AUX AUX DATA DATA ee eo IN JOUT LLI zo Y Z Z IMPORTANT E lt 15 E E IMPORTANT gt CONNECTIONS AF z Make connections directly to screw 4 E 5 scREW m 9 2 terminals Make no connection to the zl cul culaa TERMINALSAS Q R
272. ore if using Powerline Carrier devices a 4300 transformer must be used in place of the regular system transformer xh This section is used to program output devices to activate in response to a programmed condition The system can also be programmed to activate these devices at specific times by using the 80 Scheduling Menu Mode Time Driven Events function Wiring the 4204 Relay Module 1 Set the 4204 DIP switches for a device address between 01 15 that is not being used by another device keypads RF receivers etc If using more than one module each module must be set to a different address 22 The relay module will not operate until the device address you chosen is enabled in the control s Device Programming mode 2 Connect the 4204 module s to the control s keypad terminals 6 7 8 and 9 Use the flying lead cable supplied with the relay module when mounting it in the control s cabinet Use standard 4 conductor twisted cable when mounting the 4204 outside the cabinet 3 Home run each 4204 back to the panel The maximum wire run length from the panel to the 4204 must not exceed Wire Gauge Maximum Length 22 125 feet 20 200 feet 18 300 feet 16 500 feet 4204 RELAY MODULE SWITCH POSITION 4204 ADDRESS SETTINGS means OFF 4 o0 1 213 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 2 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON lt 3 ON ON ON ON
273. ose of assigning keypads as Master keypads for the system Any keypad assigned to Partition 9 in 93 Device Programming mode will make that keypad a Master keypad A Master keypad reflects the status of the entire system Partitions 1 8 on its display at one time This is useful because it eliminates the need for a security officer in a building to have to log on to various partitions from one partition s keypad to find out where an alarm has occurred The following is an example of a typical display SYSTEM 12345678 STATUS RRNNA B Possible status indications include Armed Away Armed Maximum S Armed Stay l Armed Instant R Ready N Not Ready Bypassed Ready Alarm Memory Trouble present To obtain more information regarding a particular partition enter Partition No i e 4 In order to affect that partition the user must use a code that has access to that partition Also in order for a user of any partition to log onto Partition 9 to view the status of all partitions that user must have access to all partitions Otherwise access will be denied The following is an example of what would be displayed for a fault condition on Zone 2 Loading Dock Window on Partition 1 Warehouse when logging on from a keypad on Partition 9 WHSE DISARMED HIT FOR FAULTS This is the normal display that appears at Partition 1 s keypad s Pressing will display FAULT 02 LOADING DOCK WINDOW Addition
274. ould be covered use a cloth to mask them temporarily if necessary With all hard wired zones intact the Alpha keypads connected to the system should display DISARMED READY TO ARM If the following is displayed DISARMED Press to show faults press the key to display the faulted zone s Restore any faulted zone s as necessary also make sure that you have connected a 2000 ohm EOL resistor across the terminals of unused zones When the DISARMED READY TO ARM message is displayed you can proceed to the next step Fault and then restore every contact or sensor on each zone individually to ensure that it is being monitored by the system Each time a zone is faulted the keypads in the partition to which the zone is assigned should display the number of the faulted zone When each zone is restored the READY TO ARM message should appear again If a zone or zones are not displayed at the correct partition s keypad s check both keypad and zone programming to verify the correct partition assignment 5 6 When you get the proper displays on the keypad s the hard wired zones in the system are functioning properly Unplug the AC transformer and continue to the next section Section 7 2 WIRE POLLING LOOP ZONES 10 86 This section provides the following information Polling loop overview Common characteristics of polling loop zones Wiring RPM devices to the polling loop Addressing RPM de
275. ow Bat 50 SESCOA RADIONICS SELECT 0 Radionics ALARM REPORT CODE amp ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 1 32 amp SUPERVISORY amp RESTORE CODES 54 CODE 55 1D 56 CODE 57 ID 58 59 CODE 60 ID 61 CODE 62ID 63 11110 0 1 9 10 0 9 114 Alarm Rst 17 0 1 0 7 25 0 2 0 5 114 Alarm Rst 2 1 0 0J2 10 011 110 OJO Trouble 18 011 0J8 26 0J2 016 010 Trouble 31110 0 3 111011 oji 010 Rst 19 O 1 0 9 27 0J2 0 7 0 0 Trble Rst 41110 0 4 12 O 1 0 2 0 0 Bypass 20 012 10 28 0 2 08 0 0 Bypass 5 1 0 0 5 13 01 0 3 0 0 Bypss Rst 21 0 2 011 29 0 2 0 9 OJO Bypss Rst 6 10 016 14 01 014 22 0 2 0J2 30 03 110 7 1 0 0 7 15 011 0 5 23 0J2 0 3 31 0 3 oji 81110 0 8 16 01 0 6 24 0 2 0 4 32 0 3 0 2 ALARM REPORT CODE amp ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 33 64 amp SUPERVISORY RESTORE CODES 64 CODE 65ID 66 CODE 67 ID 68 69 CODE 70 ID 71 CODE 721D 73 33 0 3 41 0 4 14 Rst 49 014 00 57 015 00 14 Rst 34 0 3 04 42 04 012 010 Trouble 50 0 5 010 58 015 00 00 Trouble 35 0 3 0 5 43 04 0 3 OJO Trble Rst 51 0 5 0 0 59 0 5 0 0 0 0 Trble Rst 36 0 3 0 6 44 0 4 0 4 0 0 Bypass 52 05 010 60 06 010 0 0 37 017 45 04 0 5 0 0 Bypss Rst 53 0 5 010 61 06 010 010 Bypss Rst 38 0 3 0 8 46 0 4 016 54 015 00 62 0 6 00 39 0 3 019 47 0 4 017 55 015 010 63 0 6 00 400131 1 0 48041 08 56 015 0 0 64 0 6 0 0 ALARM REPORT CODE amp ID DIGITS FOR ZONES 81 87 65 80 RF R
276. p e e 167 Turning the System Over to the User eee raten tb nette 167 poteit iade du M tone pd ER Me LEE MEI 167 A SOHDIC CCORGITEIOBS aes 168 REGULATORY AGENCY STATEMENTS 170 DIP SWITCH TABLES 174 SUMMARY OF SYSTEM 8 177 178 PROGRAM FORM SYSTEM WORKSHEET Blue Insert SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS DIAGRAM Inside Back Cover vi OC RPANDMWPYWN ES HR RRR RRR RR C LIST OF FIGURES The ro o eM 10 Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations ess 11 M tme The PC BO Br 12 Standard Phone Line Connections 2 13 AC Power And Battery Connections 14 4300 Transformer Connections esee 14 Keypad Connections to Keypad Port Terminals 21 Using a Supplementary Power Supply for Additional Keypads 22 Zones 1 9 Wiring Connections oes d hotte RU Epi Nin 25 Wiring 2 Wire Smoke Detectors to Zone 1 2 2 422222 26 4 Wire Smoke Detector Power Reset Using 4204 Relay Module
277. period to cause an alarm on either zone This prevents momentary faults from causing an alarm condition You can select four sets of cross zones keeping in mind the following Both must protect the same area Both must be in the same partition A Fire zone must only be crossed to another fire zone protecting the same physical area see note below The four sets of cross zones are programmed in data fields 1 22 1 23 1 24 and 1 25 DO NOT cross zone a fire zone with a burglary zone under any circumstance A fire zone must only be crossed to another fire zone and BOTH must be protecting the same physical area no walls or partitions separating them Consult NFPA 72 standard for exact spacing requirements As a guideline we recommend that spacing between fire cross zones be no further than 30 ft Conditions That Affect Cross Zone Operation 1 In the event of a continuous fault on one of the paired zones that lasts longer than five minutes a fault on the second zone will cause an alarm immediately 2 If one of the zones in a pair is bypassed or has a zone response type set to 0 the cross zoning feature will not apply 3 If an Entry Exit zone is paired with an Interior Follower zone be sure to enter the Entry Exit zone as the first zone of the pair This will ensure that the entry delay time is started before the follower zone is processed 4 Ifa relay is programmed to activate on a fault of one of the zones the
278. ple Scheduled events are based on time windows which are simply periods of time during which an event may take place Time windows are defined by a start time and stop time The system supports up to 20 Time Windows The windows are shared by the 8 partitions and the windows are used for open close schedules as well as for time driven event control To understand time windows and scheduling take for example a store that has the following hours Monday to Thursday 9am to 6pm Friday 9am to 9pm Saturday 10am to 4pm Sunday Closed Holidays Closed Assume the owner desires the following time windows to allow time for employees to arm or disarm the system Monday to Thursday Open disarm 8am to Close arm 6pm to 6 30pm Friday Open disarm 8am to 9am Close arm 9pm to 9 30pm Saturday Open disarm to 10am Close arm 4pm to 4 30pm Sunday amp Holidays Closed To provide these schedules the following five time windows need to be programmed Window Start Stop Purpose 8am gam Monday Friday open window gam 10am Saturday open window 4pm 4 30pm Saturday close window 6pm 6 30pm Monday Thurs close window 9pm 9 30pm Friday close window Using the 80 Menu Mode described in a later section the installer can program open close schedules by assigning each time window to a day of the week windows are entered as 2 digit entries Mon Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Hol Op Cl
279. prompt Enter 0 8 appears Enter the user s access group number 1 8 if this user should have limited access to the system Enter 0 if no access group should be assigned RF Button If a 5800 series button transmitter has been enabled for 0 1 5 arming disarming functions is not assigned to a user this prompt will appear Press 0 NO or 1 YES Enter Button ZN If yes was given as the answer to the RF button question 01 86 the zone number for the button will be requested Enter any one of the zone numbers assigned to the button transmitter as AWAY STAY or DISARM The system will then assign all buttons of the transmitter to this user number 158 Multi Access 0 NO 1 YES Global Arm 0 NO 1 YES Part 2 SHOP 0 1 5 Part 1 A0 WHSE User 03 Auth 3G Press 0 NO if the user is to have access to this partition only Press 1 YES if the user is to have access to more than one partition If NO the program exits this mode If yes the Keypad prompts for the Global Arm option for this user Press 0 NO or 1 YES depending on whether or not this user will be allowed to arm more than one partition via Global Arm prompts described in the KEYPAD FUNCTIONS section The keypad now prompts for the user s access to the next partition Press 0 NO or 1 YES depending on whether or not this user will have access to the displayed partition number If NO the keypad displays this pr
280. quickly and effectively You may contact Technical Support via Toll Free Fax Please include your return fax number You will receive a reply within 24 hours You may also contact Technical Support via modem to ATLIS BBS Tech Support s Electronic Bulletin Board System Replies are posted within 24 hours East Coast Technical Support 1 800 645 7492 8 a m 6 p m E S T West Coast Technical Support 1 800 458 9469 8 a m 5 p m P S T Technical Support Fax Number 1 800 447 5086 ATLIS BBS Electronic Bulletin Board System 1 516 496 3980 1200 9600 Baud 8 Data Bits 1 Start Stop Bit No Parity 179 ASCII 2 0 42 42 117 Supervised 49 50 meth 51 12 24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT 83 105 11361 nee 13 86 178 1961 IN ai toii dte m sel cette counts lance se 86 24 hour Audible Alarm 98 24 hour Auxiliary Alarm 98 24 hour Silent Alarm 98 3 1 and 4 1 Expanded Formats 142 3 1 and 4 1 Standard Formats wee 142 145 4 2 X X 145 442 2 0 4 0402212 142 41005 16 82 153 4137AD 2 89 178 41395 ie nein te neon 4142TR X 10 14 57 4146 76 4146 keyswitch s 4190 88 AISISN eee ai 40 4192
281. r Dual element passive infrared detector with built in selectable pulse count Note There is a 3 minute lock out between fault transmissions to conserve battery life Wireless Keypad House ID Can be used to turn the burglary protection on and off Features the same built in panic functions as wired keypads Must be assigned to a partition Identified as zone 00 on wired keypads when it transmits with a low battery 5827BD Wireless Keypad House ID 5 features as above plus Requires use of 5800TM Module must be enabled in Device Programming Can indicate system status via its 3 LEDs and sounder House ID must be set Magnets Package of 8 magnets for use with 5716 transmitters The 5711 5715 and 5716 do not supervise their loop wiring Therefore the loop wiring may not exceed 3 feet 5800 Series Transmitter Setup 5800 series transmitters have built in serial numbers that must be learned by the system using the 93 Menu mode programming or input to the control via the downloader 5800 series transmitters except 5827 described separately do not have DIP switches Each transmitter s zone number is programmed into the system in 93 mode Some transmitters such as the 5816 and 5817 can support more than one zone referred to as loops or inputs On the 5816 for example the wire con nection terminal block is loop 1 the reed contact is loop 2 Each loop must
282. r designations Zone Type Definitions The VISTA 50 supports up to 86 zones of hard wire polling loop and or wireless protection distributed among up to 8 partitions The following table lists the zone numbers and the types of sensors that can be used with each in this system 1 2 wire smoke detectors if used 7 keyswitch if used 8 latching type glass break detectors if used 1 9 traditional hard wired zones 1 63 5700 series wireless devices 1 86 5800 series wireless devices 10 86 polling loop devices 95 1 panic 96 3 panic 99 panic Each zone must be assigned a zone type which defines the way in which the system responds to faults in that zone In addition there are three keypad activated zones PANIC keys see note for each partition a polling loop supervision zone and four RF supervisory zones two for each RF Receiver installed Zone types are defined below Type 00 Zone Not Used Program a zone with this zone type if the zone is not used 01 Entry Exit 1 Burglary This zone type provides entry delay whenever the zone is faulted if the control is armed in the Away or Stay modes When the panel is armed in the Instant or Maximum modes no entry delay is provided Exit delay begins whenever the control is armed regardless of the arming mode selected These delays are programmable This zone type is usually assigned to sensors or contacts on doors through which primary entry and e
283. r detailed procedures Enter 0 to move to the Holidays prompt Holidays Enter 1 to program holiday schedules Refer to the 1Yes O No 0 Holiday Programming section for detailed procedures Enter 0 to move to the Timed Events prompt Timed Events Enter 1 to program timed events for relay outputs power 1Yes O No 0 line carrier devices additional schedules or other system functions Refer to the Programming Timed Events section for detailed procedures Enter 0 to move to the Access Schedule prompt Access Sched Enter 1 to program access schedules Refer to the 1Yes O No 0 Programming Access Schedules section for detailed procedures Enter 0 to move to the Quit prompt Enter 1 to quit 80 Scheduling Menu Mode and return to 1 0 0 normal operating mode Enter 0 to make any changes or review the scheduling programming options If O is pressed the TIME WINDOW menus are displayed c 127 Time Windows Definitions Worksheet The system provides 20 time windows that are defined with start and stop times These windows are used for various open close and access schedules as well as for output controls and are the basis of the scheduling system These windows are shared among all 8 partitions The following worksheets will help you define time windows and scheduling aspects of this system before programming the time window definitions for this installation Note that time windows can span midnight Time Win
284. ransmitter unsupervised Press to continue For 5700 series systems always enter RF type The Summary screen will then be displayed Press to di the next zone For 5800 series transmitters see the Compatible 5800 Series Wireless Transmitter chart earlier in this section for the correct input type entry for each transmitter model Then con splay the ENTER ZN NO prompt for programming tinue on to the next prompt 10 LOOP NUMBER OR 10 LEARN S N 1 YES 0 If this is previously learned sensor the loop number for this zone will appear Press to continue If the sensor s serial number has not been learned the serial number can be learned now by entering 1 or it can be learned later by using the SERIAL NUMBER LEARN mode 53 54 10 INPUT S N L A000 0000 1 10 PROG AS RF 1 A001 3078 1 If learning the serial number now entering 1 at the last prompt this prompt appears Fault the and restore the transmitter faulting is accomplished by pressing the appropriate button for button type transmitters or by opening and closing zone sensors for other transmitters The keypad will beep twice after the first transmission is received Fault and restore the transmitter again The keypad will beep three times to confirm the second transmission and acceptance into the system The serial number will then be displayed on the keypad Alt
285. rdy wall using fasteners or anchors not supplied in a clean dry area which is not readily accessible to the general public The back of the control cabinet has 4 holes for this purpose Before mounting the circuit board remove the metal knockouts for the wiring entry that you will be using DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE KNOCKOUTS AFTER THE CIRCUIT BOARD HAS BEEN Installing The Cabinet Lock THE INSTALLED Use an Ademco No N6277 Cam Lock and No N6277 1 Push On Retainer Clip supplied Remove the lock knockout on the control cabinet cover Insert the key into the lock Position the lock in the hole making certain that the latch will make contact with the latch bracket when the door is closed While holding the lock steady insert the retainer clip into the retainer slots LOCKED RETAINER Cer ar 1 RETAINER CLIP NOTE POSITION 1 1 1 RETAINER SLOTS UNLOCKED CABINET DOOR BOTTOM Figure 1 Installing The Lock UL refer to the CONSIDERATIONS diagram to follow For UL installations which are intended to provide certificated burglary service special requirements and ATTACK RESISTANCE Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing The panel door must be supervised Mount the clip on tamper switch supplied to the cabinet s right side wall as shown in the diagram and wire it to any EOLR supervised zone 1 8 Program this zone for Trouble by Day Alarm by Night type 05
286. re latching type glass break detectors Wire as follows also see Figure 12 1 Connect all detectors in parallel across zone 8 terminals 21 and 22 Remove the 2000 ohm EOL resistor if connected across the selected zone terminals You must connect the EOL resistor across the loop wires at the last detector GLASSBREAK DETECTOR 2000 OHMS EOLR LATCHING TYPE GLASS BREAK DETECTOR LOOP Figure 12 Wiring Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8 After an alarm the first code OFF turns off the siren and disarms the system the second code OFF clears the memory of alarm and resets the glassbreak detector 29 Compatible Glass Break Detectors Use detectors that meet the following ratings Standby Voltage 5VDC 13 8VDC Standby Resistance Greater than 20k ohms equivalent resistance of all detectors in parallel Alarm Resistance Less than 1 1k ohms see note below Alarm Current 2 mA 10 mA Reset Time Less than 6 seconds The IEI 735L series detectors have been tested and found to be compatible with these ratings You can use up to fifty IEI 735L detectors connected in parallel in the alarmed state The alarm current provided by zone 8 will support only one Glass Break detector You can use detectors which exceed 1 1k ohms in alarm provided they maintain a voltage drop in alarm of less than 3 8 volts zone 8 Other contacts may prevent proper gla
287. re reporting for individual zone types Enter 0 if no restore report is desired for a zone type ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR TYPES 9 10 Enter 1 to enable restore reporting for individual zone types Enter 0 if no restore report is desired for a zone type NON ALARM REPORT CODES FIRST DIGIT Enter the first digit of each report code for the conditions indicated on the programming form NON ALARM REPORT CODES SECOND DIGIT Enter the second digit of each report code for the conditions indicated on the programming form 83 84 85 87 88 89 90 1 01 1 09 1 17 1 18 FIRST TEST REPORT TIME Enter the day 00 07 and time 00 23 hours 00 59 min that the first test report shall be transmitted 00 eniry in all locations signifies immediately upon exiting 00 entry in the day location will cause the report to be sent at the next occurrence of the time that is set Note that day 01 Monday See fields 81 amp 82 for assigning the Test Report code SWINGER SUPPRESSION partition specific This option limits the number of messages Alarms or Troubles sent for a specific channel in an armed period Swinger Suppression Enter 01 15 If 00 is selected all Alarm or Trouble codes are reported Must be 00 disabled for UL installations ENABLE DIALER REPORTS FOR PANICS amp DURESS partition specific 95 96 99 Duress Enter 1 for eac
288. remote keyswitch arming disarming RECEIVED INCLUDING INTERFERENCE 8 Ground 8 Ground Active 1 OVDC 13 8VDC through 5k OHMS TABS See Installation Instructions for wiring instructions THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION 9 ae 4 silent panic 9 Ground Not Active 1k OHMS to around 000000000 J7 4 8 supports aire type glass break SEDE Hed Jumper ress Refer to Installation Instructions for information concerning Direct Wire Connectto Sait of dotoctors note 1 Downloading and printer connections using the 4100SM Serial Module 123456789 12VDC 4AH i USC 7AH ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8 ZONE 9 GEL CELL 6 28 29 30 BATTERY CHARGING Is 0 Wm VOLTAGE 2512 GE X DOC LOAD NO 5 182106 49 5 Dream en Connect to 2 Ds andset ncoming 24hr 120VAC 15 8 8 Phone Line EARTH GROUND S required or 60 Hz Outlet a 5 Connect to good earth capacity Red Blk Yel m ag gt Telephone connections ground D gt REMOTE KEYPAD gu 3 using Ademco No 620 maniy to ransionts Replace Use 4137AD 6137 6128 25 50 2 RJ31X direct connect SUUS p o I Sz di every 5137AD 6139 lt 55 amp cord proper grounding 3years TRANSFORMER 9 Addressable keypads os TO BVAC AVA essable keypads only 3 gt WARNING
289. rent draw no more than 64 devices can be connected to this loop Installations which require up to 86 zones will require the use of zone expanders which accommodate more than one zone per RPM device 4190WH 2 zones or 4208 8 zones If more devices are needed a 4197 Polling Loop Extender Module must be used The 4197 Polling Loop Extender Module may be used to provide additional polling loop current to extend the polling loop wire run and or to provide individual electrically isolated polling loops see Figure 14 total auxiliary load on the panel s power supply use the AUXILIARY CURRENT 4 Be sure to include the total current drawn on the polling loop when figuring the DRAW WORKSHEET in Section 15 FINAL POWER UP PROCEDURE 4197 may be powered from so Hs Pad Panel s auxiliary power output Power wires may run up to 375 feet gt using 16 AWG wire Separate supply VISTA 50P BONG VISTA 50PUL LOOP EXTENDER INPUT POLLING LOOP EXTENSION POLLING LOOP 64 MA MAX 64 MA MAX UP TO 64 DEVICES 87 ZONES UP TO ZONES NO INDIVIDUAL WIRE RUN ON THIS LOOP CAN BE NO INDIVIDUAL WIRE RUN ON THIS LOOP CAN BE LONGER THAN THE TABLE LENGTHS LONGER THAN THE TABLE LENGTHS TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS COMBINED TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 4000 ft 2000 ft IF USING CANNOT EXCEED 4000 ft 2000 ft IE USING UNSHIELDE IN CONDUIT OR SHIELDED WIRE SHIELDED WIRE U
290. rg Alarm Comm Delay 101 Burg Trigger For Response Type 8 96 Button Transmitters 49 Bypass Commands 132 Bypassing Zones 161 Cabinet Lock 0 California State Fire Marshal 171 Call Waiting Defeat 103 Call Waiting Defeat Logic 91 Canadian Department of Communications 173 Check Messages 168 Check in Signal 49 Checksum 99 145 Chime Mode 161 Chime on External Siren 80 104 Circuit Protectors 178 Cold Water Pipe 15 86 Comm Failure 167 Comm Split Report Selection 103 Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones 33 Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones Common Lobby Logic Communication Defaults Compatible Glass Break Detectors Confirmation of Arming Ding Connecting a 4100SM Module for Direct Wire Downloading Connector J7 2 istis 72 Consoles Maximum wire length 20 Contact ID Event Codes Table Of irte tene 144 Contact ID Reporting 141 143 145 Cross ZONing 91 quc 83 Custom Index 68 121 Custom 113
291. rming ding Also see EXTERNAL SOUNDERS section Wire the VISTA 50PUL tamper switch and AB12 Bell Box tamper switches to any EOLR supervised zone zones 1 8 Program this zone for day trouble night alarm type 05 or 24 hour audible alarm type 07 response The 24 hour alarm response must be used for multiple partitioned systems Entry delays must not exceed 45 seconds and exit delays must not exceed 60 seconds UL365 POLICE STATION CONNECTED BURGLAR ALARM Follow the instructions for UL609 local instructions For Grade A Service You may use the VISTA 50PUL dialer alone or the 7720 Long Range Radio alone When using the dialer program it to send burglary alarm low battery and communicator test reports Field 27 must be set to 024 or less so that test reports are sent at least once every 24 hours When using the 7720 connect it to the VISTA 50PUL burglary audible panic alarm panic alarm trigger For Grade AA Service You must use a 7920SE Long Range Radio Connect the 7920SE to the VISTA 50PUL burglary audible panic alarm panic alarm trigger UL611 UL1610 CENTRAL STATION BURGLARY ALARM 1 Follow the instructions for UL609 Local installations given above For Grade A Service You must use the VISTA 50PUL s dialer with a 7720 Long Range Radio Connect the Control s burglary audible panic alarm trigger on J7 header and the 659EN s phone line monitor output to the 7720 The 7720 will send a report to the central s
292. rting is selected in field 39 Can perform all system functions arm disarm bypass etc but cannot disarm if armed by another code or by Quick Arm Can add delete or change all other authority level codes and can select open close reports for any user s the only code that can enter program mode but even this can be prevented by exiting program mode using 98 The only way to access Programming mode if this done is by powering down the system powering up again and then pressing both the and keys at the same time within 30 seconds of power up Must program at least one master code during initial installation Master codes are codes intended for use by the primary user s of the system 155 156 Open Close Reporting Note When adding a user the system will only prompt for Open Close reporting capability if the user is being added by the Installer When a Master or Manager adds a new user the new user s Open Close reporting enable will be the same as that of the Master or Manager adding the user If Open Close reports are required to be selectable by the Master or Manager the Installer should assign two Master or Manager user codes one with Open Close reporting enabled and one without Note that Open Close reporting of Quick Arm is enabled if User 2 is enabled for Open Close reporting and that Quick Arm reports as User 0 In order for Quick Arm reports to be sent for all partitions User 02 must ha
293. s Limitation of Access By Time A user can manually extend the arm closing time window by 1 or 2 hours This is done by entering a keypad command security code 82 which then prompts the user to enter the desired extension time of 1 or 2 hours refer to the SYSTEM OPERATION section of the Installation Instructions This feature is useful if a user must stay on the premises later than usual The Enable Force Arm option causes the panel to attempt to bypass any faulted zones prior to auto arming panel will perform a force arm This option is set in partition specific program field 2 08 The system can automatically disarm at the end of a pre determined time window if the system has not been disarmed manually The disarming time can be delayed by using the auto disarm delay feature In addition the system can restrict disarming to a pre determined time Auto disarm delay provides a delay before Auto disarming This delay is added to the end of the disarm window The delay is set in 4 minute increments up to 56 minutes in partition specific program field 2 07 This option set in partition specific field 2 10 allows disarming by operator level users only during the disarm time window the arming window in case user needs to reenter oremises after arming or when the system is in alarm This option allows a means of reporting openings and closings by exception sent only if event occurs outside of the predetermined opening
294. s 93 to display the ZONE PROG prompt Press 0 to each menu option until DEVICE PROG prompt is displayed Press 1 to enter DEVICE PROGRAMMING mode 1 0 no The device address identifies the device to the 01 31 00 QUIT control The VIP module is factory set to address 04 Enter 04 Press to continue Enter device type 05 voice module Press to continue Enter the partition number 1 8 in which the voice module is located Press to continue The screen will prompt for the next device number to be programmed Press 00 at this prompt to return to the main menu Press 0 until ALPHA DESCRIPTORS prompt appears Press 1 YES Program alpha zone descriptors according to the procedure explained in Section 19 93 MENU MODE PROGRAMMING Alpha descriptors must be programmed if you want the VIP Module to annunciate a description of the zone s in alarm trouble etc If not the VIP Module will annunciate zone numbers only If you are using output relays you can program relay voice descriptors Refer to Section 9x RELAY OUTPUTS AND POWERLINE CARRIER DEVICES Custom Word Substitutes for VIP Module Annunciation A substitute word can be programmed for each of the 20 custom words used in your alpha zone descriptions This substitute word will be announced by the VIP module in place of the custom word that is displayed on the alpha keypad For example an alarm display of John s Bedroom co
295. s later in this section and in the Programming Form 22 The ZONE option functions independently of the EVENT ZONE LIST combination b PARTITION No P The device s Start ZONE TYPE SYSTEM OPERATION may be limited to an occurrence on either one partition 1 8 or any partition 0 59 60 STOP STP The STOP programming determines when and under what conditions the device will be de activated The following options are available 1 RESTORE ZONE LIST ZL If a ZONE LIST is used as the Stop event the device will de activate when all the zones in that list restore from a previous fault trouble or alarm condition This will occur regardless of what is programmed to START the device therefore a HESTORE ZONE LIST would normally only be used when a ZONE LIST is used to start the device 2 a ZONE TYPE SYSTEM OPERATION ZT Instead of using a RESTORE ZONE LIST a specific zone response type or system operation action can be selected to de activate the device If a specific ZONE TYPE is chosen any zone of that response type that restores from a previous alarm trouble or fault condition will cause the device to de activate If a SYSTEM OPERATION is chosen that operation will cause the device to de activate The different choices for ZONE TYPE and SYSTEM OPERATION are listed in Programming Relays amp Powerline Carrier devices later in this sect
296. s and hold the READY key until the built in instructions for that key appear then release the key The zone descriptors will appear one at a time for about 2 3 seconds each For faster viewing press the READY key to display the next descriptor in numerical order and so on When all descriptors have been displayed the control will exit display mode To exit display mode before all descriptors have been displayed enter the security code and press the OFF key 163 164 Viewing Downloaded Messages Users may occasionally receive a message from their installation company displayed on an alpha keypad When this occurs the keypad will display Message Press 0 for 5 secs Instruct the user to press and hold the 0 key to display the central station s message Note that the system must be in the READY state to view these messages Using The Built In User s Manual Panic Keys An abbreviated User s Manual is stored in the system s memory and can be particularly useful to the end user if the printed User s Manual is not conveniently accessible when the user needs to perform a seldom used and unfamiliar system procedure The Built in User s Guide is displayed only on an alpha keypad by simply pressing any of the function keys e g OFF AWAY STAY MAXIMUM BYPASS INSTANT CODE TEST READY and CHIME for approximately 5 seconds and then releasing it Abbreviated instructions relative to the key that has been pressed will then be
297. s appl Programming Holiday Schedules Hol Monday 3 2 3 4I 5sJ Up to 16 holidays can be defined for the system After entering Scheduling Menu Mode press 0 until the Holidays prompt appears Holidays 1Yes O No 0 HOLIDAY NUMBER 01 16 00 Quit 01 01 ENTER DATE 00 00 Part 12345678 Hit 0 8 x x Enter 1 to program holiday schedules Enter the 2 digit holiday number to be programmed and press to accept entry Enter 00 then at the Holiday Number prompt to quit the Holiday menus and display the Quit prompt Enter 0 at the Quit prompt to Quit return to the main menu choices and continue programming Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode The cursor will be positioned on the tens of months digit Enter the appropriate month then press to proceed to the day field Enter the appropriate day for the holiday and press to accept the entry Holidays can be set for any partition as follows Press 0 to turn all partitions on or off or else use keys 1 8 to toggle the letter x under the partition to which this holiday will apply Press the key when all desired partitions have been assigned The Holiday Number prompt will be displayed again Repeat the procedure for each holiday to be programmed When all holidays have been programmed enter 00 at the HOLIDAY NUMBER prompt to quit the holiday menus 131 132 Time Driven Event Worksheet These are the schedules us
298. sage 116 Intelligent Test Reporting 96 Interference Handbook 172 Interior w Delay 93 Interior Follower 92 Jf uem 82 dB nece rea e re sve 82 Keypad Connections Keypad Panic Enables 2 Keypads eene 20 Keyswitch Assignment 76 77 95 Limitation of Access 123 Limitation of Access by Time Worksheet 136 Limited Warranty 1 Line Seize Loop Number LORRA Low Speed Format Manager Code Manual Relay Activation Mode 70 165 Master Code 155 157 158 Master Keypad Setup 8 Menu Mode Menu Mode Programming 19 Modom 153 Mounting the Cabinet 10 Multiple Alarm Soundings 96 Multiple Alarms a 80 Multiple Alarms Multiple Partition Access 158 Non Alarm Report Codes 100 Normally Closed or EOLR 98 Normally Closed or EOLR Zones 2 8 30 Not Ready 161 NP4 12 89 178 NP7 12 89 178 Number
299. ses events are stored on a partition by partition basis except system events and are grouped into five categories as follows Use the 3 amp 1 keys to scroll to the next and previous screens respectively ALARM EVENT LOG Displays time date for zones that have either caused UUU an alarm or have been restored in selected partition CHECK EVENT LOG Displays time date for zones that have caused a TYPECCC UUU trouble or supervisory condition in selected partition BYPASS EVENT LOG Displays time date for zones that have been UUU bypassed in selected partition OP CL EVENT LOG Displays time date and user number for each TYPECCC UUU arming and disarming of the system for the partition selected SYSTEMEVENT LOG Displays time date for system problems such as AC TYPE COC UUU Loss communication failure etc regardless of partition ALL EVENT LOG Displays all categories of events in chronological TYPECCC UUU order from most recent to oldest To display the events in a particular category press 8 at the desired category screen If in Display Mode the most recent event is displayed Press 1 to display older events press 3 to go forward in time If in Print Mode the first press of 8 will cause the printer to print all events in that category with each event automatically scrolled on the display keypad The following is a typical display P8 01 01 12 02AM Shows burglary alarm occurred i
300. ss break detector operation 2 If latching type devices are installed on both zones 1 and 8 both zones should be assigned to the same partition If they are not and both devices are in alarm at the same time the resetting of one could cause a loss of alarm memory in the other 1 Do not use other or contacts when using glass break detectors Zone 9 Applications This zone is unsupervised and is suitable for monitoring fast acting glass break sensors or vibration sensors When using zone 9 keep the following in mind Use only closed circuit devices connected in series with one another Program zone 9 as any response type except fire type 09 or panic types 6 7 or 8 Program fast 10 msec or normal 350 msec 500 msec response in data field 514 Avoid using mechanical magnetic or relay type contacts on zone 9 when programmed for fast response 22 Programming Hardwired Zones 1 With at least one two line alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 wired and set to a proper address power up the system temporarily by plugging the AC transformer into a 120VAC outlet previously wired to the control 2 Enter data field programming mode Installer Code 8 0 0 and program the following data fields 14 ZONE 9 FAST NORMAL RESPONSE 1 fast 0 normal 41 NORMALLY CLOSED OR Zones 2 8 1 N C loops O EOLR 2 00 NUMBER OF PARTITIONS 1 8 if you haven t already done this in previo
301. supervised and can accept closed circuit sensors only cannot be used in UL installations Dual PIR Dual element PIR with built in RPM connects directly to the polling loop DIP switch programmable Includes mirrors for both wide angle and curtain long range applications and can use the 1875PA Pet Alley mirror Built in selectable pulse count capability Surface Mount Reed Contact Wide Gap Wide gap surface mounted reed contact with built in RPM connects directly to the polling loop DIP switch programmable with built in RPM connects directly to the polling loop DIP switch programmable 39 40 Compatible Polling Loop Devices Extender Module Used to increase the polling loop current 64mA to extend the polling loop wire run length and or to provide individual electrically isolated loops Connects to the polling loop and is powered from panel s auxiliary power or by a separate power supply with battery backup 4192SD Photoelectric Smoke Detector One piece photoelectric smoke detector with built in RPM DIP switch programmable 4192SDT Photoelectric Smoke Detector w Heat Detector One piece photoelectric smoke detector with 135 F 57 C heat detector and built in RPM DIP switch programmable 4192CP lonization Smoke Detector One piece products of combustion ionization detector with built in RPM DIP switch programmable 4139SN S
302. tation when a telephone line fault condition is detected Also connect the 7720 s radio fault output to one of the VISTA 50PUL s EOLR supervised zones i e 1 8 Program this zone for a trouble by day alarm by night type 05 or a 24 hour alarm type 07 08 response to radio faults Program the Control s dialer to send burglary alarm trouble opening closing and low battery reports For Grade AA Service Follow the instructions for Grade A service except use the 7920SE in place of the 7720 CALIFORNIA STATE FIRE MARSHAL CSFM AND UL RESIDENTIAL FIRE 24 HOUR BATTERY BACKUP REQUIREMENTS The California State Fire Marshal and UL have regulations which require that all residential fire alarm control panels must be provided with backup battery which has sufficient capacity to operate the panel and its attached peripherals devices for 24 hours in the intended standby condition followed by at least 4 minutes in the intended fire alarm signaling condition The VISTA 50P can meet this requirement without using a supplemental power supply provided that the panel s outputs including the current drawn from the auxiliary power output terminals are limited as shown below Output current is limited to 750mA maximum total auxiliary power polling loop and bell output current Maximum auxiliary current is 300mA including polling loop current Use 14AH battery Yuasa model NP7 12 recommended use two connected in parallel A dual battery har
303. th television reception d Make certain that the mounting screws are tight This insures that there is a good DETAIL SIDE VIEW OF BOARD INSERTED INTO DETAIL SIDE VIEW OF CLIP AND BAORD INSTALLED 3RD CLIP REQUIRED DETAIL SIDE VIEW OF CLIP INSTALLATION A CABINET TAB WITHOUT CLIP B CABINET TAB WITH HANGING CLIP Figure 3 Mounting The PC Board Standard Phone Line Connections 1 Connect the incoming phone line and handset wiring to the main terminal block as follows also see Figure 4 TB1 26 Local Handset TB1 27 Local Handset RING TB1 28 Incoming Phone Line TIP TB1 29 Incoming Phone Line RING 12 2 If you want to connect the panel to phone lines that require ground start capability then a 675 Ground Start Module must be used This module is triggered by one of the outputs on the connector labeled J7 see VOLTAGE TRIGGERS section UL The system must be connected to a phone line which provides loop start service Phone lines which provide ground start service are not permitted in UL applications the panel N To prevent the risk of shock disconnect phone lines at telco jack before servicing PABX f the communicator is connected to a telephone line inside a PABX be sure the PABX has a back up power supply that can support the PABX for 24 hours Many PABXs are not power backed up and connection to such a PABX will result in a communication
304. that this delay must be longer than Entry Delay 1 12 EXIT DELAY 2 partition specific Exit delay 2 is used for the zone assigned to Exit Delay 2 Note that this delay must be longer than Exit Delay 1 13 ALARM SOUNDER DURATION partition specific Defines the length of time an external sounder and the keypad s sounder will sound for all audible alarms multiply entry 01 15 by 2 minutes for actual duration This duration can be overridden by the Fire Timeout Disable option field 21 for fire alarms Minimum 4 minutes for UL installations 14 ZONE 9 RESPONSE TIME Enter 1 to set fast response mode 10msec for appropriate devices wired to zone 9 Enter 0 for normal response 350msec Must be 0 for UL 94 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 KEYSWITCH ASSIGNMENT Enter the partition number 1 8 in which the keyswitch is being used otherwise enter 0 Requires the use of zone 7 wired loop zone 7 no longer available as protection zone when used for keyswitch operation If the keyswitch is used the fire and panic alarm voltage triggers automatically become ARMING and READY status outputs for support of the Keyswitch LEDs Note Zone type 10 is automatically assigned to zone 7 if a keyswitch is used Reports openings closing by user 0 if reporting is enabled in field 40 CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DING partition specific Ent
305. the 41005 module and the serial printer as shown in Figure 27 Refer to the event logging commands paragraph for a description of the commands which initiate event log printing J8 CONNECTOR Ur Urs gt 4142TR CABLE SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM 4100SM SERIAL MODULE Gama curemaram TO PWR To TB7 Aux Power GND 6 RxD notused notused 9 not used 2 not used DTR 6 d d RED BLUE WHITE 41005 JUMPERS CUT TO SET RESPECTIVE SIGNAL FLOATING PIN 8 COLOR FUNCTION RED CD BLUE WHITE CTS 5 DSR 6 USE GENDER CHANGER 3M SUPPLIED WITH 41005 Cable IF PRINTER HAS DB25 Supplied with MALE CONNECTOR 41005 SERIAL PRINTER SET FOR 8 DATA BITS NO PARITY 1 OP BIT 300 1200 BAUD HARDWARE HANDSHAKE USING DTR SIGNAL Figure 27 Event Log Printer Connections NOTES 82 1 Printer must be configured as follows 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit 300 or 1200 baud 1200 preferred Hardware handshaking using DTR signal 2 41005 module package includes a 10 foot RS232 cable You can use a longer cable or an extension cable if the Control and serial printer are separated by more than 10 feet The total cable length should be less than 50 feet 3 Most printers either ignore the CTS DSR and CD signals or require them to be high i e 3 15VDC as measured on RS232 DB25 connector pins 5 6
306. the same phone line In the answering machine mode the caller should let the phone ring once then hang up and call again within 30 seconds The system upon hearing one ring followed by nothing will not answer the first call but will ready itself to pick up on the first ring of the next incoming call that is received within 30 seconds the downloader calling again 45 PRIMARY FORMAT This field selects the reporting format for use on the primary telephone number Enter the appropriate number for the primary format as follows 0 Low Speed 1 Contact ID 2 Ademco High Speed 3 Ademco Express 46 LOW SPEED FORMAT PRIMARY Enter the appropriate value 0 Ademco Low Speed 1 Sescoa Radionics 47 SECONDARY FORMAT This field selects the reporting format for the secondary telephone number Enter the appropriate number for the secondary format as follows 0 Speed 1 Contact ID 2 Ademco High Speed 3 Ademco Express 48 LOW SPEED FORMAT SECONDARY Enter the appropriate value 0 Ademco Low Speed 1 Sescoa Radionics 49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION Enter 1 for either or both primary secondary formats to send a verification digit to validate the message at the receiver without having to send two message rounds Selection is valid for 3 1 4 1 and 4 2 reports Enter 0 if not desired 99 100 50 51 52 53 SESCOA RADIONICS SELECT Enter 0 i
307. tics the DEVICE PROGRAMMING section for instructions on how to program addressable devices and the ALPHA PROGRAMMING section for programming alpha descriptors The following is a list of commands used while in the menu mode 93 Menu Mode Key Commands Enters Menu mode Serves as ENTER key Press to have keypad accept entry 0 Press to answer Press to answer YES Escapes from menu mode back into data field programming mode if entered at the first prompt of each main menu option Zone Programming Enter Programming mode Installer Code 8 0 0 The following fields should be programmed before beginning 2 00 Number of Partitions 1 32 RF Receiver Type Also before programming wireless zones the RF receiver must be enabled in Device Programming Mode later in Device Programming section Then press 93 to display ZONE PROG ZONE PROG Press 1 to enter ZONE PROGRAMMING mode The following screens will appear Press to display the next screen Press to display a previous screen Enter Zn No Enter the zone number to be programmed 01 86 00 QUIT 20 88 91 92 duress 95 96 97 or 99 Press to accept entry 20 ZT P RC A summary screen for that zone will appear 00 1 00 RF N ZT2Zone Type P Partition RC Report Code In the input type of device and L the device s loop number to which the sensor is connected some devices can support more than one zone by means
308. titioned 5 Ue IN ERE Uo RN RES 05 Common Lobby eicit tv 06 Master Keypad Setup and Operation sense 08 Section 3 INSTALLING THE CONTROL eee eeee eese enata seta stessa 10 Mounting the Cabinet deett etc C sss 10 VISTA 50PUL Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing 11 VISTA 50PUL Grade A Mercantile Safe And Vault Listing 11 Installing the Circuit Board icit sette p ene 12 Standard Phone Line Connections eene 12 Connecting the AC eyes Sv es 13 Installing the Backup Battery save e e Cn Reg ARR MARRE 15 Earth Ground Considerations eene 15 Section 4 THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING 16 Using Data Field Program MO dote vente tere eae ve Ha denen 16 System and Communication Defaults eene 16 Entering Data Field Program Mode see 16 Moving From One Page of Programming to Another 17 NIE wie Data uode beri dues te B Enea epa 17 Entry Errors tesi abe vo a e LA UO VA POUR US 17 Programming System Wide dta fields esses 18 Programming Partition Specific Data Fields sess 18 93 Menu Mode Pro
309. tral station and a person at the alarm installation for the purpose of alarm verification This feature is supported only if alarm reports are programmed to be sent to the primary phone number The AAV module connects from module terminals 7 amp 8 to the control s zone 5 terminals 16 amp 17 The purpose of this connection is to silence and restore the sounders at the premises It is also used to postpone non critical dialer reports while the AAV session is in progress Note that zone 5 is then no longer available as a protection zone When using the AAV zone 5 must be assigned a zone response type e g response type 10 and option 1 60 must be selected as 1 to silence sounders on the premises If 1 60 is not enabled conversation with the premises will be difficult too much noise on the premises AAV Module Operation After all messages have been sent during a reporting session to the primary phone number the control will trigger the AAV if at least one of the messages was an alarm report If Contact ID format is selected for the primary phone number and the cancel report field 81 is programmed as non zero the control will send a listen in to follow message event code 606 which signals the 685 rev 4 6 or higher to hold the phone connection for 1 minute Once triggering occurs the control will give up the phone line to the AAV module without breaking connection with the central station During the time the AAV is active all sire
310. transformer instead UL Use 1361CN Transformer in Canadian installations Earth Ground Considerations In order for the lightning transient protective devices in this product to be effective the designated earth ground terminal terminal 30 must be terminated in a good earth ground We recommend using 16 AWG copper wire run at a maximum length of 25 ft The following are examples of good earth grounds available at most installations Metal Cold Water Pipe Use a non corrosive metal strap copper is recommended firmly secured to the pipe to which the ground lead is electrically connected and secured AC Power Outlet Ground Available from 3 prong 120VAC power outlets only To test the integrity of the ground terminal use a three wire circuit tester with neon lamp indicators such as the UL Listed Ideal Model 61 035 or equivalent available at most electrical supply stores Connecting the Transformer 1 Use the Polling Loop Current Draw and Auxiliary Device Current Draw Worksheets found later in this section to make sure that the currents drawn from the devices connected to the system do not exceed the system s respective ratings malfunction Failure to observe the auxiliary output current rating will result in a Failure to observe the polling loop current rating will cause polling loop AN battery which does not charge properly or possibly a tripped circuit breaker 2 Connect all installed devices to th
311. uld be announced as Son s Bedroom since there is no annunciation for the custom word John Note that if a substitute word is not assigned the VIP module will not annunciate the zone descriptor at all but will only annunciate the zone number To enter custom words substitutes do the following 1 From data field programming mode press 493 to display the ZONE PROG prompt Press 0 NO to each menu option until the CUSTOM INDEX prompt is displayed CUSTOM INDEX Enter 1 at this prompt 0 no 1 yes CUSTOM WORD NO Enter the custom word number 01 20 for which a 00 QUIT voice substitute is desired Enter 00 to quit this programming mode Press 7 to accept entry 01 ENTER INDEX Enter the 3 digit substitute word index number from the relay voice descriptor and custom word substitutes vocabulary list found in the Relay Voice Descriptors section Press to accept entry The CUSTOM WORD NO prompt will be displayed Enter the next custom word number to be substituted or enter 00 to quit Section 11 AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION AAV UNIT This section provides the following information General information about the AAV option AAV operation Connecting an Eagle AAV Module AAV programming requirements General Information An Audio Alarm Verification AAV module also known as two way voice such as the Eagle 1241 is an add on accessory that permits voice dialog between an operator at a cen
312. up Pulse XX minutes set in field 1 74 Relay Group 10 Relay Group Pulse YY seconds set in field 1 75 Relay Group Arm Disarm commands Activation times 1 Beginning 2 End 3 During are the only valid choices for automatic arming and disarming functions During can be used to arm or disarm the control for specific time only For example if during is selected with arm stay the system will arm stay at the beginning of the window and disarm at the end of the window Action Code Action Specifier 20 Arm Stay Partition s 21 Arm Away Partition s 22 Disarm Partition s 23 Force Arm Stay Auto bypass faulted zns Partition s 24 Force Arm Away Auto bypass faulted zns Partition s The auto arm warning and auto arm disarm delay times fields 2 05 2 07 apply Bypass commands Activation times 1 Beginning 2 End 3 During are the only valid choices for bypass commands f During is selected for auto bypassing the system will bypass the zone s specified on a particular Zone List at the beginning of the window and unbypass the zone s at the end of the window If it is selected for auto unbypassing the system will remove the bypass of the zone s at the beginning of the window and will restore the bypass of the zone s at the end of the window Action Code Action Specifier 30 Auto bypass Zone list Zone list 31 Auto unbypass Zone list Zone list Open Close Windows Activation time 3
313. us 3 From data field programming mode press 93 to display the ZONE PROG prompt ZONE PROG 1 YES 0 NO ENTER ZN NO 00 QUIT 02 02 ZT P RC In L 001 00 HW N 02 Zone Type Zone disabled 00 Press 1 to enter ZONE PROGRAMMING mode While in this mode press to display the next Screen or press to display the previous screen Enter the zone number to be programmed 01 09 Press to continue A summary screen for that zone will appear ZT zone type P partition to which zone is assigned RC report code for that zone In input type of zone L Loop number applies only to 5800 series RF zones Press to continue Each zone in a system must be assigned a zone type which defines the way in which the system responds to faults in that zone Enter the zone response type for each zone The screen will automatically display the zone type for the number entered If a different zone response type is desired enter a different number and press continue Zones 1 9 can be assigned any response type except zone 9 which cannot be assigned as a fire zone Refer to the ZONE TYPE DEFINITIONS section for definitions of each zone type Zone Types for hardwired zones are as follows 00 Assign For Unused Zo 01 Entry Exit 1 Burglary 02 Entry Exit 2 Burglary 03 Perimeter Burglary nes 06 24 Hour Silent Alarm 07 24 Hour Audible Alarm 08 24 Hour A
314. used for another device type Select the type of addressable device as follows 00 device not used 01 alpha keypad 5137AD 6139 02 fixed word keypad 4137AD 6137 61 28 03 RF receiver 4281 5881 04 output relay module 4204 05 voice VIP module 4285 Press to accept entry If device type 01 or 02 was selected this prompt will appear Enter the addressable device s default partition number 01 to maximum number of partitions programmed for system in field 2 00 This is the primary partition for which the device is intended to be used Enter 9 to make this keypad a Master keypad for the system Press to accept entry If device type 03 is selected this prompt will appear Enter the 2 digit House ID 00 31 This is required for 5700 series systems only or if using a wireless keypad 5827 5827BD with a 5800 series system If device type 05 voice VIP module was selected enter the partition number 1 8 in which the voice module is located Press to accept entry SOUND OPTION Addressable keypads individually programmed to suppress arm disarm beeps entry exit beeps and chime mode beeps This helps prevent unwanted sounds from disturbing users in other areas of the premises Enter a number 00 03 for the keypad sounding suppression options desired for the keypad as follows 00 no suppression 01 suppress arm disarm amp entry
315. users with installer or master authority level Use 5137AD or 6139 alpha keypad to set the real time clock or set the clock can set the real time clock Setting the Time and Date 1 Enter installer or master code 63 Typical display shows TIME DATE THU 12 01 AM 01 01 90 2 day of the week is automatically calculated based on the date entered Time and date entries are made by simply entering the appropriate hour minute month day and year Press the key to accept the entered value The cursor then moves to the right Press the key to move the cursor to the left of the display to the previous position Enter the correct hour then press to move to the minutes and make the correct entry Press again then press any key 0 9 to set AM PM Press any key again to change AM to PM or PM to AM Press to move cursor to the month position and enter the correct month using a 2 digit entry Press and enter the correct date Press and enter the correct year 3 Exit clock mode by pressing the key after the cursor is in the year position Section 24 SECURITY ACCESS CODES This section provides the following information General information about security access codes Definition of user authority levels How to add a user access code How to change a user access code How to delete a user access c
316. uxiliary 09 Fire 04 Interior Follower Burglary 10 Interior Delay Burglary 05 Trouble By Day Alarm 02 Partition 02 Report Code By Night 23 No Alarm Response Used for Relay Activation Enter the partition number 1 8 you are assigning this zone to Press to continue Enter the report code for this zone Enter the first digit and press Enter the second digit and press again A summary of both digits will be displayed Press to continue 21 32 02 Input Type Enter the input device type as follows Hardwired 1 1 0 not used 1 hardwired Press to continue The summary screen is displayed Press to display the ENTER ZN NO prompt for programming the next hardwired zone After all zones have been programmed enter 00 at this prompt and press The system will prompt Quit Menu Mode Press 1 to quit This will return you to normal data field programming mode Press 99 to exit program mode Enter the Installer Code OFF to cancel the system s settling delay Check Out Procedure For Hard Wired Zones After installation of all hard wired zones is complete each partition of the security system should be checked as follows 1 Make certain that all devices and sensors connected to the hard wired zones are not in a faulted state Doors and windows with contacts should be closed PIRs sh
317. ve authority and Open Close enabled for all partitions If a code with access to all partitions is not desired it is suggested that user 02 be assigned authority level 5 in all partitions and that the code be kept secret Authority level 5 cannot disarm the system unless armed by that user Level 1 Master Codes Can perform all normal system functions be used to assign up to 73 lower level codes which be used by other users of the system Cannot assign anybody a level of 0 or 1 May change his own code Can add delete change manager or operator codes Each user s code can be individually eliminated or changed at any time Open close reporting of added users are same as that of the master or manager adding the new user Level 2 Manager Codes Can perform all system functions Arm Disarm Bypass etc programmed by Master May add delete or change other users of the system below this level Manager cannot assign anybody a level of 0 1 or 2 May change his own code Open close reporting of added users will be same as his own enabled or disabled as assigned by installer or master Levels 3 5 Operator Codes Can arm and disarm the system to the authority assigned but cannot add or modify any user code May operate a partition with one of the three OPERATOR authority levels A through C listed below Level Title Functions Permitted 3 Operator A Arm Disarm Bypass
318. vent Logging Procedures In order for proper time and date stamping to occur the system s real time clock must be set Refer to the SETTING THE REAL TIME CLOCK section 26 If you have selected the printer to be on line field 1 72 events will print automatically as they occur To display or print on demand the following commands apply Commands Display Mode installer or master code 6 0 Print Mode installer or master code 6 1 Clear Event Log installer or master code 6 2 To EXIT Event Log Press at any time 83 Display Printing After entering either the Display or Print mode the following will be displayed ENTERO RECENT The Event Log holds up to 224 events and can display 1 or print all events a category complete or only those events in a category occurring since the last Clear Event Log command recent Note that once the Event Log is full the oldest event will be erased upon the logging of any new event Press the desired display mode key 0 or 1 SCAN LOG BY PART The system allows viewing of any partition s event 0 1 8 PART log Enter the partition number for the partition whose events are to be displayed Entering 0 NO will display all events that occurred in the system regardless of partition Events are displayed in chronological order from most recent to oldest For display and printing purpo
319. vices Polling loop limitations Programming polling loop zones Checkout procedure for polling loop zones Polling Loop Overview You can expand the system from the basic 9 zones to up to 86 zones using the built in 2 wire polling loop Each device that is connected to the polling loop has the ability to communicate with the panel about its status These devices are called RPMs Remote Point Modules The polling loop provides both power and data to the RPM zones and is constantly monitoring the status of all zones enabled on the loop The maximum current draw of all devices on the polling loop cannot total more than 64mA unless using a 4197 Polling Loop Extender Module xK Refer to the list of compatible devices at the end of this section Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones Polling loop zones have the following characteristics Must use RPM Remote Point Module devices Supervised by control panel Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions Wiring Addressing RPM Devices All devices on the pollong loop must be wired in parallel to the and Polling Loop terminals of the control panel 24 and 25 respectively You can wire from device to device or have multiple branches connected directly to the control panel in a star configuration Be sure to observe proper polarity Although each polling loop device is wired in parallel each device has its own unique zone number or group of zones if
320. word have an s s added to it In addition up to 20 installer defined words can be added to those already in memory Thus when an alarm or trouble occurs in a zone an appropriate description for the location of that zone will be displayed at the keypad A custom installer s message can be programmed for each partition which will be displayed when the system is Ready ex THE PETERSON s To program alpha descriptors enter Programming mode then press 93 to display ZONE PROG Press 0 NO twice to display ALPHA PROG Press 1 to enter ALPHA PROGRAMMING mode There are 6 sub menu selections that will be displayed one at a time Press 1 to select the mode desired Press 0 to display the next mode available The alpha menu selections are ZONE DESCRIP for entering zone descriptors DEFAULT SCREEN for creating custom message displayed when system ready CUSTOM WORD for creating custom words for use descriptors PART DESCRIP for creating 4 character partition names RELAY DESCRIP for creating descriptors for relays EXIT EDIT MODE Press 1 to exit back to 93 Menu Mode Refer to the sections that follow for procedures for adding alpha descriptors Zone Descriptors 1 Select ZONE DESCRIPTOR mode The keypad keys perform the following functions 3 Scrolls both alphabet and actual words in ascending alphabetical order 1 Scrolls both
321. would normally be displayed on an Alpha keypad under the same system conditions see the words in bold in the Alpha Vocabulary list found in Section 19 93 MENU MODE PROGRAMMING If the VIP module cannot annunciate a word in zone descriptor it will not annunciate the descriptor at all but will still annunciate the zone number Remote access to the VIP Module can be toggled on and off by using the Security Code 91 command see VIP Module instruction manual You must use the master or installer code only The VIP Module reports trouble as zone 87 if data communication with the control is lost Detailed operating instructions for phone access to the security system are provided with the VIP Module In addition a Phone Access User s Guide is supplied with the VIP Module for the user of the system Mounting the 4285 VIP Module The VIP Module may be mounted in the control cabinet if space is available or if this is not possible on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it Pry off the VIP Module s cover prior to wiring 1 When the VIP Module is mounted inside the control cabinet attach it to the cabinet s interior surface with 2 faced adhesive tape 65 Do not mount the VIP Module on the cabinet door or attempt to attach it to the PC board x 2 When mounting the VIP Module outside the cabinet use the screw holes at the rear to mount horizontally or vertically 2 faced adhesive tape may be used
322. xit will take place Type 02 Entry Exit 2 Burglary This zone type provides a secondary entry delay whenever the zone is faulted if the panel is armed in the Away and Stay modes When the panel is armed in the Instant or Maximum modes no entry delay is provided Secondary exit delay begins whenever the control is armed regardless of the arming mode selected These delays are programmable This zone type is usually assigned to sensors or contacts on doors through which more time is needed to get to and from the keypad Delay times for this zone type must be greater than Zone Type 01 Ex a garage loading dock or basement door 92 03 Perimeter Burglary This zone type gives an instant alarm if the zone is faulted when the panel is armed in the Away Stay Instant or Maximum modes This zone type is usually assigned to all sensors or contacts on exterior doors and windows Type 04 Interior Follower This zone type gives a delayed alarm using the programmed Entry Exit time if the Entry Exit zone is faulted first Otherwise this zone type gives an instant alarm This zone type is active when the panel is armed in the Away or Maximum modes Maximum mode eliminates the entry delay This zone type is bypassed automatically when the panel is armed in the Stay or Instant modes This zone type is usually assigned to a zone covering an area such as a foyer lobby or hallway through which one must pass upon entry or exit
323. y Upon a successful match the Control panel will seize the phone line and call the computer back unless call back is not required The computer answers usually by the second ring and executes a handshake with the panel The panel then sends other default information to the computer If this information matches the computer s information a successful link is established This is known as being ON LINE ZT Alarm and trouble responses and reports are disabled during on line time Should an event occur during this time the response will take place and the report will go through as soon as the remote access sequence is completed Alarm and trouble conditions are not ignored they are simply delayed The keypads are inactive during downloading communication and resume normal functions after hang up All keypad entries are ignored during on line time On Line Control Functions The following functions can be performed while on line with a control panel Arm the System in the Away Mode Disarm the System Bypass a Zone Force the System to Accept a New Program Download Shut Down Communication dialer Functions non payment of monitoring fees in an owned system Shut Down all Security System Functions non payment for a leased system Inhibit Local Keypad Programming prevents takeover of your accounts Leave a message for customer Command the System to Upload a Copy of its Resident Program to the office Read Arming St
324. you understand the programming of OUTPUT DEVICES when using the 93 Relay Programming mode The options used to start and stop these devices are described below followed by the actual screen prompts and available entries The letter s in parentheses after each function described below such as A after ACTION are those that appear in the various summary displays of programmed data during programming ACTION A The ACTION of the device is how the device will respond when it is activated by the START programming You may want the device to activate momentarily to pulse on and off continuously or to remain activated until some other event occurs to stop it There are four different choices of actions ACTIVATE for 2 SECONDS and then reset ACTIVATE and REMAIN ACTIVATED until stopped by some other event PULSE ON and OFF until stopped by some other event NO RESPONSE when the device is not used START STT START programming determines when and under what conditions the device will be activated The following START options are available 1 2 EVENT is the condition Alarm Fault Trouble that must occur to a zone or group of zones zone list in order to activate the device These conditions apply only when a zone list is used The different choices for EVENT are listed below and in Programming Relays amp Powerline Carrier devices in the section that follows ALARM Relay action be

Vista 50P - Information Technologies

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents